Swarthmore College Catalogue, 1971-1972

CATALOGUE ISSUE

1971-72

SWART H M OR E
¿OLLEGE BULLETIN

os* ,N TME U M n f

SWARTHMOiiE
COLLEGE
\ LIBRARY

SWARTHMORE COLLEGE
m

BULLETIN

CATALOGUE

Volume LXIX

ISSUE

■ 197 1 - 1 9 7 2

Number 1

September 1971

DIRECTIONS FOR CORRESPONDENCE
SWARTHMORE COLLEGE, SWARTHMORE, PA. 19081
general college policy

Robert D. Cross, President

academic policy

Charles E. Gilbert, Provost
William D. Quesenbery, Jr.,
Dean of Admissions

admissions and scholarships

records, transcripts and catalogues

financial information

Edward K. Cratsley, Vice-President
G. Caroline Shero, Associate Controller

career planning and placement

alumni affairs and public relations

GENERAL

Jane H. Thompson,
Associate Registrar

Judith Kapustin Katz,
Director
Joseph B. Shane,
Vice-President
Maralyn Orbison Gillespie,
Director of News Office

information

The B u l l e t in , of which this publication is Volume LXIX, No 1, is published
in March, May, July, September, October, and twice in December and January
by Swarthmore College, Swarthmore, Pennsylvania 19081.
Photographs by Grant Heilman, Walter Holt and James Purring
(Printed in U. S. A.)

ST/8

2

TA B L E OF C O N TEN TS
CALENDAR 5
I

II

INTRODUCTION 9
EDUCATIONAL RESOURCES 12
ADMISSION 21
EXPENSES 26
FINANCIAL AID 28

III

COLLEGE LIFE 43
STUDENT COMMUNITY 48

IV

EDUCATIONAL PROGRAM 55
FACULTY REGULATIONS 70
DEGREE REQUIREMENTS 74
AWARDS AND PRIZES 77
FELLOWSHIPS 79

V

COURSES OF INSTRUCTION 81
Art 83
Astronomy 87
Biology 89
Black Studies 95
Chemistry 98
Classics 101
Economics 106
Education 110
Engineering 112
English Literature 123
History 129
International Relations 135
Linguistics 136

V I

V II

Mathematics 138
Mediaeval Studies 144
Modern Languages
and Literatures 145
Music 158
Philosophy 162
Physical Education for Men 168
Physical Education for Women 169
Physics 171
Political Science 176
Psychology 183
Religion 188
Sociology and Anthropology 193

THE CORPORATION and BOARD OF MANAGERS 201
ALUMNI OFFICERS and COUNCIL 204
FACULTY 206
ADMINISTRATION 220
VISITING EXAMINERS 228
DEGREES CONFERRED 230
AWARDS AND DISTINCTIONS 233
ENROLLMENT STATISTICS 235
INDEX 236
PLAN OF COLLEGE GROUNDS 238

SEPTEM
SUN MON TUE WEO
1
5
7
8
6
12 13 14 15
19 2 0 21 22
2 6 27 2 8 2 9

BER
tHU
2
9
16
23
30

FRI
3
10
17
24

SAT
4
11
18
25

SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI
1
7
8
4
6
3
5
10 m 12 13 14 15
17 18 19 2 0 2 1 22
2 4 25 26 27 2 8 2 9
31

SAT
2
9
16
23
30

OCTOBER

EM BER
WED THU
3
4
10 11
17 18
2 4 25

FRI
5
12
19
26

SAT
6
13
20
27

DEC EM BER
SUN MON TUE WEO THU
1 . 2
7
8
9
5
6
12 13 14 15 16
19 2 0 21 2 2 2 3
2 6 27 2 8 2 9 3 0

FRI
3
10
17
24
31

SAT
4
11
18
25

NOV
SUN MON: TUE
i
2
8
9
7
14 15 16
21 22 2 3
28 29 30

1973

1972

1971
SUN MON
1
8
7
14 15
21 2 2
28 29

M AY
TUE WED THU FRI
2
3
4
5

9

10

11

12

16
23
30

17
24
31

18
25

19
26

JUNE
SUN MON TUE WED THU
1
6
7
8
5
4
11 12 13 14 15
18 19 2 0 21 2 2
25 26 27 28 29

FRI
2
9
16
23
30

JULY
SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI
2
9
16
23
30

3
10
17
24
31

4
11
18
25

5
12
19
26

6
13
20
27

AUGUST
SUN MON TUE WED THU
1 2
3
8
9
10
6
7
13 14 15 16 17
2 0 21 2 2 2 3 2 4
27 2 8 2 9 3 0 31

SAT
6
13
20
27

SAT
3
10
17
24

JANUARY
TUE WED THU
3
4
2
9
10 11
16 17 18
2 3 2 4 25
3 0 31

FRI
5
12
19
26

SAT
6
13
20
27

FEBRUARY
SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI
2
1
7
8
9
5
6
4
11 12 13 14 15 16
18 19 2 0 21 22 2 3
2 6 27 2 8

SAT
3
10
17
24

SUN MON
1
7
8
14 15
21 22
28 29

25

MARCH
SUN MON TUE WEO THU .
1
8
5
7
4
6
ft
12 13 14 15
18 19 2 0 21 2 2
2 5 2 6 27 2 8 29

7
14
21
28

SAT
1
8
15
22
29

FRI
4
11
18
25

SAT
5
12
19
26

SUN
1
8
15
22
29

8
15
22
29

SAT
2
9
16
23
30

SUN MON TUE
1
7
8
6
14
15
13
2 0 21 22
27 2 8 29

MON
2
9
16
23
30

APRIL
TUE WED THU
5
3
4
10 11 12
17 18 19
24 25 2 6

FRI
2
9
16
23
30

SAT
3
10
17
24
31

FRI
6
13
20
27

SA)
7
14
21
28

1972
JANUARY
SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI
2
9
16
23
30

3
10
17
24
31

4
11
18
25

5
12
19
26

6
13
20
27

FEBRUARY
SUN MON TUE WED THU
1
2
3
10
6
7
8
9
13 14 15 16 17
2 0 21 22 23 24
27 2 8 29

7
14
21
28

SAT
1
8
15
22
29

FRI
4
11
18
25

SAT
5
12
19
26

FRI

SAT
4
11
18
25

MARCH
SUN MON TUE WED THU
1
2
7
8
9
5
6
12 13 14 15 16
19 2 0 21 22 2 3
2 6 27 28 29 3 0

3
10
17
24
31

APRIL
SUN MON TUE WED THU

FRI

SAT

7
14
21
28

8
15
22
29

SEPTEMBER
SUN MON TUE WEO THU FRI

1

6
13
20
27

7
14
21
28

3
10
17
24

4
11
18
25

4

5
12
19
26

6
13
20
27

THÙ:
3
10
17
24
31

FRI ,S at
5
4
11 12
18 19
25 26

3
10
17
24

4
11
18
25

5
12
19
26

SUN
1
8
15
22
29

MON
2
9
16
23
30

OCTOBER
TUE WED THU
3
4
5
10 11 12
17 18 19
24 25 26
31

FRI
6
13
20
27

SAT
7
14
21
28

JUNE
SUN MON Tue WED THU TRI
1
4
5
6
7 '• 8
3
10 11 12 13 14 15
17 18 19 20 21 22
2 4 25 26 27 2 8 2 9

NOVEMBER
SUN MON TUE WED THU
1 2
7
8
9
5
6
14
15
16
13
12
19 2 0 21 2 2 2 3
26 27 28 29 30

FRI
3
10
17
24

SAT
4
11
18
25

SUN
1
8
15
22
29

DECEMBER
SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI

1
2
9
16
23
30

MAY
WEO
2
9
16
23
30

3
10
17
24
31

4
11
18
25

5
12
19
26

6
13
20
27

7
14
21
28

8
15
22
29

SAT
2
9
16
23
30

JULY
WED
4
11
18
25

SAT
2
9
16
23
30

THU
5
12
19
26

FRI
6
13
20
27

SAT
7
14
21
28

AUGUST
SUN MON TUE WED? THU
1
2
8
5
6
7
9
12 13 14 15 16
19 20 21 22 2 3
2 6 27 2 8 2 9 3 0

FRI
3
10
17
24
31

SAT
4
11
18
25

MON
2
9
16
23
30

TUE
3
10
17
24
31

College Calendar

1971
September 14-18
September 17
September 18
September 20
October 1
November 25-27
December 3, 4
December 10
December 17

Fall Semester
Freshman placement days
Meeting of Honors students
Registration
Classes and Honors seminars begin
Meeting of the Board of Managers
Thanksgiving recess
Annual Meeting of the Board of Managers
Registration for spring semester
Christmas vacation begins, 6:00 p.m.

1972
lanuary
lanuary
lanuary
lanuary
lanuary

3
11
13
20
21

Christmas vacation ends, 8:30 a.m.
Classes and seminars end
Mid-year examinations begin
Meeting of Honors students
Mid-year examinations end

Spring Semester
lanuary 24
February 4, 5
March 17
March 27
March 31, April 1
May 5
May 8
May 12
May 15-17
May 18
May 23
May 25-27
May 27
June 2
June 3
June 4
June 5

Classes and seminars begin
Meeting of the Board of Managers
Spring vacation begins, 6:00 p.m.
Spring vacation ends, 8:30 a.m.
Meeting of the Board of Managers
Classes and seminars end
Enrollment in classes for fall semester
Written Honors examinations begin
Senior comprehensive examinations
Course examinations begin
Written Honors examinations end
Oral Honors examinations
Course examinations end
Meeting of the Board of Managers
Alumni Day
Baccalaureate Day
Commencement Day

5

College Calendar (Tentative)

1972
September 5-9
September 8
September 9
September 11
October 6, 7
November 23-26
December 1, 2
December 8
December 14
December 22
December 22

Fall Semester
Freshman placement days
Meeting of Honors students
Registration
Classes and Honors seminars begin
Meeting of the Board of Managers
Thanksgiving recess
Annual Meeting of the Board of Managers
Registration for spring semester
Mid-year examinations begin
Mid-year examinations end
Christmas vacation begins, 6:00 p.m.

1973
January 8
January 11
January 12

Christmas vacation ends, 8:30 a.m.
Meeting of Honors students
Classes and seminars end

Spring Semester
January 15
February 2, 3
March 9
March 19
April 6, 7
April 27
April 30
May 4
May 7-9
May 10
May 15
May 17-19
May 19
May 25
May 26
May 27
May 28

6

Classes and seminars begin
Meeting of the Board of Managers
Spring vacation begins, 6:00 p.m.
Spring vacation ends, 8:30 a.m.
Meeting of the Board of Managers
Classes and seminars end
Enrollment in classes for fall semester
Written Honors examinations begin
Senior comprehensive examinations
Course examinations begin
Written Honors examinations end
Oral Honors examinations
Course examinations end
Meeting of the Board of Managers
Alumni Day
Baccalaureate Day
Commencement Day

■P

■

IN TR O D U C TIO N TO
SW A RTH M O RE CO LLEG E
Swarthmore College, founded in 1864 by members of the Religious
Society of Friends, is a co-educational college occupying a campus of
about 300 acres of rolling wooded land in and adjacent to the borough
of Swarthmore in Delaware County, Pennsylvania. It is a small col­
lege by deliberate policy. Its present enrollment is about 1175 stu­
dents, of whom 525 are women and 650 are men. The borough of
Swarthmore is a residential suburb within half an hour’s commuting
distance of Philadelphia. Because of its location, Swarthmore College
students are able to combine the advantages of a semi-rural setting
with the opportunities offered by Philadelphia. Especially valuable is
the cooperation made possible with three other nearby institutions,
Bryn Mawr and Haverford Colleges and the University of Pennsyl­
vania.
OB JECTIVES AND PURPOSES
In accordance with the traditions of its Quaker background,
Swarthmore students are expected to prepare themselves for full,
balanced lives as'individuals and as responsible citizens through ex­
acting intellectual study supplemented by a varied program of sports
and other extra-curricular activities.
The purpose of Swarthmore College is to make its students more
valuable human beings and more useful members of society. It shares
this purpose with other educational institutions, for American educa­
tion is a direct outgrowth of our democratic principles. While a com­
mon purpose underlies all American education, each school and col­
lege and university seeks to realize that purpose in its own way. Each
must select those tasks it can do best. Only by such selection can it
contribute to the diversity and richness of educational opportunity
which is part of the American heritage and the American strength.
9

INTRODUCTION

STANDARDS OF EXCELLENCE
Democracy demands a broad base of intelligent understanding of
issues. It also necessitates a high order of excellence in those who are
destined to become its leaders. Swarthmore can best serve society by
the maintenance of high standards. It is peculiarly fitted by tradition
and performance for this essential role, and it is precisely this readi­
ness to do a particular job well that gives the College its value in the
educational pattern of American democracy.
Education is largely an individual matter, for no two students are
exactly alike. Some need detailed help, while others profit from con­
siderable freedom. The program of Honors study, in which Swarth­
more pioneered, is designed to give recognition to this fact. It is the
most distinctive feature of the College’s educational program. For
many students, it provides an enriching and exciting intellectual
experience. It has as its main ingredients freedom from ordinary
classroom routine, close association with faculty members in small
seminars, concentrated work in broad fields of study and maximum
latitude for the development of individual responsibility. The Honors
program and the Course program are alternative systems of instruc­
tion for students during their last two years. Both are designed to
evoke the maximum effort and development from each student, the
choice of method being determined by individual need and capacity.
THE R EL IG IO US T R A D I T I O N
Swarthmore College was founded by members of the Religious So­
ciety of Friends, and it seeks to illuminate the life of its students with
the spiritual principles of that Society. Although it has been non-sec­
tarian in control since the beginning of the present century, and al­
though the children of Friends compose a minority of the student
body, the College seeks to preserve the religious traditions out of
which it sprang.
The essence of Quakerism is the individual’s responsibility for
seeking truth and for applying whatever truth he believes he has
found. As a way of life, it emphasizes hard work, simple living, and
generous giving; personal integrity, social justice, and the peaceful
settlement of disputes. The College does not seek to impose on its stu­
dents this Quaker view of life, or any other specific set of convictions
about the nature of things and the duty of man. It does, however,
have the two-fold aim of encouraging conscious concern about such
questions and unceasing re-examination of any view which may be
10

INTRODUCTION

held regarding them. That is the kind of ethical and religious charac­
ter which Swarthmore seeks to develop.
T R A D I T I O N AND CHANGE
A college is never static. Its purposes and policies are always
changing to meet new demands and new conditions. The founders of
Swarthmore would find in it today many features which they never
contemplated when they shaped the College in the middle of the nine­
teenth century. Swarthmore, if it is to remain effective, must be for­
ever changing. The goal is to achieve for each generation, by means
appropriate to the times, that unique contribution and that standard
of excellence which have been the guiding ideals of Swarthmore from
its founding.
In the spring and summer of 1966 a Commission on Educational
Policy and two other special committees were appointed to study var­
ious aspects of the College program and to seek ways of strengthening
the educational experiences of Swarthmore students. Their reports,
including many specific recommendations, were published in the vol­
ume, Critique of a College, which appeared in December 1967. Dur­
ing the rest of the college year these reports and recommendations
were carefully considered by all sections of the College community.
Many of the specific recommendations were approved and have been
carried into effect.

11

E D U C A T IO N A L R E SO U R C E S
PHYSICAL F A C IL IT IE S
The primary educational resources of any college are the quality
of its faculty and the spirit of the institution. Second to these are the
physical facilities, in particular the libraries, laboratories and equip­
ment.
Laboratories, well equipped for undergraduate instruction and in
some cases for research, exist in physics, chemistry, zoology, botany,
psychology, astronomy, and in civil, mechanical and electrical engi­
neering. The Sproul Observatory, with its 24-inch visual refracting
telescope, is the center of much fundamental research in multiple star
systems. The Edward Martin Biological Laboratory provides facili­
ties for work in psychology, zoology, botany, and pre-medical studies.
The Pierre S. du Pont Science Building, completed in 1960, provides
accommodations for chemistry, mathematics, and physics. Beardsley
and Hicks Halls contain the engineering laboratories.
The Language Laboratory in Beardsley Hall, made possible by a
contribution from the James Foundation of New York, was installed
in 1964. It provides stations for 35 students and has the equipment
for effective use in language teaching.
The Arts Center, opened in 1961, contains the Paul M. Pearson
Experimental Theater, the Florence Wilcox Lobby for art exhibitions,
and studios for various arts and crafts.
The Computer Center, located in Beardsley Hall, is furnished with
an IBM 1130 computer and appropriate supporting equipment. It is
available to students and faculty members for research and instruc­
tion, and its use by students is encouraged. Students and faculty
members also have remote access to IBM 360 facilities within the
Philadelphia region.
The Bartol Research Foundation of the Franklin Institute, which is

12

EDUCATIONAL RESOURCES

also located on the campus, enjoys an international reputation for its
basic research activities in physics, particularly in the fields of nuclear
physics, cosmic radiation, solid state physics, and astronomy. Through
its affiliation with Thomas Jefferson University, Bartol offers a program
of study leading to the Ph.D. degree.
The Thomas B. and Jeannette E. L. McCabe Library contains read­
ing rooms, offices and the major portion of the College library collec­
tion. Total College library holdings amount to 350,000 volumes. Some
15,000 volumes are added annually. About 1,500 periodicals are
received regularly. The general collection, including all but the
scientific and technical books and journals, is housed in the library
building, situated on the front campus. The Du Pont Science Library
houses some 26,100 books and journals in chemistry, engineering,
mathematics and physics. The library is definitely a collection of
books and journals for undergraduate use. The demands of Honors
work, however, make necessary the provision of large quantities of
source material not usually found in collections maintained for under­
graduates. It is a point of library policy to try to supply, either by
purchase or through inter-library loan, the books needed by students
or members of the faculty for their individual research.

SPECIAL CO LLE CTI ONS
In addition, the library contains certain special collections—the
British Americana collection, the Wells Wordsworth and Thomson
collections, the Auden collection, the Bathe collection of technologi­
cal history, and a collection of the issuances of 565 private presses.
A number of special features enrich the academic background of
the college. Among these are the following:
The Friends Historical Library, founded in 1871 by Anson Lapham, is one of the outstanding collections in the United States of man­
uscripts, books, pamphlets, and pictures relating to the history of the
Society of Friends. The library is a depository for records of Friends
Meetings belonging to Baltimore, Philadelphia, and other Yearly
Meetings. More than 3,200 record books have been deposited; many
of them have been reproduced on microfilm, for which four reading
machines are available. The William Wade Hinshaw Index to
Quaker Meeting Records indexes the material of genealogical interest
in the records of 307 meetings in various parts of the United States.
Notable among the other holdings are the Whittier Collection (first
13

EDUCATIONAL RESOURCES

editions and manuscripts of John Greenleaf Whittier, the Quaker
poet), the Mott Manuscripts (over 400 autograph letters of Lucretia
Mott, antislavery and women’s rights leader), and the Hicks Manu­
scripts (more than 300 letters of Elias Hicks, a famous Quaker min­
ister) . The Library’s collection of books and pamphlets by and about
Friends numbers approximately 30,000 volumes. About 96 Quaker
periodicals are currently received. There is also an extensive collec­
tion of photographs of meetinghouses and pictures of representative
Friends, as well as a number of oil paintings, including two versions
of “The Peaceable Kingdom” by Edward Hicks. It is hoped that
Friends and others will consider the advantages of giving to this Library
any books and family papers which may throw light on the history of
the Society of Friends.
The Swarthmore College Peace Collection is of special interest to
research students and others seeking the records of the Peace Move­
ment. The personal papers of Jane Addams of Hull House, Chicago,
(approximately 10,000 items) formed the original nucleus of the Col­
lection, which now contains documentation on the history of the or­
ganized peace movement from its beginnings circa 1815 to the present
time, as well as correspondence and writings of many workers for
international peace and arbitration. The Collection includes files of
some 1,200 peace periodicals published in the United States and
abroad over the past 150 years; approximately 154 such periodicals
in eleven languages are currently received from twenty-one countries.
This collection is the official depository for the archives of leading
peace organizations in the United States. A more nearly complete
description of the Collection will be found in the Guide to the Swarth­
more College Peace Collection, published by the College and avail­
able on request.
The Bronson M. Cutting Memorial Collection of Recorded Music
was established at Swarthmore College in 1936 by a gift of approxi­
mately four thousand phonograph records, a radio-phonograph, books
and musical scores, from the family of Bronson Murray Cutting, late
Senator from New Mexico. Its object is to make the best recorded
music available to the undergraduates, faculty, and friends of Swarth­
more College, in cooperation with the work of the college Department
of Music. The collection is kept up to date with current additions.
The Potter Collection of Recorded Literature, established in 1950
with accumulated income from the William Plumer Potter Public
Speaking Fund, includes a wide variety of recorded poetry, drama
and prose. Among the 700 titles on disc and tape are contemporary
14

EDUCATIONAL RESOURCES

writers reading from and discussing their works; full length versions
of Shakespearean plays and other dramatic repertoire; the literature
of earlier periods read both in modern English and in the pronuncia­
tion of the time; British and American ballads; lyrical verse in musi­
cal settings; and recordings of literary programs held at Swarthmore.
These materials are used as adjuncts to the study of literature. The
collection is housed in the McCabe Library.
The Betty Dougherty Spock Memorial Fund, established through the
generosity of friends of the late member of the Class of 1952, pro­
vides income for the purchase of dramatic recordings. These are kept
with the Potter Collection.
SPECIAL FUNDS AND LECTURESHIPS
The William J. Cooper Foundation provides a varied program of
lectures and concerts which enriches the academic work of the col­
lege. The Foundation was established by William }. Cooper, a de­
voted friend of the college, whose wife, Emma Mcllvain Cooper,
served as a member of the Board of Managers from 1882 to 1923.
Mr. Cooper bequeathed to the college the sum of $100,000 and pro­
vided that the income should be used “in bringing to the college from
time to time eminent citizens of this and other countries who are lead­
ers in statesmanship, education, the arts, sciences, learned professions
and business, in order that the faculty, students and the college com­
munity may be broadened by a closer acquaintance with matters of
world interest.” Admission to all programs is without charge.
The Cooper Foundation Committee works with the departments and
with student organizations in arranging single lectures and concerts,
and also in bringing to the college speakers of note who remain in res­
idence for a long enough period to enter into the life of the commu­
nity. Some of these speakers have been invited with the understanding
that their lectures should be published under the auspices of the
Foundation. This arrangement has so far produced sixteen volumes:
Lindsay, Alexander Dunlop. The Essentials of Democracy. Phila­
delphia, University of Pennsylvania Press, 1929.
Lowes, John Livingston. Geoffrey Chaucer and the Development
of His Genius. New York, Houghton Mifflin Co., 1934.
Weyl, Hermann. Mind and Nature. Philadelphia, University of
Pennsylvania Press, 1934.
America’s Recovery Program, by A. A. Berle, Jr., John Dickinson,
15

EDUCATIONAL RESOURCES

A. Heath Onthank. . . and others . . . London, New York, etc., Oxford
University Press, 1934.
Salter, Arthur S. baron. World Trade and Its Future. Philadelphia,
University of Pennsylvania Press, 1936.
Madariaga, Salvador de. Theory and Practice in International Re­
lations. Philadelphia, University of Pennsylvania Press, 1937.
Streit, Clarence Kirshman. Union Now; a Proposal for a Federal
Union of the Democracies of the North Atlantic. New York, Harper,
1939.
Krogh, August. The Comparative Physiology of Respiratory Mech­
anisms. Philadelphia, University of Pennsylvania Press, 1941.
Griffith, Ernest Stacey. The Modern Government in Action. New
York, Columbia University Press, 1942.
Linton, Ralph. The Cultural Background of Personality. New York,
London, D. Appleton-Century Co., 1945.
Wilcox, Clair, Editor. Civil Liberties Under Attack. A series of
lectures given in 1950-51. Philadelphia, University of Pennsylvania
Press, 1951.
Redfield, Robert. Peasant Society and Culture; an Anthropological
Approach to Civilization. Chicago, The University of Chicago Press,
1956.
Weatherford, Willis D., Jr., Editor. The Goals of Higher Educa­
tion. A series of lectures given in the spring of 1958. Cambridge:
Harvard University Press, 1960.
Lovejoy, Arthur Oncken. Reflections on Human Nature. Baltimore:
Johns Hopkins University Press, 1961.
Rhys, Hedley H., Editor. Seventeenth Century Science and the
Arts. Princeton: Princeton University Press, 1962.
Brandt, Richard B., Editor. Social Justice. Englewood Cliffs:
Prentice-Hall, 1962.
Pennock, James Roland, Editor. Self-government in Modernizing
Nations. Englewood Cliffs: Prentice-Hall, 1965.
The Arthur Hoyt Scott Horticultural Foundation. About three hun­
dred acres are contained in the College property, including a large
tract of woodland and the valley of Crum Creek. Much of this tract
has been developed as an horticultural and botanical collection of
16

EDUCATIONAL RESOURCES

trees, shrubs and herbaceous plants through the provisions of the
Arthur Hoyt Scott Horticultural Foundation, established in 1929 by
Mrs. Arthur Hoyt Scott and Owen and Margaret Moon as a memorial
to Arthur Hoyt Scott of the Class of 1895. The plant collections are
designed both to afford examples of the better kinds of trees, shrubs
and herbaceous plants which are hardy in the climate of Eastern
Pennsylvania and suitable for planting by the average gardener, and
to beautify the campus. There are exceptionally fine displays of Jap­
anese cherries, flowering crab apples, magnolias and tree peonies, and
a great variety of lilacs, rhododendrons, azaleas, daffodils, irises,
herbaceous peonies, and hemerocallis. Many donors have contrib­
uted generously to the collections. (For full information see Bulletin
of Swarthmore College, Vol. xxxvii, No. 5.)
The Boyd and Ruth Barnard Fund for the Advancement of Music
at Swarthmore was established in 1964 by two graduates of the Col­
lege, Mr. and Mrs. Boyd T. Barnard of Rosemont, Pennsylvania. The
income from the fund may be used for any activity that contributes to
the advancement of music at the college. It has been used, tor exam­
ple, for concerts on the campus, for the purchase of vocal and orches­
tral scores and other musical literature, and to provide scholarships
for students in the Department of Music who show unusual promise
as instrumentalists or vocalists. Since 1966 part of the fund has been
used to bring to the campus two Associates in Performance who di­
rect the chamber music coaching program in the Department of Mu­
sic and give weekly concerts of chamber music.
The Gene D. Overstreet Memorial Fund, given by friends in mem­
ory of Gene D. Overstreet (1924-1965), a member of the Political
Science Department, 1957-1964, provides income to bring a visiting
expert to the campus to discuss problems of developing or moderniz­
ing nations and cultures.
The Benjamin West Lecture, made possible by gifts from members
of the class of 1905 and other friends of the College, is given annually
on some phase of art. It is the outgrowth of the Benjamin West Soci­
ety which built up a collection of paintings, drawings, and prints,
which are exhibited, as space permits, in the college buildings. The
lecture owes its name to the American artist, who was born in a house
which stands on the campus and who became president of the Royal
Academy.

17

A D M IS S IO N
Inquiries concerning admission and applications should be ad­
dressed to the Dean of Admissions, Swarthmore College, Swarthmore,
Pennsylvania.
GENERAL STATEMENT
In the selection of students the college seeks those qualities of char­
acter, social responsibility, and intellectual capacity which it is pri­
marily concerned to develop. It seeks them, not in isolation, but as
essential elements in the whole personality of candidates for admis­
sion.
It is the policy of the college to have the student body represent not
only different parts of the United States but many foreign countries,
both public and private secondary schools, and various economic,
social, religious, and racial groups. The college is also concerned to
include in each class sons and daughters of alumni and of members of
the Society of Friends.
Selection is important and difficult. No simple formula will be ef­
fective. The task is to choose those who give promise of distinction
in the quality of their personal lives, in service to the community, or
in leadership in their chosen fields. Swarthmore College must choose
its students on the basis of their individual future worth to society and
of their collective realization of the purpose of the college.
Admission to the freshman class is normally based upon the satis­
factory completion of a four-year secondary school program prepara­
tory to advanced liberal study. Under exceptional circumstances,
students who have virtually completed the normal four-year program
in three years will be considered for admission, provided they meet
the competition of other candidates in general maturity as well as
readiness for a rigorous academic program.
All applicants are selected on the following evidence:
1. Record in secondary school.
21

ADMISSION

2. Recommendations from the school principal, headmaster, or
guidance counselor and from two teachers.
3. Rating in the Scholastic Aptitude Test and in three Achievement
Tests of the College Entrance Examination Board.
4. Personal interview with one of the Deans or an appointed rep­
resentative.
5. Reading and experience, both in school and out.
Applicants must have satisfactory standing in school, and in aptitude
and achievement tests, and should show strong intellectual interests.
They should also give evidence of sturdiness of character, promise of
growth, initiative, seriousness of purpose, and a sense of social re­
sponsibility. As future members of the college community, they
should represent varied interests and backgrounds.
PR EP A RA T IO N
The College does not require a set plan of secondary school courses
as preparation for its program. The election of specific subjects is
left to the student and his school advisers. In general, preparation
should include:
1. Skills: The following skills are essential to success in college
work and should be brought to a high level by study and prac­
tice throughout the preparatory period.
a. The use of the English language with accuracy and effective­
ness in reading, writing, and speaking.
b. The use of the principles of mathematics.
c. The use of one, or two, foreign languages to the point of read­
ing prose of average difficulty. The College encourages stu­
dents to study at least one language for four years, if possible.
2. Subjects: All, or almost all, of the preparatory course should be
composed of the subjects listed in the following four groups.
Variations of choice and emphasis are acceptable although some
work should be taken in each group.
History and Social Studies: African, American, Asian, English,
European, and ancient history; political, social, and economic
problems of modern society.
Literature and Art: American, English, and foreign literature;
music; art.
Natural Science and Mathematics: chemistry, physics, biology,
astronomy; algebra, geometry, trigonometry, and calculus.
22

ADMISSION

Those planning to major in engineering should present work
in chemistry, physics, and four years of mathematics includ­
ing algebra, geometry and trigonometry.
Languages: English, Latin, Greek, German, French, Spanish,
Russian, other European or Oriental languages. Applicants
should present the strongest possible command of at least one
foreign language.

A PP L IC A T I O N S AND EX AMI NA TIO NS
Applications must be initiated prior to January 15, and all appli­
cations must be completed by February 1. A personal information
form will be sent upon request, and this form should be returned
promptly, together with the non-refundable application fee of $20.00.
The College then sends the remainder of the application materials.
Applicants are encouraged to complete their applications to the Col­
lege as early in the fall of their senior year as possible. Although
Swarthmore does not have an “early decision” program, preliminary
readings of completed applications are made at an early date to deter­
mine regional and national award winners.
All applicants for freshman admission are required to take the
Scholastic Aptitude Test and three Achievement Tests given by the
College Entrance Examination Board. English Composition is re­
quired and the other two Achievement Tests should be selected from
two different fields. Applicants for Engineering must take one
Achievement Test in Mathematics.
Applicants should take the Scholastic Aptitude Test in November,
December, or January of the senior year. Candidates who take
Achievement Tests before the senior year may submit the results to
the Admissions Office, but it is strongly recommended that the
English Composition and at least one other Achievement Test be
taken in December or January of the senior year. Neither the
Scholastic Aptitude Test nor the Achievement Tests may be taken
later than January of the senior year.
Application to
College Entrance
Jersey 08540. A
out charge from

take these tests should be made directly to the
Examination Board, Box 592, Princeton, New
bulletin of information may be obtained with­
the Board. Students who wish to be examined
23

ADMISSION

in any of the following western states, provinces, and Pacific areas—
Alaska, Arizona, California, Colorado, Hawaii, Idaho, Montana,
Nevada, New Mexico, Oregon, Utah, Washington, Wyoming, Alberta,
British Columbia, Manitoba, Saskatchewan, Mexico, Australia, and
all Pacific Islands including Formosa and Japan—should address their
inquiries and send their applications to the College Entrance Exam­
ination Board, Box 1025, Berkeley, California 94701. Application
should be made to the Board at least a month before the date on
which the test will be taken.
No additional tests are required of candidates for scholarships. All
applicants who would like to be considered for any of our scholar­
ships should complete their applications at the earliest possible date.
Information concerning financial aid will be found on pages 28-39.
TH E IN T E R V I E W
An admissions interview with a representative of the College is a
requirement in making application to Swarthmore. Applicants are ex­
pected to take the initiative in arranging for this interview. Those who
can reach Swarthmore with no more than a half day’s trip are urged
to make an appointment to visit the College for this purpose.* Other
applicants should request the Office of Admissions to arrange a meet­
ing with an alumni representative in their own area. Interviews
must be completed before March 1 of the senior year. Scholarship
applicants should have their interviews by January 1. Candidates are
not interviewed until the latter part of the junior year. Candidates
will not be able to have campus interviews from March 1 to May 1
but a tour of the campus may be arranged during this period. Appoint­
ments at the College can be made by calling or writing the Office of
Admissions, 215-KI 4-7900, Ext. 445.
A D M I S S IO N DE CIS ION S
Notices of the action of the Admissions Committee will be mailed
about April 15.

♦To reach the College from the New Jersey Turnpike, motorists should leave by Exit 4
(Camden-Philadelphia Interchange). Turn right on Route 73. In about one hundred feet turn
right for Interstate 295 South, and follow signs for Walt Whitman Bridge. After crossing Bridge
follow signs for Philadelphia International Airport, Route 291. Follow Route 291 past Airport
to 420. Turn right on 420 to Baltimore Pike, turn left and proceed to intersection with Route 320.
Turn left and follow signs to the College. From the Pennsylvania Turnpike, take Exit 24
(Valley Forge) on to Interstate 76 (Schuylkill Expressway), take Exit 36 on to Route 320 and
follow it south to the campus.
Swarthmore is on the Penn Central Railroad (Media Suburban Line). It is 21 minutes from
the 30th Street Station, Philadelphia.

24

ADMISSION

ADVANCED PLACEMENT
Freshmen may apply for advanced standing or placement in partic­
ular courses if they have taken college level courses and the Advanced
Placement Tests of the College Entrance Examination Board. Deci­
sions are made by the departments concerned. Every effort is made
to place students in the most advanced courses for which they are
qualified.
APP L IC AT IO N S FOR TRANSFER
The college accepts a very limited number of transfer students for
enrollment each fall. There are no mid-year admissions. For favor­
able consideration, applicants for transfer must have had a good scho­
lastic record in the institution attended and must present full creden­
tials for both college and preparatory work, including a statement of
honorable dismissal. They must take the Scholastic Aptitude Test
given by the College Entrance Examination Board if this test has not
been taken previously.
As a general practice, transfer students are not admitted to ad­
vanced standing later than the beginning of the sophomore year. Four
semesters of study at Swarthmore College constitute the minimum re­
quirement for a degree, two of which must be those of the senior
year. Applications for transfer must be filed by March 15 of the year
in which entrance is desired. Decisions on these applications are an­
nounced early in June. Only under exceptional circumstances are
students admitted for transfer eligible for financial assistance during
their first year at Swarthmore.

25

EXPENSES
T U I T I O N AND FEES
Charges for the academic year 1971-72 (two semesters):
Tuition .......................................................................... $2,450
General F e e ....................................................................
210
Board and Room............................................................ 1,185
Total Resident Charges................................. $3,845*
While a general charge for board and room is made, this may be
divided into $650 for board and $535 for room. $48 of the general
fee of $210 has been designated Student Activity Fee. The balance
covers library and laboratory fees, athletic fees, student health serv­
ices and other items.
Payment of one-half of the total sum is due not later than the first
day of classes each semester. Payments received during the first fifteen
days after the beginning of classes will be subject to a one per cent
late payment fee and any payments received after the fifteen-day
period will be subject to a five per cent late payment fee. Bills are
mailed before the opening of each term. Payments should be made
by check or draft to the order of Swarthmore College. A student
is not a registered student at Swarthmore College, nor on any class
roll, until his bill is paid. Correspondence about financial matters
should be addressed to Miss Caroline Shero, Associate Controller.
Students who wish to charge Book Store purchases, laboratory
breakage fees, etc., may do so by maintaining a student deposit ac­
count at the Business Office against which charge checks may be
drawn. Cash withdrawals may also be made. Students will be noti­
fied when overdrafts occur and no cash withdrawals may be made
unless a cash balance is maintained. A minimum deposit of $100.00
♦An advance deposit of $100 is required of all new students in order to reserve a place in
college for the coming year. A similar deposit of $50 is required of returning students. These
deposits are credited against the bill for tuition, board, and room.

26

EXPENSES

in September is suggested and all students are urged to maintain such
an account for their convenience.
No reduction or refunding of tuition can be made on account of
absence, illness, voluntary withdrawal, or dismissal from college. No
reduction or refund will be made for failure to occupy the room as­
signed for a given term, nor is the general fee refundable. In case of
absence or withdrawal from the college and provided due notice has
been given in advance to the Business Office, there will be a refund of
two-thirds of the board charge for any time in excess of two weeks.
Exceptions will be made for students who are required by the draft
to leave during the course of the academic year. In these cases tui­
tion, general fee, board and room charges will be refunded on a pro
rata basis.
Students engaged in independent projects away from the College
for which regular academic credit is anticipated are expected to
register in advance in the usual way and pay normal tuition. If the
student is away from the College for a full semester no charge for
board, room or general fee will be made but if a student is away only
for a part of a semester, board may be charged on a pro rata basis by
prior arrangement.
TUITION

PAYMENT PLAN

Many of the parents of students may wish to pay tuition, fees, and
residence charges on a monthly basis. Details of a monthly payment
plan offered by the Girard Bank of Philadelphia, Pennsylvania will
be furnished by the College prior to issuance of the first semester s
bill in September.
ACCIDENT AND SICKNESS INSURANCE
The college makes available both accident and accident and sick­
ness insurance to students through John C. Paige and Co. of Boston,
Massachusetts. Accident coverage alone costs $12.00 per year (12
months) for women, and $18.00 for men. The combined accident
and sickness policy is available at an annual cost of $32.50 for women
and $36.00 for men. At least accident coverage is required of all stu­
dents who participate in intercollegiate athletic activities and the com­
bined accident and sickness policy is particularly recommended. Ap­
plication forms are mailed to all students during the summer.

27

F I N A N C I A L A ID
The College strives to make it possible for each admitted student to
attend Swarthmore, regardless of his financial circumstances. More
than thirty-five per cent of the total student body currently receive
financial aid from the College in the form of scholarships and loans
varying in amount from $100 to $4000. Aid from sources outside the
College brings to 45 per cent the number of students receiving finan­
cial assistance.
A prospective scholarship student must apply for financial aid at
the time of his application for admission, but financial need does not
adversely influence admissions decisions. Instructions for obtaining
and filing a Parents’ Confidential Statement with the College Scholar­
ship Service are included on the admissions application. The prin­
ciples of this agency and careful review of its recommendations by the
Committee on Financial Aid determine the amount of aid in each case.
Essentially, this amount is the difference between the College budget
and a family’s anticipated contribution. That contribution is deter­
mined by weighing the family’s income and assets against demands
made upon it by such items as taxes, medical expenses, and other
children. It also includes the expectation of $300 to $400 from the
student’s summer earnings as well as a portion of his or her personal
savings and assets.
For 1971-72, the college bill, which includes tuition, room and
board, and a comprehensive college fee, will be $3845. The compre­
hensive fee covers not only the usual student services—health,
library, laboratory fees, for example—but admission to all social,
cultural, and athletic events on campus.
If a student receives a scholarship from a source other than the
College, the College subtracts the amount of that scholarship from his
Swarthmore award. This equitable distribution of total available
resources enables the College to assist additional students. Thus, the
amount of financial aid a student may expect to receive from the
College is determined by other grants he may receive as well as by the
anticipated family contribution.
In keeping with the policy of basing financial aid upon need, the
College reviews each student’s financial need each year. Early in
January the Director of Financial Aid mails to each student a new
Parents’ Confidential Statement which is analyzed by the College
28

F I N A N C I A L AID

Scholarship Service and reviewed by the Committee on Financial Aid
along with his personal and academic record. The expected contribu­
tion from a student’s summer earnings increases by approximately
$100 each year as does the proportion of his expected contribution
from savings. A student’s aid is not withdrawn unless he no longer
demonstrates need. The proportion of grant to loan may vary, how­
ever, contingent upon his academic record.
Students who have not previously received financial aid may apply
if special circumstances have arisen. First year transfer students are
not eligible for scholarships. Students who marry may continue to
apply for aid, but a contribution from the parents is expected in an
amount equivalent to the contribution were the student single.
For the academic year 1971-72 the College has granted approxi­
mately $800,000 in scholarships. About two-thirds of that sum was
provided through the generosity of alumni and friends by special
gifts and the endowed scholarships listed below. The Federal govern-,
ment also makes Educational Opportunity Grants available. It is not
necessary to apply for a specific scholarship; the Committee on Finan­
cial Aid decides who are to receive endowed scholarships and others
are helped from general scholarship funds. Financial need is a require­
ment for all scholarships listed below unless otherwise indicated.

Swarthmore College National Scholarships
Swarthmore College awards each year a number of four-year Na­
tional Scholarships to the men and women entering the freshman
class. All candidates for admission to the College may be considered
for these scholarships. Based on the general plan of the Rhodes Schol­
arships, the awards are made to those candidates who, in the opin­
ion of the Committee of Award, rank highest in scholarship, character
and personality. Whenever feasible, finalists for National Scholar­
ships will be interviewed by the Committee of Award.
The amount of the annual award varies from $100 to $4,000 ac­
cording to the financial need of the winner. In those cases where
there is no financial need, National Scholarships will be awarded on
an honorary basis and carry an annual stipend of $100.

Other Scholarships for Men and Women
The Frank and Marie Aydelotte Scholarship is awarded biennially
29

F I N A N C I A L AID

to a new student who shows promise of distinguished intellectual at­
tainment based upon sound character and effective personality. The
award is made in honor of Frank Aydelotte, President of the College
from 1921-1940, and originator of the Honors program at Swarthmore, and of Marie Osgood Aydelotte, his wife.
The Curtis Bok Scholarship was established in the College’s Cen­
tennial Year 1964 in honor of the late Philadelphia attorney, author
and jurist, who was a Quaker and honorary alumnus of Swarthmore.
The scholarship is assigned annually to a junior or senior whose qual­
ities of mind and character indicate a potential for humanitarian serv­
ice such as Curtis Bok himself rendered and would have wished to
develop in young people. Students in any field of study, and from any
part of this country or from abroad, are eligible. The scholarship is
renewable until graduation.
The Edward S. Bower Memorial Scholarship, established by Mr.
and Mrs. Ward T. Bower in memory of their son, Class of ’42, is
awarded annually to a man or woman student who ranks high in
scholarship, character, and personality.
The Robert C. Brooks Scholarship was established as a memorial
to Professor Brooks by a number of his former students. It is avail­
able to a major in Political Science in the junior or senior year.
The Edna Pownall Buffington Fund was established during the Col­
lege’s Centennial Year of 1964. The income from this Fund is used to
provide scholarships for a student or students attending Swarthmore
College who are concentrating their studies in the field of the social
sciences and who indicate an interest in the objects or purposes of
the American Friends Service Committee and a desire following their
graduation and post-graduate work to serve in those fields. Awards
are made to students in any of the four classes.
The Chi Omega Scholarship provides an award annually to a mem­
ber of the freshman class. Preference is given to daughters or sons of
members of the fraternity.
The Sarah Antrim Cole Scholarship was founded by her parents in
memory of Sarah Antrim Cole of the Class of 1934. It is awarded to
a graduate of the Worthington High School, Worthington, Ohio.
The N. Harvey Collisson Scholarship established by his family and
the Olin Mathieson Charitable Trust in memory of N. Harvey Collis­
son of the Class of 1922 is awarded to a freshman man or woman. In
making selections the committee will place emphasis on character,
personality and ability.
30

F I N A N C I A L AID

The Delta Gamma Scholarship is to be awarded to a blind student
at Swarthmore College. In any year in which there is no such candi­
date the fund may be awarded to a freshman woman.
The Francis W. D’Olier Scholarship, in memory of Francis W.
D’Olier of the Class of 1907, is awarded to a freshman man or
woman. In making selections, the committee will place emphasis on
character, personality and ability.
The Robert K. Enders Scholarship is to be awarded annually to a
senior student who has shown excellence in pursuit of a major in a
biological topic, if possible reflecting Dr. Enders’ concern for the
value of field work.
The Howard S. and Gertrude P. Evans Scholarship Fund provides
scholarships for worthy students, preference being given to students
showing highest standards in scholarship from high schools of Dela­
ware County, Pennsylvania.
The Flack Achievement Award, presented by the Flack Foundation,
one of whose founders is Hertha Eisenmenger Flack of the Class of
1938, is to be made to a deserving student who, during the first two
years at Swarthmore College, has demonstrated a good record of
achievements in both academic and extracurricular activities while
showing leadership potential as a constructive member of the College.
The donor hopes these awards will go to students of demonstrated
achievement and high potential and who are dedicated to the basic
principles of American democracy and of academic freedom. The
awards are not related to need.
The Stella and Charles Guttman Foundation Scholarships were
established in 1964 by a grant from the Foundation to provide schol­
arships to defray all or part of the cost of tuition and fees for students
who require financial assistance. Preference is given to students of
recognized ability who have completed two academic years of college
and who are contemplating graduate or professional study. The
scholarships are renewable for a second year.
The Rachel W. Hillborn Scholarship was founded by Anne Hillborn Philips of the Class of 1892 in memory of her mother, with the
stipulation that the income shall go to a student in the junior or senior
class who is studying for service in the international field. Preference
will be given to a Friend or to one who intends to contribute to
world understanding through diplomatic service, participation in
some international government agency, the American Friends Service
Committee, or similar activities.
31

FIN AN CIA L AID

The Kappa Kappa Gamma Scholarship provides an award to a
member of the freshman class, renewable each year. Preference is
given to a relative of members of the fraternity. In the absence of a
relative it may be awarded at the discretion of the College.
The Lafore Scholarship is awarded in memory of John A. Lafore
of the Class of 1895. The college in granting this scholarship will
give preference to qualified candidates who are descendants of Amand
and Margaret White Lafore.
The Ida and Daniel Lang Scholarship established by their son,
Eugene M. Lang of the Class of 1938, provides financial assistance
for a man or woman who ranks high in scholarship, character and
personality.
The E. Hibberd Lawrence Scholarship provides for a scholarship
to an incoming freshman man or woman who ranks high in scholar­
ship, character, and personality.
The Christian R. and Mary F. Lindback Foundation Scholarship is
awarded to deserving students from the States of Pennsylvania, New
Jersey, Delaware or Maryland.
The Midwest Scholarships are awarded each year to one man and
one woman applicant who resides in Illinois, Indiana, Iowa, Michi­
gan, Minnesota, Missouri or Wisconsin. Winners will be selected on
the basis of their potential contribution to the academic and extra­
curricular life of the College.
The James E. Miller Scholarship. Under the will of Arabella M.
Miller funds are available annually for students from Delaware
County (with preference for residents of Nether Providence Town­
ship) .
The Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Company Scholarship is
awarded annually to a student selected by the Scholarship Committee.
The Howard Osborn Scholarships, established by Howard Osborn
in memory of his mother and father, Viola L. Osborn and Frank
Osborn, are awarded to worthy students of good character who main­
tain satisfactory grades and who require financial assistance.
The Cornelia Chapman and Nicholas O. Pittenger Scholarship
established by her family and friends is awarded to an incoming
freshman man or woman who ranks high in scholarship, character and
personality and who has need for financial assistance.
The Robert Pyle Scholarship was established by his sisters, Mar­
gery Pyle and Ellen Pyle Groff, in memory of Robert Pyle of the Class
of 1897 and for many years a member of the Board of Managers. Ap32

F I N A N C I A L AID

plicants who show promise of intellectual attainment based upon
sound character and effective personality and who reside in Chester
County are given preference.
The RCA Scholarship is awarded to a young man or woman who is
making a creditable academic record in the field of science or en­
gineering at the undergraduate level. The appointment is usually made
for the junior or senior year.
The Reader’s Digest Foundation Endowed Scholarship Fund pro­
vides scholarships annually for students selected by the Scholarship
Committee.
The Adele Mills Riley Memorial Scholarship, founded by her hus­
band, John R. Riley, was awarded for the first time for the academic
year 1964-65. Under the provisions of this scholarship, an annual
award subject to renewal is made to a deserving student, man or
woman. Selection stresses the candidate’s capacity for significant
development of his or her interests and talents during the college
years. Qualities of intellectual promise as well as potential for service
are sought in making this appointment.
The Louis N. Robinson Scholarship was established during the Col­
lege’s Centennial year by the family and friends of Louis N. Robinson.
Mr. Robinson was for many years a member of the Swarthmore Col­
lege faculty and founder of the Economics Discussion Group. A
member of the junior or senior class who has demonstrated interest
and ability in the study of Economics is chosen for this award.
The Katharine Scherman Scholarship, is awarded to a student with
a primary interest in the arts and the humanities, having special tal­
ents in these fields. Students with other special interests, however,
will not be excluded from consideration. Awarded in honor of Kath­
arine Scherman, of the Class of 1938, it is renewable for the full
period of undergraduate study.
The Scott Award at Swarthmore. A scholarship established by the
Scott Paper Co. of Chester, Pa., in honor of its former president,
Arthur Hoyt Scott of the Class of 1895. Given for the first time in
1953, it is awarded annually to an outstanding sophomore who plans
to enter business after graduation and who demonstrates the qualities
of scholarship, character, personality, leadership, and physical vigor.
The award provides the recipient with $1,500 for each of his last two
years in college, regardless of financial need.
The Clinton G. Shafer Scholarship endowed by his family in mem­
ory of Clinton G. Shafer, of the Class of 1951, is open to students
33

F I N A N C I A L AID

interested in engineering and physical science. The committee in
making its selections will have regard for character, personality and
leadership.
The Thomas H. and Mary Williams Shoemaker Fund provides
scholarships annually for children of Friends.
The Marshall P. Sullivan Scholarship Fund was established by
Creth and Sullivan, Inc. in memory of Marshall P. Sullivan of the
Class of 1897. Preference will be given to graduates of George
School, but if no suitable candidate applies from this school, gradu­
ates of other Friends schools or other persons will be eligible.
The Jonathan K. Taylor Scholarship, in accordance with the
donor’s will, is awarded by the Board of Trustees of the Baltimore
Monthly Meeting of Friends. The scholarship is first open to de­
scendants of the late Jonathan K. Taylor. Then, while preference is
to be given to members of the Baltimore Yearly Meetings of Friends,
it is not to be confined to them when suitable persons in membership
cannot be found.
The Phebe Anna Thorne Fund provides an income for scholarships
for students whose previous work has demonstrated their earnestness
and ability. This gift includes a clause of preference to those students
who are members of the New York Monthly Meeting of Friends.
The Audrey Friedman Troy Scholarship, established by her hus­
band, Melvin B. Troy ’48, is awarded to a freshman man or woman.
The scholarship is renewable for four years at the discretion of the
College. In awarding the scholarship, prime consideration is given to
the ability of the prospective scholar to profit from a Swarthmore
education, and to be a contributor to the College and ultimately to
society.
The Daniel Underhill Scholarship was given by Daniel Underhill
’94, in memory of his grandfather, Daniel Underhill, member of the
first Board of Managers.
The William Hilles Ward Scholarship in memory of William
Hilles Ward of the Class of 1915, is to be awarded annually, prefer­
ably to a student who plans to major in science. The committee in
making its selection, will have regard for candidates who are most
deserving of financial assistance.
The Westbury Quarterly Meeting, N.Y., Scholarship, is awarded
annually by a committee of that Quarterly Meeting.
The Samuel Willets Fund. This fund provides an annual income
for scholarships. A portion of the fund is assigned for scholarships in
34

F I N A N C I A L AID

the name of Mr. Willets’ children, Frederick Willets, Edward Willets,
Walter Willets, and Caroline W. Frame.
The I. V. Williamson Scholarship. Preference is given to gradu­
ates of Friends Central, George School, New York Friends Seminary,
Baltimore Friends School, Wilmington Friends School, Moorestown
Friends School, Friends Academy at Locust Valley, Sidwell Friends
School and Brooklyn Friends School.
The Edward Clarkson Wilson Scholarship has been established at
Swarthmore by friends of Edward Clarkson Wilson, ’91, formerly
Principal of the Baltimore Friends School. It will be awarded each
year to a former student of the Baltimore Friends School, who has
been approved by the faculty of the school, on the basis of high char­
acter and high standing in scholarship.
The Edward Clarkson Wilson and Elizabeth T. Wilson Scholarship
provides financial aid for a deserving student.
An anonymous donor provides a renewable scholarship annually
for a member of an underprivileged minority group.
The income from each of the following funds is awarded at the dis­
cretion of the college.
The Barclay G. Atkinson Scholarship Fund.
The Rebecca M. Atkinson Scholarship Fund.
The Class of 1913 Scholarship Fund.
The Class of 1914 Scholarship Fund.
The Class of 1915 Scholarship Fund.
The Class of 1917 Scholarship Fund.
The William Dorsey Scholarship Fund.
The George Ellsler Scholarship Fund.
The Caroline W. Frame Scholarship Fund.
The Joseph E. Gillingham Fund.
The Thomas L. Leedom Scholarship Fund.
The Li Foundation Scholarship Fund.
The Sarah E. Lippincott Scholarship Fund.
The Mark E. Reeves Scholarship Fund.
The Frank Solomon Memorial Scholarship Fund.
The Mary Sproul Scholarship Fund.
The Helen Squier Scholarship Fund.
The Francis Holmes Strozier Memorial Scholarship Fund.
The Joseph T. Sullivan Scholarship Fund.
The Deborah F. Wharton Scholarship Fund.
The Thomas Woodnutt Scholarship Fund.
35

FIN AN CIA L AID

Scholarships for Men
The Book and Key Scholarship, established by the Book and Key
men’s senior honorary society in 1965 when the Society dissolved
itself, is awarded each year to a senior man who has shown quality
of leadership and has demonstrated through past performance his
eagerness to give service to college and community. He should rank
high in scholarship, character and personality.
The Sarah Kaighn Cooper Scholarship, founded by Sallie K. John­
son in memory of her grandparents, Sarah Kaighn and Sarah Cooper,
is awarded to a man in the Junior Class who is judged by the faculty
to have had, since entering College, the best record for scholarship,
character, and influence.
The Howard S. Evans 1903 Scholarship provides scholarships for
worthy male students. The awards are made to those who stand high
in scholarship, character, and personality. Preference is given first to
applicants preparing for the ministry of the Episcopal Church, sec­
ond, to that of other protestant denominations; and third, to those in­
terested in Engineering or Economics.
The Donald Renwick Ferguson Scholarship, established by Mrs.
Amy Baker Ferguson, in memory of her husband, Donald Renwick
Ferguson, M.D., of the Class of 1912, is awarded to a young man who
is looking forward to the study of medicine.
The Aaron B. Ivins Scholarship is awarded annually to a young
man of the graduating class of Friends Central School, Overbrook,
Philadelphia. This scholarship is awarded by the faculty of Friends
Central School, and is subject to the approval of Swarthmore College.
The Howard Cooper Johnson Scholarship, established by Howard
Cooper Johnson ’96, is awarded on the basis of all-around achieve­
ment to a male undergraduate who is a member of the Society of
Friends.
The Walter W. Krider Scholarship was established by his wife and
daughter for a young man who ranks high in scholarship, character
and personality.
The Scott B. Lilly Scholarship, endowed by Jacob T. Schless of the
Class of 1914 at Swarthmore College, was offered for the first time in
1950. This scholarship is in honor of a former distinguished Profes­
sor of Engineering and, therefore, students who plan to major in en­
gineering will be given preference. An award is made annually.
The Thomas B. McCabe Achievement Awards, established by
36

F I N A N C I A L AID

Thomas B. McCabe ’15, are awarded to freshman men from the Delmarva Peninsula and Northern New England (Maine, New Hamp­
shire, or Vermont) who give promise of leadership. In making selec­
tions, the Committee will place emphasis on ability, character, per­
sonality, and service to school and community. Two awards, provid­
ing a minimum annual grant of $2,300 (tuition) or up to $4,120 de­
pending on need, will be made to residents of Delaware or the East­
ern Shore counties of Maryland or Virginia. Non-residents attending
school in this area are also eligible. One award, providing an annual
grant of up to $4,120 depending on need, will be made to a resident
of Maine, New Hampshire, or Vermont.
The Peter Mertz Scholarship is awarded to an entering freshman
outstanding in mental and physical vigor, who shows promise of
spending these talents for the good of the college community and of
the larger community outside. The award was established in 1955 by
Harold, LuEsther and Joyce Mertz in memory of Peter Mertz, who
was a member of the class of 1957. It is renewable for all four un­
dergraduate years.
The T. H. Dudley Perkins Memorial Scholarship is awarded an­
nually to an entering freshman on the basis of qualities of manhood,
force of character and leadership; literary and scholastic ability;
physical vigor as shown by participation in out-of-doors sports or in
other ways.
The Anthony Beekman Pool Scholarship. This scholarship is
awarded to an incoming freshman man of promise and intellectual
curiosity. It is given in memory of Tony Pool of the Class of 1959.
The William G. and Mary N. Serrill Honors Scholarship is a com­
petitive scholarship for men, awarded to a candidate for admission
to the college, based upon the general plan of the Rhodes Scholar­
ships. Preference will be given to men who are residents of Abington Township, including Jenkintown and Glenside, Montgomery
County, Pa.
The Philip T. Sharpies Scholarship, a four-year scholarship open
to entering freshmen, is designed to honor and encourage young men
in engineering or physical science. The committee, in making its se­
lections, will have regard for candidates who rank highest in scholar­
ship, character, personality, leadership, and physical vigor. At least
one scholarship will be given each year.
The Newton E. Tarble Award, established by Newton E. Tarble
of the Class of 1913, is granted to a freshman man who gives promise
of leadership, ranks high in scholarship, character and personality,
37

F I N A N C I A L AID

and resides west of the Mississippi River or south of Springfield in
the State of Illinois.

Scholarships for Women
The Mary Lippincott Griscom Scholarship is to be given to a girl
with financial need, who ranks high in character, personality and
scholarship. Preference would be given to a member of the Society
of Friends.
The George K. and Sallie K. Johnson Fund provides aid during the
senior year for young women who are fitted to become desirable
teachers.
The income of the Kappa Alpha Theta Scholarship Fund, given by
members and friends of the Kappa Alpha Theta Fraternity at Swarthmore, is awarded annually to a woman student.
The Jessie Stevenson Kovalenko Scholarship Fund is the gift of
Michel Kovalenko in memory of his wife. This scholarship is to be
awarded to a student, preferably a woman, who is in her junior or
senior year and who is a major in astronomy, or to a graduate of the
College, preferably a woman, for graduate work in astronomy at
Swarthmore or elsewhere.
The Mary T. Longstreth Scholarship was founded by Rebecca C.
Longstreth in memory of her mother and is to be awarded annually
to assist a young woman student to pursue her studies in the College.
The Clara B. Marshall Scholarship, established by the will of Dr.
Clara B. Marshall, is awarded to a woman at Swarthmore College
with preference given to descendants of her grandfathers, Abram
Marshall or Mahlon Phillips.
The Harriet W. Paiste Fund provides a scholarship for a young
woman who is a member of the Society of Friends (Philadelphia
Yearly Meeting).
The Mary Coates Preston Scholarship Fund. A sum of money has
been left by will of Elizabeth Coates, the annual interest of which
provides a scholarship to a young woman student in Swarthmore Col­
lege. Preference is given to a relative of the donor.
The Lily Tily Richards Scholarship, established by Peirce L. Rich­
ards, Jr., in memory of his wife, Lily Tily Richards ’29, is awarded
to a woman distinguished for high scholarship, character, personality
and physical vigor.
The Annie Shoemaker Scholarship is granted annually to a young
woman of the graduating class of Friends Central School, Overbrook,
38

F I N A N C I A L AID

Philadelphia. This scholarship is awarded by the faculty of Friends
Central School, and is subject to the approval of Swarthmore College.
The Sarah W. Shreiner Scholarship given in loving memory by her
daughter, Leah S. Leeds of the Class of 1927, is awarded annually to
a woman who ranks high in scholarship, character and personality.
The Titus Scholarships established by the will of Georgiana Titus
of the Class of 1898 are awarded to young women in order that they
may pursue their studies in the College.
The Mary Wood Fund provides a scholarship which may be
awarded to a young woman who is preparing to become a teacher.
LOAN FUNDS
Long term loan funds with generous repayment terms combine with
Swarthmore’s scholarship program to enable the College to meet the
needs of each student, and to give the student a chance to invest in
his own future. National Defense Student Loan Funds, established by
the 1958 National Defense Education Act, are awarded by the College
under the guidelines of the United States Office of Education and its
own need determination policies. The College also maintains special
loan funds which are listed below. Interest on both National Defense
Student Loans and Swarthmore College loans is 3% on the unpaid
balance, beginning with the repayment period. Repayment starts nine
months after the student terminates his higher education, and may be
spread over ten years. A ceiling of $1000 per year on college adminis­
tered loans is observed, with loans averaging considerably lower.
The Class of 1916 Loan Fund
The Class of 1920 Loan Fund
The Class of 1936 Loan Fund
The Class of 1937 Loan Fund
The John A. Miller Loan Fund
The Paul M. Pearson Loan Fund
The Ellis D. Williams Fund
The Swarthmore College Student Loan Fund
The Joseph W. Conard Memorial Fund, established by friends of
the late Professor Conard, provides short-term loans without interest
to meet student emergencies. Income earned by The Alphonse N.
Bertrand Fund is also available for this purpose.
STUDENT EMPLOYMENT
Student employment on the Swarthmore campus is handled by the
39

FIN A N CI A L AID

Student Employment Office, which is under student direction. Jobs
are available in such areas as the dining hall, library, departmental
offices and the post office, and applications are made when students
arrive in the Fall. Rates of pay run from $1.60 to $2.00 per hour, and
it is possible for a student to earn between $300 and $600 a year. The
Student Employment Office takes financial need into account in
assigning jobs, but there are usually jobs for all who wish employ­
ment. The Student Employment Office also publicizes local off-campus
employment opportunities. Students are generally able to carry a
moderate working schedule without detriment to their academic
performance.

40

L IF E
STU D EN T

C O M M U N IT Y

C O L L E G E L IF E
H OU SI NG
Swarthmore is primarily a residential college, conducted on the
assumption that an important element in education comes from close
association of students and instructors. Most students live in dormi­
tories. Many members of the faculty live on or near the campus.
Residence Halls
There are seven dormitories for men: Wharton Hall, named in
honor of its donor, Joseph Wharton, at one time President of the
Board of Managers, Palmer and Pittenger Halls on South Chester
Road, one building on the former Mary Lyon School property, Ashton
House, and two dormitories, Hallowell and Dana, which were opened
in September of 1967.
The women’s dormitories include the upper floors in the wings of
Parrish Hall, Worth Hall, the gift of William P. Worth, ’76, and J.
Sharpies Worth, ex-’73, as a memorial to their parents, Woolman
House, and Willets Hall, largely made possible by a bequest from
Phebe Seaman, ’19, and named in honor of her mother and aunts.
Certain dormitories and dormitory sections are reserved for a pro­
gram of coeducational housing. These include Roberts Hall, one
building in Mary Lyon, two sections of Wharton, two sections of
Worth, and one floor of Willets.
The men’s and women’s dormitories may be visited by members
of the opposite sex according to procedures established by the dormi­
tory sections in consultation with the Deans.
All freshmen are assigned to rooms by the Deans. Other students
choose their rooms in an order determined by lot. Special permission
must be obtained from the Deans to room outside the dormitories.
Students may occupy college rooms during vacations only by spe­
cial arrangements with the Deans and payment of the required fee.
Freshmen, sophomores and juniors are asked to leave college imme­
diately after their last examination in the spring so that their rooms
may be used by Commencement visitors.
43

COLLEGE LIFE

The insurance program for the College is designed to provide pro­
tection for College property and does not include the property of stu­
dents or others. It is therefore suggested that students and their par­
ents should review their insurance program in order to be sure that
coverage is extended to include personal effects while at college.
Sharpies Dining Hall
All students living on campus have their meals in the Philip T.
Sharpies Dining Hall. The dining hall is ordinarily closed during
vacations.
Tarble Social Center
Through the generosity of Newton E. Tarble of the Class of 1913,
the building which formerly housed the College Library has been
completely renovated and serves as the College’s Social Center. It in­
cludes recreational facilities, lounges, meeting rooms, and a snack bar.
Black Cultural Center
A Black Cultural Center, located in the Caroline Hadley Robinson
House, provides a library and various cultural activities of special
interest to black students. The program is planned by a committee of
black students, faculty, and administration.
R E L IG IO US LIFE
The religious life of the college is founded on the Quaker princi­
ple that the seat of spiritual authority lies in the Inner Light of each
individual. The Society of Friends is committed to the belief that
religion is best expressed in the quality of everyday living. There
are accordingly no compulsory religious exercises. Students are en­
couraged to attend the churches of their choice. Episcopal, Presby­
terian, Methodist, and Christian Science churches are located in the
borough of Swarthmore; other churches and synagogues in the
nearby towns of Morton, Media, Chester, and Springfield. The
Swarthmore Friends Meeting House is located on the campus. Stu­
dents are cordially invited to attend its meeting for worship on Sun­
day. Extracurricular groups with faculty cooperation exist for the
study of the Bible and the exploration of common concerns in reli­
gion.
CO LLECTION
For many years an assembly of the College, called Collection, has
been held at a regular hour several times a term for addresses or spe44

COLLEGE LIFE

cial events. Attendance is voluntary. In 1971-72 a series of talks by
College faculty members on topics in their fields of professional inter­
est and from their own work, for a general audience, is planned as the
principal focus of Collection and as a way of making more widely
accessible the intellectual concerns of the faculty. The President will
address the first Collection each semester, and there will be an
opportunity in each semester for programs sponsored by the ’Student
Council.
STUDENT WELFARE
Health
The college physicians hold daily office hours at the college, where
students may consult them without charge. A student should report
any illness to the college physicians, but is free to go for treatment to
another doctor if he prefers to do so.
At the time of admission each student must present a brief medical
history and health certificate, prepared by the family physician on a
form supplied by the college. Pertinent information about such mat­
ters as physical reserve, unusual medical episodes, severe allergies,
or psychiatric disturbances will be especially valuable to the college
Health Service. All new students must have been successfully vac­
cinated against smallpox within five years, in accordance with Penn­
sylvania State law.
The college physician gives physical examinations to all students
at the beginning of each year. There is close cooperation with the De­
partments of Physical Education. Recommendations for limited ac­
tivity are made for those students with physical handicaps. In some
cases a student may be excused entirely from the requirements of the
Physical Education Department.
The Worth Health Center, a gift of the Worth family in memory of
William Penn Worth ’76 and Caroline Hallowell Worth ’79, was
opened in September of 1965. It houses offices for the college physi­
cians and nurses, out-patient treatment facilities and rooms for men
and women who must remain as in-patients. Registered nurses are on
duty under the direction of the college physicians.
Each student is allowed ten days care in the Health Center per term
without charge unless the services of a special nurse are required.
After ten days, a charge of $5.00 per day is made. Students suffering
from a communicable disease or from illness which makes it neces­
sary for them to remain in bed must stay in the Health Center for the
period of their illness. Ordinary medicines are furnished without cost,
45

COL LE GE LIFE

but a charge is made for special medicines, certain immunization pro­
cedures, and transportation.
The medical facilities of the college are available to students in­
jured in athletic activities or otherwise, but the college cannot assume
additional financial responsibility for medical and surgical expenses
arising from accidents. Accident insurance coverage is, therefore,
required for all students participating in athletics and is recom­
mended for all others. (For details see page 27.)
The college psychiatric consultants hold office hours by appoint­
ment each week. The purpose of this service is to be of help with
personal and emotional problems. The psychiatrists will provide as
complete an evaluation of any student as possible. Brief psychotherapy
within the limits of available time will be given to students without
charge. In instances where longer treatment is needed, an outside
psychiatrist will be recommended to the student.
Student Advising
The Deans and their assistants hold the primary responsibility for
advising all students. However, there are many other advisers avail­
able.
Each freshman is assigned to a faculty member who acts as his
course adviser until this responsibility falls to the chairman of the
student’s major department at the end of his sophomore year. Fac­
ulty members have also been appointed as advisers for each of the
men’s varsity athletic teams. They work closely with the team, at­
tending practices and many of the scheduled contests.
Mrs. Gloria Evans, Consultant for Testing and Guidance, is an
experienced counselor who will assist students with problems of
academic adjustment, study skills and reading proficiency. She also
can give aptitude and interest tests on request. Appointments may
be made at her office in Parrish Hall.
Every coeducational and women’s living unit has an adult head
resident or resident couple. In most instances they are assisted by
senior residents and/or proctors who are members of the junior or
senior classes. Student proctors are also assigned to each of the men’s
dormitory sections. In addition, a group of upperclass women is
chosen to serve as counselors for freshman women, with several being
assigned to each hall.
Career Planning and Placement
Mrs. Judith Katz, Director of Career Planning and Placement, pro46

COLLEGE LIFE

vides assistance to students in considering how a given major may
relate to future employment, choosing an occupation, and locating
employment during the summers and upon graduation. She also plans
periodic conferences and arranges interviews for students with
prospective employers. Appointments may be made with Mrs. Katz
at her office in Parrish Hall.
Alumni Office
The Alumni Office keeps records of the addresses of all living
graduates and alumni of the college. It helps edit the Swarthmore
alumni magazine, and acts as liaison for the college with all alumni
and alumni groups, interpreting to them the present plans and policies
of the college.
News Office
The News Office does a two-fold job. It helps prepare the several
publications put out by the college known as Swarthmore College
Bulletins. These include the alumni magazine, the President’s Report,
the Catalogue, the Student Handbook, and other miscellaneous issues.
In addition to this, the News Office, with the assistance of the largely
student operated News Bureau, works with the press and other com­
munications media in publicizing news that is of interest to the gen­
eral public.

47

STU D EN T

C O M M U N IT Y

Student Conduct
The influence of the Society of Friends within the College com­
munity is one of the important factors in making Swarthmore what it
is. Students who choose Swarthmore as their college should under­
stand that they are accepting social and academic standards which,
while subject to periodic review, are essential to the well-being of
the community. In general, the life of students should be governed
by good taste and accepted practice rather than elaborate rules. Cer­
tain regulations, however, are of particular importance and are listed
below.
1. The possession and use of alcoholic beverages on the campus is
regulated by State law and limited to those areas of the campus which
are specified by Student Council and the Deans. The observance of
moderation and decorum in respect to drink is a student obligation.
Disorderly conduct is regarded as a serious offense.
2. The use or possession of injurious drugs or narcotics without
the specific recommendation of a physician and knowledge of the
Deans subjects a student to possible suspension or expulsion. Such
cases normally will be decided by the Deans.
3. The use or possession of firearms or other dangerous weapons
is not permitted. Firecrackers or other explosives are prohibited.
Tampering with fire alarm or prevention equipment is a serious offense.
4. No undergraduate may maintain an automobile while enrolled
at the College without the permission of the Car Authorization Com­
mittee, a student-faculty group. This permission is not extended to
freshmen. Day students may use cars for commuting to College, but
special arrangements for stickers must be made for campus parking.
More detailed information may be obtained from the Office of the
Deans.
5. The participation by any student in any disruption or inter48

STUDENT COMMUNITY

ference with the orderly programs, functions, or conduct of College
activities of any kind is a serious offense.
Penalties for violations of College regulations such as those listed
above are set by judicial committees or the Deans and may involve
suspension or expulsion. Standing regulations may be modified and
new rules may be added at any time upon notice to the student body.
The College reserves the right to exclude at any time students whose
conduct it regards as undesirable, and without assigning any further
reason therefor. Neither the College nor any of its officers shall be
under any liability whatsoever for such exclusion.
Student Council
The semi-annually elected Student Council represents the entire
undergradute community and is the chief body of student govern­
ment. Its efforts are directed toward coordination of student activi­
ties and the expression of student opinion.
Committees of the Council include the Budget Committee, which
regulates distribution of funds to student groups; the Elections Com­
mittee, which supervises procedure in campus elections; and the
Social Committee, see below. In addition to these, there are several
joint Faculty-Student Committees, whose student membership is ap­
pointed by a Student Committee on Committees which acts after con­
sultation with two deans and two members of the faculty.
Judicial Bodies
Two committees have different jurisdictions. The Student Judiciary
Committee, elected by the entire student body, acts on all cases of
alleged violations of students’ rules and campus regulations except
as they fall within the sphere of the College Judiciary Committee.
The College Judiciary Committee is composed of student and faculty
members and the Deans. It deals with and acts upon any violations
of rules or standards of conduct that may involve penalties of suspen­
sion or expulsion, and upon cases referred or appealed from the
Student Judiciary Committee.
Women’s Dormitory Councils
There are three women’s dormitory councils: one each in Parrish,
Willets, and the smaller upperclass women’s dormitories. These coun­
cils are composed of the Senior Residents who are appointed by the
Dean of Women, and the Hall Presidents who are elected by each hall.
Each council elects one of its members to serve on the Coordinating
Committee which meets regularly with the Dean. It is through the
49

STUDENT COMMUNITY

Coordinating Committee that certain programs of interest to students
can be implemented and dormitory problems often can be resolved.
Social Committee
An extensive program of social activities is managed by the Social
Committee appointed by the Student Council. The program is de­
signed to appeal to a wide variety of interests, and is open to all stu­
dents. There is usually no charge for college social functions.
EXTRA-CURRICULAR ACT IV ITI ES
In addition to the foregoing organizations, Swarthmore students
have an opportunity to participate in a program of extra-curricular
activities wide enough to meet every kind of interest. There are more
than thirty-five organized activities, not including departmental clubs
or political organizations. They vary as greatly as the interests of the
students vary, from the Flying Club to the Chess Club, from the Crea­
tive Writing Group to the Co-ed Dance Group. The College encour­
ages a student to participate in whatever activity best fits his personal
talents and inclinations, believing that satisfactory avocations are a
necessary part of life.
The Studio Arts Program
Instruction and facilities in Studio Arts are available on an extra­
curricular basis as well as for credit in the academic program of the
Art Department. See page 83 for a listing of credit and non-credit
courses.
The Wilcox Gallery provides ten to twelve exhibitions a year,
which are a direct complement to the program. The works of na­
tionally known painters as well as those of younger artists are exhib­
ited in group and one man shows.
The Marjorie Heilman Visiting Artist Program
Each year a committee of students and faculty members selects an
artist to be invited to spend a week at the College. The work of the
invited artist is exhibited in the Wilcox Gallery, and he meets and
talks with students on an informal basis.
Music
The Department of Music administers and staffs several perform­
ing organizations. The College Chorus, directed by Professor Swing,
rehearses twice per week for a total of three hours. (The College
Singers, a select small chorus drawn from the membership of the
Chorus, rehearses an additional hour per week.) The College Orches50

STUDENT COMMUNITY

tra, directed by Mr. Freeman, rehearses twice per week: a two-hour
rehearsal for full orchestra and a one-hour rehearsal for strings.
Members of the orchestra, other instrumentalists and solo singers
can participate in the chamber music coaching program directed by
Mr. Kalish and Mr. Zukofsky.
The Chorus and Orchestra give several public concerts per year at
the College and at other schools. Selected members of the chamber
music coaching program give a public concert in the spring.
All three organizations require auditions for membership.
The Bond Concert Committee, a student organization working with
the Department of Music, plans a series of informal Sunday after­
noon concerts to accommodate students interested in preparing solo
and chamber music performances. These concerts also provide an
opportunity for student composers to get public performances.
There are facilities for private practice, and an excellent college
record collection. The Cooper Foundation presents a distinguished
group of concerts each year on the campus.
Dance
The Department of Physical Education for Women sponsors per­
formance groups in Folk Dance and Modern Dance. Both groups meet
regularly each week and give performances throughout the year. In
addition, Mrs. Patricia Boyer will offer this year a non-credit course in
dance composition.
Drama
Professor Lee Devin is Director of The Theatre. He supervises the
drama program, which includes some course work, workshops with
guest directors, invited speakers, and a number of student-directed
projects each semester. Interested students should consult the depart­
mental statement in English Literature.
Athletics
Swarthmore’s athletic policy is based on the premise that any inter­
collegiate program must be justified by the contribution which it can
make to the educational development of the individual student who
chooses to participate. In keeping with this fundamental policy,
Swarthmore’s athletic program is varied and extensive, offering every
student a chance to take part in a wide range of sports. The College
feels that it is desirable to have as many students as possible com­
peting on its intercollegiate teams.
51

STUDENT COMMUNITY

Fraternities
There are four fraternities at Swarthmore; Delta Upsilon and Phi
Sigma Kappa are affiliated with national organizations while Tau
Alpha Omicron and Phi Omicron Psi are local associations. Fraterni­
ties are adjuncts to the college social program and maintain separate
lodges on the campus. The lodges do not contain dormitory accom­
modations or eating facilities. New members are pledged during the
late fall of their first year at the college. In recent years about one
third of the freshman men have decided to affiliate with one of the
fraternities.

52

E D U C A T IO N A L

PROGRAM

General Statement
Swarthmore College offers the degree of Bachelor of Arts and the
degree of Bachelor of Science. The latter is given only to students
who major in Engineering; the former, to students in the Humanities,
the Social Sciences, and the Natural Sciences.* Four years of resident
study are normally required for a Bachelor’s degree. (See page74).
The selection of a program will depend upon the student’s inter­
ests and vocational plans. Programs in engineering, pre-medical
courses, and chemistry, for example, are the usual preparation for
professional work in these fields. Students planning a career in law,
business, or government service find majors in the humanities or
social sciences of value.
The purpose of a liberal education, however, is not primarily to
provide vocational instruction, even though it provides the best foun­
dation for one’s future vocation. Its purpose is to help students fulfill
their responsibilities as citizens and grow into cultivated and versa­
tile individuals. A liberal education is concerned with our cultural
inheritance, with the development of aesthetic, moral, and spiritual
values and of analytical abilities.
It is necessary for most students to concern themselves with the
problem of making a living. But this concern should not lead them to
a specialization that is too early and too narrow. They still have need
of broadening the scope of their experience. Particular skills may
afford readier access to routine employment, but positions of greater
responsibility will be occupied by those who are equipped to think
their way through new problems and to conceive of their functions
in a larger context of time and place. Liberal education and voca­
tional training may be the joint products of a common process, and
the courses here offered should be selected with this large purpose in
view.
*For groupings of departments, see page 219.

55

EDUCATIONAL

PROGRAM

All students during the first half of their college program are ex­
pected to satisfy some if not all of the distribution requirements, to
choose their major and minor subjects, and to prepare for advanced
work in these subjects by taking certain prerequisites. The normal
program consists of four courses each semester chosen by the student
in consultation with his faculty adviser.
The program for upper class students affords a choice between two
methods of study: Honors work and the Course program. An Honors
student concentrates on two or three fields, his major and one or more
minors, which he studies intensively and which occupy three-fourths
of his working time during the last two years. At the close of his
senior year he takes a series of six examinations given by visiting
examiners over this work. In addition he takes four courses, or the
equivalent, which provide opportunities for further exploration out­
side of his Honors program.
A student in the Course program has a somewhat wider freedom
of election and takes four courses or their equivalent in each of the
last four semesters. Before the end of his senior year he is required to
pass a comprehensive examination given by his major department.
The program for engineering students follows a similar basic plan,
with certain variations which are explained on page 112. Courses
outside the technical fields are spread over all four years.
The course advisers of freshmen and sophomores are members of
the faculty appointed by the Associate Provost. For juniors and seniors
the advisers are the chairmen of their major departments or their
representatives.
PROGRAM FOR FRESHMEN
AND SOPHOMORES
The curriculum of the first two years introduces a student to the
methods and content of a variety of fields important to a liberal edu­
cation.
I.
To meet the distribution requirements of the College, a student
must take at least two courses from each of the four groups listed
below and must elect work in at least six departments. Subject to the
restrictions indicated here, students may receive credit toward distri­
bution through taking any numbered course in a given department
that they are eligible to take. Mathematics, though not one of the sub­
jects included in the four groups, may be counted as one of the six
departments.
1. Astronomy, Biology, Chemistry, Engineering, Physics.
2. Art (courses in art history), Classics (literature courses numbered
11 or above), English Literature (except courses numbered 70-79),
56

EDUCATIONAL PROGRAM

Modern Languages (literature courses numbered 11 ot above),
Music (except courses numbered 34-39).
3. Classics (courses in ancient history), History, Linguistics (except
Linguistics 38), Philosophy, Psychology, Religion.
4. Economics, Political Science, Sociology and Anthropology.
Students entering college with special preparation in any of the
subjects included in the distribution requirements may apply to the
Committee on Academic Requirements for exemption from that
requirement.
It is most desirable that students include in their programs some
work in a foreign language. A student who intends to major in one of
the natural sciences, mathematics, or engineering should take an ap­
propriate mathematics course in his freshman year.
In addition to the requirements listed above, prerequisites must be
completed for the work of the last two years in major and minor sub­
jects, and sufficient additional electives must be taken to make up a
full program.
It is expected that, after satisfying the requirements in the general
program of the first two years, the student will devote the remainder
of his sophomore year to courses which will prepare him for more
advanced study of those subjects which have most interested him and
to other courses which will increase the range of his knowledge. He
should decide, as early in his sophomore year as possible, upon two
or three subjects in which he might like to major and should consult
the statements of the departments concerned as to required and
recommended courses and supporting subjects.
While faculty advisers assist the student in planning his program
so as to develop his talents while meeting academic requirements, it
is emphasized that students themselves are individually responsible
for the planning of their programs. Faculty advisers, department chair­
men, other faculty members, the Deans and the Associate Provost
and Registrar are available for information and advice.
Physical education is required of all students (except veterans) in
the first two years with certain provisions for exemption. The require­
ments are stated in full on page 73 and in the statements of the
departments of Physical Education.
COURSE PROGRAM FOR JUNIORS AND SENIORS
The work of juniors and seniors in the Course program includes
some intensive, specialized study within a general area of interest.
57

EDUCATIONAL PROGRAM

This comprises enough work in a single department (designated as a
“major”) to make an equivalent of at least eight courses before
graduation. There is no upper limit to the number of courses a student
may take in the major field, provided that he take at least twenty
courses outside the major field. Before graduation the student must
pass a comprehensive examination in his major subject.
A student must choose his major subject at the end of the sopho­
more year, and apply formally through the Registrar to be accepted
by the division concerned. The decision will be based on an estimate
of his ability in his major subject as well as on his record. If a stu­
dent does not secure divisional approval, he cannot be admitted to
the junior class.
A student’s course adviser during his junior and senior years is the
chairman of his major department (or a member of the department
designated by the chairman) whose approval he must secure for his
choice of courses each semester.
The faculty may award the bachelor’s degree with Distinction to
students who have done distinguished work in the course program.
HONORS PROGRAM FOR JUNIORS AND SENIORS
The Honors Program, initiated in 1922 by President Frank Aydelotte and modified most recently in 1968, is a distinctive part of
Swarthmore’s educational life. It seeks to free from the limitations
of classroom routine those students whose maturity, interest, and
capacity suit them for independent work. While the program is de­
signedly flexible and responsive to new needs, it has been character­
ized from the beginning by three basic elements, which taken together
may be said to be the essence of the system.
(1) Honors work involves a concentration of the student’s atten­
tion during his last two years upon a limited field of studies. He nor­
mally pursues only two subjects during a semester, thereby avoiding
fragmentation of interest. The content of the subject matter field is
correspondingly broader, permitting a wide range of reading and in­
vestigation and demanding of the student correlations of an inde­
pendent and searching nature.
(2) Honors work frees the student from periodic examinations,
since his thinking is under continual scrutiny by his classmates and
instructors. By this program he undertakes to prepare himself to
take examinations in six subjects at the close of his senior year. In
these he is expected to demonstrate his competence in a field of
knowledge rather than simply his mastery of those facts and interpre58

EDUCATIONAL PROGRAM

tations which his instructor has seen fit to present. These examina­
tions, consisting of a three-hour paper in each field, are set by exam­
iners from other institutions who read the papers and then come to
the campus to conduct an oral examination of each student, in order
to clarify and enlarge the basis of their judgment of his command of
his material.
(3)
Honors work is customarily carried on in seminars or small
classes or in independent projects which may lead to an Honors
paper or thesis. Seminars meet once a week, in many cases in the
home of the instructor, for sessions lasting three hours or more. The
exact technique of the seminar varies with the subject matter, but its
essence is a cooperative search for truth, whether it be by papers,
discussion, or laboratory experiment. Each student has an equal
responsibility for the assimilation of the whole of the material and is
correspondingly searching in his scrutiny of ideas presented by his
fellows or by his instructor. The student is expected to devote half of
his working time during a semester to each seminar or course taken
in preparation for an Honors paper or examination. No student is
permitted under ordinary circumstances to take more than six sem­
inars. He may take fewer than six, since he may prepare in other
ways for his Honors examinations.
In practice three avenues toward an Honors degree are open:
(1) The normal program of Honors work consists of six subjects
studied during the last two years in preparation for papers i.e., exami­
nations, given by the visiting examiners at the close of the senior year.
The usual pattern is four papers in the major department and two in
a minor department, but other combinations of major and minor fields
are possible. No student is allowed more than four papers in his
major; in those cases where he offers three subjects in each of two
fields, one of them is designated as his major. While there is a
general belief that two papers in a minor field are desirable because
of the mutual reinforcement they provide, there are by custom cer­
tain subjects which are allowed to stand alone. Thus there is a con­
siderable flexibility in Honors programs, each being subject to the
scrutiny of the departments and divisions in which the work is done.
(2) Students who have a special reason to study for one or two
semesters abroad or in another American institution must take the
normal number of examinations. Such programs must be worked out
in advance, since it may not be possible to provide special visiting
examiners for work offered elsewhere and since instruction in some
59

EDUCATIONAL PROGRAM

fields of the student’s choice may not be available in the other institu­
tion. In general the student following this avenue to an Honors degree
should weigh carefully the advantage of working independently or
under tutorial guidance against the loss he incurs by missing both the
stimulus and the criticism provided by his fellows in seminar.
(3)
Students who at the end of the sophomore year did not elect
or were not permitted to read for Honors, but whose work has sub­
sequently shown distinction, may be encouraged to enter the Honors
program as late as the middle of the senior year. They shall receive
no remission of the number of examinations by reason of their prep­
aration in Course but shall be subject to the regulations governing
Honors programs of the division concerned. Such students must peti­
tion the division for permission to take the Honors examinations and
must submit an acceptable list of examinations which they are pre­
pared to take.
A candidate for admission to Honors should consult the chairmen
of his prospective major and minor departments during the second
semester of his sophomore year and work out a program for the jun­
ior and senior years. This proposed program must be filed in the of­
fice of the Registrar who will forward it to the divisions concerned.
The acceptance of the candidate by the divisions depends in part
upon the quality of his previous work as indicated by the grades he
has received but mainly upon his apparent capacity for assuming the
responsibility of Honors work. The major department is responsible
for the original plan of work and for keeping in touch with the
candidate’s progress from semester to semester. The division is re­
sponsible for approval of the original program and of any later
changes in that program.
At the end of the junior year Honors students are required to take
the Honors examinations set at that time for the fields they have stud­
ied. These trial papers are read, however, by their instructors, not by
the visiting examiners. On the basis of the showing made in these
examinations, the student may be advised or even required to return
to Course, or he may be warned that he continues in Honors at his
own risk. Those students who return to Course under these circum­
stances or for other reasons will receive grades for the work they
have done while reading for Honors, but in no case without taking
examinations over the field covered.
At the end of the senior year the reading of the examinations and
the decision of the degree of Honors to be awarded the candidates is
60

EDUCATIONAL PROGRAM

entirely in the hands of the visiting examiners. Upon their recom­
mendation, successful candidates are awarded the Bachelor’s Degree
with Honors, with High Honors, or with Highest Honors. When the
work of a candidate does not in the opinion of the examiners merit
Honors of any grade, his papers are returned to his instructors, who
decide, under rules of the Faculty, whether he shall be given a degree
in Course.
E X C E P T I O N S TO T H E F O U R Y EA R
PROGRAM
Although the normal period of uninterrupted work toward the Bach­
elor of Arts and Bachelor of Science degrees is four years, graduation
in three years is freely permitted when a student can take advantage of
Advanced Placement credits, perhaps combining them with extra
work by special permission. When personal circumstances warrant a
student may lengthen the continuous route to graduation to five years
by carrying fewer courses than the norm of four during some or all of
his college career: this may occasionally be appropriate for students
who enter Swarthmore lacking some elements of the usual prepara­
tion for college or who, for other reasons, wish to free time for activ­
ities relating to their curricular work although not done for academic
credit. Such five-year programs are possible in Music and Studio Arts
for students who are taking some instruction off campus or who wish
to pursue studio or instrumental work without full credit but with in­
struction and critical supervision; but such programs in the arts are
possible only on application to and selection by the department con­
cerned based on exceptional accomplishment or promise. In all cases
where it is proposed to reduce academic credit and lengthen the period
before graduation the College looks particularly to personal circum­
stances and to careful advising and necessarily charges the regular
annual tuition. Full-time leaves of absence for a semester or a year or
more are freely permitted and in some cases encouraged, subject also
to careful planning and academic advising.
F O R M A T S OF I N S T R U C T I O N
While classes and seminars are the normal curricular formats at
Swarthmore, faculty regulations encourage other modes as well. These
include various forms of individual study, student-run courses, and a
limited amount of “practical” or off-campus work. The rationale and
details of these methods are set out in Critique of a College (1967).
The principal forms of individual work are attachments, directed
61

EDUCATIONAL

PROGRAM

reading, and tutorials. The faculty regulation on attachments provides
that a student may attach to an existing course, with permission of the
instructor, a project of additional reading, research, and writing. If this
attachment is taken concurrently with the course it is normally done
for half credit. If it is taken in a later semester (preferably the sem­
ester immediately following) it may be done for either half or full
credit. This kind of work can be done on either a small group or
individual basis. It is not possible in all courses, but it is in most,
including some introductory courses. For freshmen and sophomores
it is a way of developing capacities for independent work, and for
Honors students it is an alternative to seminars as a preparation for
papers; but all students are encouraged to consider it. Students who
decide before the middle of the semester to do a half-credit attachment
may commonly, with permission, drop a regular course and carry three
and a half credits in that term to be balanced by four and a half credits
in another term. Students may do as many as two attachments each
year.
Directed reading and tutorials are similar; but the faculty role in
the former is more bibliographical than pedagogical, and, because they
require somewhat less faculty time, opportunities for directed reading
are more frequent in most departments than are opportunities for
tutorials. In both cases substantial written work and/or written exam­
inations are considered appropriate, and it is generally desirable that
the work be more specialized or more sharply focussed than is usually
the case in courses or seminars; the work may range from a course of
reading to a specific research project. Such work is available primarily
to juniors and seniors in accordance with their curricular interests and
as faculty time permits.
The faculty regulation on student-run courses permits “a group of
students to propose a topic to an instructor for half or single credit and
to run their own course with a reading list approved by the instructor
and a final examination or equivalent administered by him, but nor­
mally with no further involvement of faculty.” In organizing such a
course students obtain provisional approval and agreement to serve as
course supervisor from a faculty member by December 1st (for the
spring term) or May 1st (for the fall term) on the basis of an initial
memorandum emphasizing the principal subject matter to be studied,
the questions to be asked about it, the methods of investigation, and
providing a preliminary bibliography. The course is then registered
by its organizers with the Provost, who has administrative supervi­
sion of such work, and who may waive the foregoing deadlines to
62

EDUCATIONAL

PROGRAM

recognize problems in the organization of such courses. The course
supervisor consults his department and any other departments con­
cerned (and the Curriculum Committee in the case of an inter­
departmental course). He also reviews the course outline and
bibliography and qualifications and general eligibility of students
proposing to participate in the course. On departmental (or Curric­
ulum Committee) approval the course supervisor’s final approval is
due ten days before the term begins, following which a revised reading
list and class list are given to the Librarian and the course title and
class list are filed with the Registrar. At the end of the course the
supervisor evaluates and grades the students’ work or arranges for an
outside-examiner to do so.
Student-run courses may vary in format and content. In particular,
they may be provisionally proposed for half credit to run in the first
half of the semester, and, at mid-term, may be either concluded or,
if the participants and course supervisor find the work profitable,
continued for the balance of the term for full credit. Alternatively,
student-run courses may be started after the beginning of the semester
(up to mid-semester) for half credit and then be continued, on the
same basis, into the following term. Or they may be taken for half
credit over a full term. The role of the course supervisor may exceed
that in planning and evaluation outlined above and extend to occa­
sional or regular participation. The only essentials, and the purpose
of the procedures, are sufficient planning and organization of the
course to facilitate focus and penetration. The course planning and
organization, both analytical and bibliographical, are also regarded
as important ends in themselves, to be emphasized in the review of
proposals before approval. Up to four of the 32 credits required for
graduation may be taken in student-run courses.
Finally, as to applied or practical work, the College may under
faculty regulations grant up to one course credit for practical work,
which may be done off campus, when it can be shown to lend itself to
intellectual analysis and is likely to contribute to a student’s progress in
regular course work, and subject to four conditions: (1) agreement of
an instructor to supervise the project; (2) permission of the Curricu­
lum Committee; (3) a basis for the project in some prior course work;
and (4) normally, the examination of pertinent literature and produc­
tion of a written report as parts of the project. This option is intended
to apply to work in which direct experience of the off-campus world or
responsible applications of academic learning or imaginative aspects of
the practice of an art are the primary elements. Because such work is
63

EDUCATIONAL PROGRAM

likely to bear a loose relation to organized instruction and the regular
curriculum the College limits academic credit for it while recognizing
its special importance for some students’ programs.
IN TER-D ISCIPL IN A RY WORK
The requirements of the departmental major typically leave room for
significant flexibility in students’ programs, both within and outside the
major. This may be used to pursue a variety of interests and to empha­
size intellectual diversity; it may also be used for the practical integra­
tion of individual programs around interests or principles supplement­
ing the major. Except for International Relations, the Mediaeval
Studies major, and the Linguistics-Psychology major, the College does
not offer inter-departmental majors or, except for Black Studies,
formal inter-disciplinary programs short of the major. The programs
in Education and in Linguistics have departmental status as to staff,
although students do not major in them. It should be recognized that
some departments are themselves rather inter-disciplinary in nature;
that a number of courses are cross-listed between departments; that
each year a few courses are taught jointly by members of two or more
departments; that departments commonly recommend or require sup­
porting work for their major in other departments; and that students
can organize their work into personally selected concentrations in
addition to or as extensions of their majors. One such concentration
is formally provided in the Black Studies program (see page 95).
Many other opportunities exist informally—e.g., in comparative liter­
ature, in American studies, in Religion and Sociology-Anthropology,
in Engineering and Social Sciences, or in Biology and Chemistry.
Students are encouraged to seek the advice of faculty members on
such possibilities with respect to their particular interests. In some
cases faculty members of several departments have planned and sched­
uled their course offerings with some consultation so as to afford a
de facto concentration in addition to the major, and students may
wish to know and take advantage of these cases of overlapping faculty
interests. The followiang listings, which may be expected to change
from year to year, reflect currently organized opportunities, although
some other possibilities are mentioned with the listings of depart­
mental programs later in the catalogue.
ASIAN STUDIES
Students who wish to undertake work at Swarthmore in Asian
studies should be aware of the course and seminar offerings pertaining
64

EDUCATIONAL PROGRAM

to Asia in a number of departments. The opportunity exists to develop
coordinated programs of study of an interdisciplinary nature drawing
on Asian materials, in conjunction with a standard department major.
Students who wish to explore these possibilities are invited to discuss
the matter with either Mr. Yuan (History), Mr. Piker (SociologyAnthropology) , or Mr. Swearer (Religion).
Courses and seminars dealing primarily or exclusively with Asian
materials:
Department of Art
51. Far Eastern Art (Mr. Rhys)
Department of History
9. China (Mr. Yuan)
44. Modem China (Mr. Yuan)
45. Modern Japan (Mr. Yuan)
46. Asian Nationalisms (Mr. Yuan)
144. The Modern Far East (Mr. Yuan)
Department of Political Science
19. Comparative Communist Politics (Mr. Lieberthal)
20. Politics of East Asia (Mr. Lieberthal)
107. Comparative Communist Politics (Mr. Lieberthal)
Department of Religion
5. Introduction to Asian Religions (Mr. Swearer)
13. Religion in India and Southeast Asia (Mr. Swearer)
14. Religion in East Asia (Mr. Swearer)
26. Religion as a Cultural Institution: Monasticism
(Mr. Swearer)
108. Idealistic Thought of India (Mr. Swearer)
Department of Sociology and Anthropology
64. Colloquium: Theravada Buddhism, A Social History
(Mr. Piker)
Courses and seminars which include Asian materials:
Department of Economics
11. Economic Development (Mr. Pack)
47. Marxist Political Economy (Mr. Pryor and Mr. Smith)
106. Comparative Economic Systems (Mr. Pryor)
65

EDUCATIONAL PROGRAM

109. Economic Development (Mr. Pack)
Department of History
43. Expansion of Europe (Mr. Wright)
Department of Political Science
3. Comparative Politics
18. Politics of Developing Nations (Mr. Hopkins)
47. Marxist Political Economy (Mr. Pryor and Mr. Smith)
109. Political Development (Mr. Hopkins)
Department of Religion
24. Mysticism East and West (Mr. Swearer)
Department of Sociology and Anthropology
23. Comparative Social Organization (Mr. Brow)
29. Sociology of Religion
63. Psychological Anthropology (Mr. Piker)
66. Directed reading on the culture and history of Theravada SE
Asia is available with Mr. Piker. Prerequisite: permission.
70. Economic Anthropology (Mr. Brow)
102. Comparative Social Organization (Mr. Brow)
107. Sociology of Religion
PRE-MEDICAL PROGRAM
Students who are considering the possibility of attending medical
(or dental) school after graduation from Swarthmore should plan
their academic programs carefully to meet the pre-medical require­
ments, listed below, as well as the general College requirements.
Specific requirements of the various medical schools, as well as basic
information on other aspects of pre-medical and medical training, can
be found in “Admission Requirements of American Medical Col­
leges” published by the Association of American Medical Colleges.
Recent editions of this book are available in the various libraries on
the campus. All students planning a medical career should become
familiar with this book.
Sophomores, juniors, and seniors will be in contact with the pre­
medical consultant who, for 1971-72, will be Professor Jenkins
(Biology). It is also the consultant’s function to prepare a statement
of evaluation and recommendation to each medical school to which
the student may apply, basing this statement on all available informa66

EDUCATIONAL PROGRAM

tion, including the student’s record and faculty evaluations.
In conference with the student, the faculty adviser maps out a pro­
gram based on requirements listed below, the college’s general re­
quirements, and the particular needs and interests of the student.
Beyond these considerations the need for understanding basic social
problems, the cultivation of sensitiveness to cultural values, and the
values of intensive work in at least one field is kept in mind in map­
ping an individual program.
The following courses are among the minimum requirements of
most medical schools: Biology 1,2; Chemistry 1,2 or 11,12, Chemistry
28,29; Mathematics 3,4 or 5,6; Physics 1,2; English Literature, two
semester courses. Some medical schools have foreign language re­
quirements. Advanced work in biology, chemistry and mathematics
is recommended depending on the student’s program and interests.
Medical school requirements are changing rapidly and the student is
urged to familiarize himself with the specific requirements of those
medical schools in which he is interested.
The work of the junior and senior years may be done in either the
Course or the Honors program. Intensive work of the major may be
done in any department or the student’s choice. Medical schools
expect, however, that students majoring in the Divisions of the
Humanities or Social Sciences will demonstrate solid competence in
the scientific subjects they take.
Although some students have been admitted to medical schools
upon the completion of three years of college work, most medical
schools strongly advise completion of four years of college, and in
practice admit very few with less.
CREATIVE ARTS
Work=in the creative arts is available both in the curriculum of
certain departments and on an extra-curricular basis. Interested stu­
dents should consult the departmental statements in English Litera­
ture, Music, and Art. A total of not more than four courses in the
creative arts may be counted toward the degree of Bachelor of Arts.
.

CO OPERATION W I T H N EI G H B O R I N G
I N S T IT U TI ON S

With the approval of their faculty adviser and the Associate Pro­
vost, students may take courses offered by Bryn Mawr or Haverford
College or the University of Pennsylvania without the payment of
67

EDUCATIONAL PROGRAM

extra tuition. This arrangement does not apply to the summer session
of the University of Pennsylvania.
Advanced students in the physical sciences and engineering may
benefit from the Bartol Research Foundation, located on the campus,
which offers a graduate program. (See page 12)
EDUCATION ABROAD
The College recognizes the general educational value of travel and
study abroad and cooperates as far as possible in enabling interested
students to take advantage of such opportunities. It distinguishes,
however, between those foreign study plans which may be taken for
credit as part of a Swarthmore educational program, and those which
must be regarded as supplementary. To be acceptable for credit, for­
eign study must meet Swarthmore academic standards, and must
form a coherent part of the student’s four-year plan of study. The
Honors Program in particular demands a concentration of study
which is not easily adapted to the very different educational systems
of foreign universities. Therefore, while some of the approved pro­
grams listed below may normally be taken as substitutes for a semes­
ter or a year of work at Swarthmore, each case is judged individually,
and the college may withhold its approval of a particular program, or
may insist that the program be carried out as an extra college year.
Plans for study abroad must be approved in advance by the Asso­
ciate Provost and Registrar and by the chairmen of departments con­
cerned, if credit is to be given for courses taken, and students may be
asked to take examinations upon their return to the College.
1. Established Programs. Students who wish to study abroad un­
der formal academic conditions may apply to one of the programs
administered by other American colleges and universities; for exam­
ple, those of Hamilton College, Smith College, or Sweet Briar College.
These are full-year programs of study at foreign universities, under
the supervision of American college personnel. Interested students
should consult the Associate Provost for details.
2. Direct Enrollment. Application may also be made directly to
foreign institutions for admission as a special student. This should be
done only after consultation with the Associate Provost and the appro­
priate department head, and care must be taken to assure in advance
that courses taken abroad will be acceptable for Swarthmore credit.
Most foreign universities severly limit the number of students they
accept for short periods, however, and anyone who applies for ad­
mission directly must be prepared to be refused.
68

EDUCATIONAL PROGRAM

3. University of Keele. For a number of years Swarthmore College
and the University of Keele, Staffordshire, England, have had a stu­
dent exchange each year. A student from Swarthmore is selected for
study at Keele by a committee which interviews the applicants. The
year at Keele may take the place of the junior year at Swarthmore,
though it is often taken as an extra year.
4. Peaslee Scholarships. These scholarships, the gift of Amos
Peaslee (Class of ’07), were instituted in 1953 and are normally
awarded each year, preferably to sophomores and juniors, for lan­
guage study abroad. The scholarships are for a minimum of one
semester plus a summer; course credit is given for the work done
upon approval of the department concerned.
5. International Association for the Exchange of Students for Tech­
nical Experience. This program, administered by the Engineers’
Joint Council, provides opportunities for engineering and science stu­
dents to work for engineering firms and laboratories in Europe dur­
ing summer vacations. Students are paid living expenses by the em­
ploying firm in the currency of the country in which they work; they
pay their own travel costs. Applications must be made by January 1
for work the following summer, and students are notified of the As­
sociation’s decision by March 31. For further information, students
should consult the Director of Career Planning and Placement.
6. University of Warwick, England. A fall semester exchange pro­
gram for members of the Swarthmore junior class majoring in His­
tory and second year students in the School of History at Warwick
was inaugurated in 1966.

69

F A C U L T Y R E G U L A T IO N S
ATTENDANCE AT CLASSES
Registration to take a course for credit implies regular attendance
at classes, unless a student specifically elects to obtain credit in a
course without attending classes. The conditions for exercising this
option are set forth below. With this exception, students are respon­
sible for regular attendance. Faculty members will report to the
Deans the name of any student whose repeated absence is in their
opinion impairing the student’s work. The number of cuts allowed in
a given course is not specified, a fact which places a heavy responsi­
bility on all students to make sure that their work is not suffering as a
result of absences. Since freshmen must exercise particular care in
this respect, and since the Faculty recognizes its greater responsibility
toward freshmen in the matter of class attendance, it is expected that
freshmen, especially, will attend all classes.
When illness necessitates absence from classes, the student should
report at once to the nurses or to the college physician.
A student may obtain credit for a course without attending class
meetings by reading the material prescribed by a syllabus and taking
a final examination, under the following conditions:
1) The student must signify his intent to do so at the time of regis­
tration, having obtained the instructor’s approval in advance.
2) If after such registration the student wishes to change his status
and attend classes normally, he must again obtain the instructor s
approval.
3) The student may be required to perform such work, in addi­
tion to the final examination, as the instructor deems necessary for
adequate evaluation of his performance.
4) The final grade will be recorded by the Registrar exactly as if
the student had attended classes normally.
70

FACULTY REGULATIONS

GRADES
Instructors report to the Associate Provost and Registrar’s office
at intervals during the year upon the work of students in courses.
Informal reports during the semester take the form of comments on
unsatisfactory work. At the end of each semester formal grades are
given in each course under the letter system, by which A means ex­
cellent work, B good work, C satisfactory work, D passing but below
the average required for graduation, and NC (no credit) for uncom­
pleted or unsatisfactory work. W signifies that the student has been
permitted to withdraw from the course by the Committee on Academic
Requirements. X designates a condition; this means that a student
has done unsatisfactory work in the first half of a year course, but
by creditable work during the second half may earn a passing grade
for the full course and thereby remove his condition. R is used to
designate an auditor or to indicate cases in which the work of a
foreign student cannot be evaluated because of deficiencies in English.
Inc. means that a student’s work is incomplete with respect to spe­
cific assignments or examinations. The Faculty has voted that the
grade given in a course should incorporate a zero for any part of the
course not complete by the date of the final examination. The grade
Incomplete should be given only after consultation with the Registrar
and only in cases in which it can be shown that extraordinary circum­
stances made it impossible for the student to complete his work
before the deadline, or in cases in which the instructor wishes to
insist on the completion of the work before giving a grade with
penalties. If an Inc. is received, it must normally be made up in the
term immediately following that in which it was incurred. A date is
set at the end of the first six weeks of each term when make-up exam­
inations must be taken and late papers submitted. Under special cir­
cumstances involving the use of laboratories or attendance at courses
not immediately available, a student may secure permission to extend
the time for making up an incomplete until the second term following.
This permission must be given in writing and filed in the Office of
the Registrar. Any not made up within a year from the time it was
imposed shall be recorded as NC (see above), and cannot be made
up.
The only grades recorded on students’ records for courses taken
during their first semester of the freshman year are CR (credit) and
NC (no credit). Students may designate four additional courses dur­
ing the following three semesters to be recorded on a credit/no
credit basis.
71

FACULTY REGULATIONS

Reports of grades are sent to students at the end of each semester.
They are not routinely sent to parents or guardians, but such in­
formation may be released at the discretion of the Deans when
parents request it.
A C average is required in the courses counted for graduation.
RE G I S T R A T I O N
All students are required to register at the time specified in official
announcements and to file programs of courses or seminars approved
by their course advisers. Fines are imposed for late or incomplete
registration.
A regular student is expected to take the prescribed number of
courses in each semester. If more than five or fewer than four courses
seem desirable, he should consult his course adviser and file a peti­
tion with the Committee on Academic Requirements.
Applications involving the late entrance into a course must be re­
ceived within the first two weeks of the semester. Applications in­
volving withdrawal from a course must be received not later than the
middle of the semester.
A deposit of $50 is required of all returning students prior to their
registration, during the spring semester, for the semester which begins
the following fall. This deposit is applied to charges for that fall
semester, and will be refunded if the student withdraws from College
prior to July 15.
STUDENT LEAVES OF ABSENCE
Student leaves of absence are freely permitted provided the re­
quest for leave is received by the date of registration and the student
is in good standing. If a student has not registered and has not
arranged for a leave of absence for the subsequent semester, it is
assumed that he or she is withdrawing. Such students must apply
to the Deans for re-admission in order to return to College after an
interval. The purpose of this policy is to assist the College in planning
its enrollments.
EX AMINATIONS
Any student who is absent from an examination, announcement of
which was made in advance, shall be given an examination at another
hour only by special arrangement with the instructor in charge of the
course.
72

FACULTY

REGULATIONS

No examination in absentia shall be permitted. This rule shall be
interpreted to mean that instructors shall give examinations only at
the college and under direct departmental supervision.
SUMMER SCHOOL WORK
Students desiring to transfer credit from a summer school are re­
quired to obtain the endorsement of the chairman of the department
concerned before entering upon the work, and after completing the
work are required to pass an examination set by the Swarthmore
department.
PHYSICAL EDUCATION
Physical education is required of all women and non-veteran men
in the freshman and sophomore years, unless an excuse is granted by
the college physician. Three periods per week are normally required,
but certain provisions for exemption based on achievement are in­
cluded. If any semester’s work of the first two years is failed it shall be
repeated in the junior year. No student shall be permitted to enter his
senior year with a deficiency in physical education.
ACADEMIC H ONESTY
Members of an academic community have an unequivocal responsi­
bility to present as the result of their own work only that which is truly
theirs. Cheating, whether in examinations or by plagiarizing the work
of others, is a most serious offense, and one which strikes at the foun­
dations of academic life.
The responsibility of the Faculty in this area is three-fold: to explain
the nature of the problem to those they teach, to minimize temptation
and to report any case of cheating to the Deans for action by the College
Judiciary Committee.
The College Judiciary Committee will consider the case, determine
guilt, and recommend a penalty to the President. The order of magni­
tude of the penalty should reflect the seriousness of the transgression.
It is the opinion of the Faculty that for the first offense failure in the
course and, as appropriate, suspension for a semester or deprivation of
the degree in that year is not unsuitable; for a second offense the
penalty should normally be expulsion.
E X C L U S I O N FR O M C O L L E G E
The College reserves the right to exclude at any time students whose
academic standing it regards as unsatisfactory, and without assigning
any further reason therefor; and neither the College nor any of its
officers shall be under any liability whatsoever for such exclusion.
73

DEGREE

R E Q U IR E M E N T S

BACHELOR OF ARTS AND BACHELOR OF SCIENCE
The degree of Bachelor of Arts and Bachelor of Science are con­
ferred upon students who have met the following requirements for
graduation:
1. The candidate must have completed thirty-two courses or their
equivalent.
2. He must have an average grade of C on the courses counted for
graduation.
3. He must have complied with the distribution requirements.
4. He must have met the requirements in the major and supporting
fields.
5. He must have passed satisfactorily the comprehensive examina­
tions in his major field or met the standards set by visiting examiners
for a degree with Honors.
6. He must have completed four semesters of study at Swarthmore
College, two of which have been those of the senior year.
7. He must have completed the physical education requirement set
forth on page 73 and in statements of the Physical Education Depart­
ments.
8. He must have paid all outstanding bills and returned all equip­
ment and library books.
MASTER OF ARTS AND MASTER OF SCIENCE
The degree of Master of Arts or Master of Science may be con­
ferred subject to the following requirements:
Only students who have completed the work for the Bachelor’s
degree with some distinction, either at Swarthmore or at another
institution of satisfactory standing, shall be admitted as candidates
for the Master’s degree at Swarthmore.
The candidate’s record and a detailed program setting forth the
aim of the work to be pursued shall be submitted, with a recommen74

DEGREE REQUIREMENTS

dation from the department or departments concerned, to the Com­
mittee on the Master’s Degree. If accepted by the Committee, the can­
didate’s name shall be reported to the faculty at or before the first
faculty meeting of the year in which the candidate is to begin his work.
The requirements for the Master’s degree shall include the equiva­
lent of a full year’s work of graduate character. This work may be
done in courses, seminars, reading courses, regular conferences with
members of the faculty, or research. The work may be done in one
department or in two related departments.
A candidate for the Master’s degree shall be required to pass an
examination conducted by the department or departments in which
his work was done. He shall be examined by outside examiners, pro­
vided that where this procedure is not practicable, exceptions may be
made by the Committee on the Master’s Degree. The department or
departments concerned, on the basis of the reports of the outside ex­
aminers, together with the reports of the student’s resident instructors,
shall make recommendations to the faculty for the award of the degree.
At the option of the department or departments concerned, a thesis
may be required as part of the work for the degree.
A candidate for the Master’s degree will be expected to show be­
fore admission to candidacy a competence in those languages deemed
by his department or departments most essential for his field of re­
search. Detailed language requirements will be indicated in the an­
nouncements of departments which admit candidates for the degree.
The tuition fee for graduate students who are candidates for the
Master’s degree is $2,300 per year, and the general fee for these stu­
dents is $25 per semester.
ADVANCED E N G I N E E R I N G DEGREES
The advanced degrees of Mechanical Engineer (M.E.), Electrical
Engineer (E.E.), and Civil Engineer (C.E.), may be obtained by
graduates who have received their Bachelor’s degree in Engineering
upon fulfilling the requirements given below:
1. The candidate must have been engaged in engineering work for
five years since receiving his first degree.
2. He must have had charge of engineering work and must be in a
position of responsibility and trust at the time of application.
3. He must make application and submit an outline of the thesis he
expects to present, one full year before the advanced degree is to be
conferred.
75

DEGREE

REQUIREMENTS

4. The thesis must be submitted for approval one calendar month
before the time of granting the degree.
5. Every candidate shall pay a registration fee of $5 and an addi­
tional fee of $20 when the degree is conferred.

76

AWARDS

AND

P R IZ E S

The Ivy Award Fund was created by a gift from Owen Moon, ’94.
The income of the fund is placed in the hands of the faculty for
award on Commencement Day to a male member of the graduating
class. The qualifications for the Ivy Award are similar to those for
the Rhodes Scholarships and include (a) qualities of manhood, force
of character, and leadership; (6) literary and scholastic ability and
attainments. These have been phrased by the donor in the words
“leadership based upon character and scholarship.”
The Oak Leaf Award was established by David Dwight Rowlands
of the Class of 1909. It was later permanently endowed in memory
of him by Hazel C. Rowlands, ’07, and Caroline A. Lukens, ’98. The
award is made by the faculty each year to the woman member of the
Senior Class who is outstanding for loyalty, scholarship and service.
The McCabe Engineering Award, founded by Thomas B. McCabe,
1915, is to be presented each year to the outstanding engineering stu­
dent in the Senior Class. The recipient is chosen by a committee of
the faculty of the department of Engineering.
The Phi Beta Kappa Prize is awarded by the Swarthmore Chapter
to the member of the junior class who had the best academic record
for the first two years. The value of the prize is $40.
The Brand Blanshard Prize, honoring Brand Blandshard, professor
of philosophy at Swarthmore from 1925 to 1945, has been established
by David H. Scull, of the Class of 1936. The award of $50 is pre­
sented annually to the student who, in the opinion of the department,
submits the best essay on any philosophical topic.
The A. Edward Newton Library Prize of $50, endowed by A. Ed­
ward Newton, to make permanent the Library Prize first established
by W. W. Thayer, is awarded annually to that undergraduate who,
in the opinion of the Committee of Award, shows the best and most
intelligently chosen collection of books upon any subject. Particular
emphasis is laid in the award not merely upon the size of the collec77

AWARDS AND PRI ZES

tion but also upon the skill with which the books are selected and upon
the owner’s knowledge of their subject-matter.
The Katherine B. Sicard Prize of $5, endowed by the Delta Gamma
Fraternity in memory of Katherine B. Sicard, ’34, is awarded annually
to the freshman woman who, in the opinion of the department, shows
greatest proficiency in English.
Public Speaking Contests. Prizes for contests in public speaking
are provided as follows: The Ella Frances Bunting Extemporary
Speaking Fund awards prizes for the best extemporaneous short
speeches. The Owen Moon Fund provides the Delta Upsilon Speak­
ing Contests awards for the best prepared speeches on topics of cur­
rent interest. The William Plumer Potter Public Speaking Fund,
established in 1927, sponsors a contest in the reading of poetry as
well as providing funds for other contests described below and for
the collection of recorded literature described on page 51.
Three prizes for the best student-written one-act plays are provided
by the William Plumer Potter Fund. The winning plays are usually
produced during the fall semester by the Little Theater Club.
Prizes for the best student short stories are also awarded from the
William Plumer Potter Fund.
The Lois Morrell Poetry Award, given by her parents in memory
of Lois Morrell of the Class of 1946, goes to that student who, in the
opinion of the faculty, submits the best original poem in the annual
competition for the award. The award, consisting of $100, is made
in the spring of the year. All entries should be submitted by April 1.
The John Russell Hayes Poetry Prizes, of approximately $25 for a
first prize and $15 for a second prize, are offered for the best original
poem or for a translation from any language. Manuscripts should be
ready by April 1 of each year.
The Academy of American Poets has established at Swarthmore
College one of its five-year award programs. The Academy gives
$100 each year for the prize poem (or group of poems) submitted in
a competition under the direction of the Department of English Lit­
erature. The program was initiated in 1967.
The May E. Parry Memorial Award, given by the Class of 1925 of
which she was a member, is presented each year to the senior woman
who by her loyalty, sportsmanship, and skill in athletics has made a
valuable contribution to Swarthmore College. The recipient is chosen
by the faculty of the Department of Physical Education for Women.
78

F E L L O W S H IP S
Three fellowships are awarded annually by the faculty, on recom­
mendation of the Committee on Fellowships, to seniors or graduates
of the college for the pursuit of advanced work. The proposed pro­
gram of study must have the approval of the faculty. Applications for
fellowships must be in the hands of the committee by April 15. Ap­
plicants for any one of these fellowships will be considered for the
others as well.
These three fellowships are:
The Hamah A. Leedom Fellowship of $1,100 founded by the
bequest of Hannah A. Leedom.
The Joshua Lippincott Fellowship of $1,400, founded by Howard
W. Lippincott, of the Class of 1875, in memory of his father.
The John Lockwood Memorial Fellowship of $1,400, founded by
the bequest of Lydia A. Lockwood, New York, in memory of her
brother, John Lockwood. It was the wish of the donor that the fel­
lowship be awarded to a member of the Society of Friends.
Four other fellowships are open to graduates of Swarthmore Col­
lege under the conditions described below:
The Lucretia Mott Fellowship, founded by the Somerville Literary
Society and sustained by the contribution of its life members, yields
an annual income of approximately $1,000. It is awarded each year
by a committee of the faculty to a woman graduate of that year who is
to pursue advanced study at some other institution approved by this
committee.
The Martha E. Tyson Fellowship, founded by the Somerville Lit­
erary Society in 1913, is sustained by the contributions of life mem­
bers of the society and yields an income of approximately $1,000.
It is awarded biennially by a committee of the faculty to a woman
79

FELLOWSHIPS

graduate of that year who plans to enter elementary or secondary
school work. The recipient of the award is to pursue a course of
study in an institution approved by the Committee of Award.
Sigma X i Research Fellowship. The Swarthmore Chapter of Sigma
Xi appoints, from time to time, as funds are available, Fellows with
research grants with a maximum value of $1,000. The holders of this
fellowship are usually associates of the chapter who have shown con­
spicuous ability in graduate studies. The purpose of the chapter in
awarding these fellowships is to relieve worthy students from teach­
ing and other distracting duties so that they may concentrate as much
as possible upon their research. Applications for these fellowships
should be made to the secretary of the chapter not later than the mid­
dle of March. Appointments will be announced about the middle of
April.

80

COURSES

OF IN ST R U C T IO N

The course (semester course) is the unit of credit. Seminars and
colloquia are usually given for double credit, i.e., equivalent to two
courses. A few courses are given for half-course credit.
A system of uniform numbering is used in all departments. Courses
are numbered as follows:
1 to 9—introductory courses
11 to 49—other courses open to students of all classes
51 to 69—advanced courses primarily for Juniors and Seniors.
101 to 199—seminars for Honors students and graduate students
Year courses the number of which are joined by a hyphen (e.g., 1-2)
must be continued for the entire year; credit is not given for the first
semester’s work only.

82

ART
H ED LEY H. RHYS, Professor*;
ROBERT M. W ALKER, Professor
TIM OTHY K. KITAO, Associate Professor
JOHN W. WILLIAMS, Associate Professor and Chairman
H A RRIET SHORR BAGUSKAS, Artist in R esidencet
FR A N K DOM INGUEZ, Instructor
KAREL MIKOLAS, Instructor
KIT-YIN TIEN G SNYDER, Associate
The Department of Art offers historical, critical, and practical instruction in
the visual arts. Courses in art history consider questions having to do with the
traditions, meaning, and historical context of works of art and architecture;
studio courses expose the problems of methods, processes and personal re­
sources which arise in the actual creation of objects in various media.
R

eq u irem en ts

and

Reco m

m end a tio ns

Prerequisites: Art 1 is the prerequisite for all other art history courses in the
department, except as otherwise noted. Art 71 is the usual prerequisite for
studio courses. Majors in Course and majors and minors in Honors must take
two courses, one of which must be Art ff. This requirement must be fulfilled
before the junior year. It is also strongly recommended that a prospective
major take Art 71.
Majors in Course: The program consists of at least eight courses (including
Art 1) in the department. At least two courses must be in periods before 1900.
Senior Reading (Art 60) is required for graduation.
Majors and Minors in Honors: Majors in Honors must prepare for four papers
in the department. A minor in Honors consists of two papers. The seminars
offered in any one semester vary according to the requirements of the stu­
dents and the convenience of the department.
Language Requirements for Graduate Schools: Students are advised that gradu­
ate work in art history requires a knowledge of French and German.
I. Introduction to Art History. A critical study of the nature of architecture,
sculpture and painting in their historical context.
II. Design in Drawing and Painting. The basic elements of design and their
function in drawing and painting. Types of harmony, sequence and balance such
as linear, tonal and spatial. The methods of design and representation that char$Absent on leave, 1971-72.
tAbsent on leave, spring semester, 1971-72.

83

ART
acterize the various historical styles. Practical exercises required demand no
special technical aptitude, since the purpose of the course is to develop a critical
understanding of drawing and painting and not technical skill.
Spring semester. Not offered in 1971-72. Mr. Rhys.
13. Ancient Art. A study of the ancient civilizations of Egypt and Western
Asia as a means of understanding the development of the art and architecture of
the Aegean Islands and Mainland Greece up to the year 450 B.C.
Fall semester. Mr. Walker.
16. Medieval Art A study of major developments in art and architecture
from around A.D. 300 to around A.D. 1200.
Fall semester. Mr. Williams.
17. Special Topics in Medieval Art. A concentration on selected aspects of
medieval art or architecture, such as the mosaics of Ravenna, Anglo-Irish Il­
lumination, Carolingian Art, Romanesque Art, the Gothic Cathedral. The topic
will change from year to year.
Spring semester. Mr. Williams.
18. Renaissance-Baroque Art A study of European art of the period 14001750, the focus varying from year to year between Italian Renaissance Art and
Baroque Art. The following topics will be discussed: humanism in art, art as
problem-solving, scientific methods in art, the idea of canon and perfection in
art, the nature of stylistic changes, historicism, the question of reality and illu­
sion, commerce and consumption of art, the rise of art criticism, the artist’s role
in the society.
Fall semester. Mr. Kitao.
20. Northern Renaissance Art. A study of the art of France, The Nether­
lands, and Germany from approximately 1325 to 1550. Each time the course
is taught, one area will be selected for special emphasis, for example: manu­
scripts of the 14th century and the International Gothic Style; Jan van Eyck;
Hieronymus Bosch; the development of narrative; Albrecht Diirer; painting of
the early 16th century in The Netherlands; Art and the Reformation.
Fall semester. Mr. Walker.
30. Modem Architecture. An introduction to the nature of architecture and
the functions of the architect through a study of the developments in European
and American building during the late nineteenth and twentieth centuries. The
specific influence of economic, technological and social changes upon design and
structure. Emphasis placed on the study of original examples in the New York
and Philadelphia areas and on the work of such men as Sullivan, Wright,
Gropius, Mies van der Rohe, Saarinen and Le Corbusier.
The prerequisite of Art History 1 is waived for students in Engineering.
Spring semester. Mr. Walker.
31. Modem Painting. Important stylistic developments in European painting
from the French Revolution through Matisse and Picasso: the meanings of the
various movements and their relationship to changing social and political atti­
tudes.
Fall semester. Mr. Rhys.
32. American Art. Architecture, sculpture and painting in North America
from the Colonial Period to the present day, their connection with European art
and their significance as a reflection of American culture.
Fall semester. Mr. Rhys.
84

ART
51. Far Eastern Art. An introduction to the history of pictorial art in Asia,
especially China and Japan, from the earliest phases and origins of pictorial art
in China to new movements in the eighteenth and nineteenth centuries. Iconogra­
phy, stylistic definition and the treatment of form, color and space as they differ
from such concerns in Western art will receive special attention.
Spring semester. Not offered in 1971-72. Mr. Rhys.
55. The Cinema. An introduction to the study of the cinema as art; a his­
torical survey, examination of techniques, theories, critical methods, and special
topics, varying from year to year.
Spring semester. Mr. Kitao.
56. The City. A study of visual and physical aspects of our man-made en­
vironment—our experiences and use of it, its effect on us, and the nature of its
growth and design. It involves perception, analysis, and interpretation of the
form, structure, imagery, and dynamics of selected historical and contemporary
examples.
Fall semester. Mr. Kitao.
57. Renaissance Tradition in American Cities. A study of the elements of
Renaissance and Baroque architecture and planning as they are found in their
pristine form in Italy and as they persist in American cities today, especially
in Philadelphia and Washington, D.C. Consideration will be given to the prob­
lems of conservation and urban development.
Spring semester. Not offered in 1971-72. Mr. Kitao.
58. Special Topics in Renaissance-Baroque Art. A selected topic from Euro­
pean art of the period 1400-1750, which varies from year to year according to
the interest of the students: e.g., a particular artist (Leonardo, Michelangelo,
Bernini, Rembrandt) and his artistic context, a particular category of objects
(statuary, public monuments), a particular theme (Landscape, papal Rome,
Art and Science).
Fall semester. Not offered in 1971-72. Mr. Kitao.
60. Senior Reading.
Spring semester. Staff
61-62. Senior Thesis. With the approval of the department a thesis may be
written during the senior year.
Fall and spring semester. Staff.
65-66. Colloquium. Subject to be determined.
Spring semester. Not offered in 1971-72. Mr. Williams.
71. Introduction to Studio Arts. A six-hour studio course meeting twice a
week with exercises in the visual description of objects and ideas. Attention will
be given both to the theoretical aspects of the work and to the development of
studio techniques.
Each semester. Staff.
72. Color. An investigation of color. Through work with colored papers the
student will explore relationships and the possibilities of creating form through
color. Recommended for painting students.
Each semester. Not offered in 1971-71. Mrs. Baguskas.
85

ART
73. Drawing. Three-hour studio course. The student will be expected to fulfill
drawing assignments in addition to work in the class. Introduction to the prob­
lems of drawing and to the various drawing media. Emphasis on drawing from
the nude figure.
Each semester. Mr. Mikolas.
74. An Introduction to Sculpture. Six-hour studio course. An introduction
and approach to the discovery, exploration and practical use of three dimensional
form. A course that will allow the student to work directly with some of the basic
concepts, forms and materials used in producing sculpture through the use of
models and other creative means.
Each semester. Mr. Mikolas.
77. Painting.
Each semester.

Mr. Dominguez.

78. Graphics. The student will explore the possibilities of image making
through the processes of print making.
Spring semester. Mr. Dominguez.
79. Ceramics. A six-hour, advanced course. Concentration on individual
projects, with the emphasis on form and glazing. Instruction in kiln operation.
Permission of the department required.
Each semester. Mrs. Snyder.
Pottery. Beginning course. An introduction to the techniques of forming
stoneware pottery. Instruction in handbuilding, throwing on the potter’s wheel,
and glazing. No credit.
Each semester. Mrs. Snyder.
H

onors

Sem

inars

101. Ancient Art. A study of the development of the forms of art and archi­
tecture as they express the cultural patterns of Ancient Greece from the Bronze
Age through the Hellenistic Age.
Fall semester. Mr. Walker.
103. Medieval Art. The development of the forms of Christian art during the
Middle Ages from the fourth to the thirteenth century.
Fall semester. Mr. Williams.
104. Renaissance-Baroque Art. A study of European art of the period 14001750 the focus varying from year to year between Italian Renaissance Art and
Baroque Art. The following topics will be discussed: humanism in art, art as
problem-solving, scientific methods in art, the idea of canon and perfection in
art, the nature of stylistic changes, historicism, the question of reality and
illusion, commerce and consumption of art, the rise of art criticism, the artist’s
role in the society.
Spring semester. Mr. Kitao.
105. Northern Renaissance Painting. Developments in painting and the
graphic arts during the fifteenth and sixteenth centuries in France, the Nether­
lands and Germany with intensive study of individual masters: Jan van Eyck,
86

ART
Roger van der Weyden, Jean Fouquet, Albrecht Dürer, Jerome Bosch and Pieter
Bruegel.
Fall semester. Mr. Walker.
107. Modem Painting. Important stylistic developments in European painting
from the French Revolution through Matisse and Picasso: the meanings of the
various movements and their relationship to changing social and political atti­
tudes.
Fall semester. Mr. Rhys.
108. Problems in Twentieth Century Art.
Spring semester. Not offered in 1971-72. Mr. Rhys.
109. Master Print Makers. A consideration of certain problems in the history
of the graphic arts. A study of the work of such men as Schongauer, Dürer, Rem­
brandt, Goya, Daumier, Toulouse-Lautrec, and Picasso for the development of
expression in the media of woodcut, engraving, etching, aquatint and lithography.
Students work almost exclusively with originals in the Print Room of the Phila­
delphia Museum and the Lessing J. Rosenwald Collection in Jenkintown.
Spring semester. Mr. Walker.

ASTRONOM Y
PETER VAN D E KAM P, Professor
Chairman and Director o f Sproul Observatory
W U LFF D. HEINTZ, Associate Professor
JO H N L. HERSHEY, Research Associate and Lecturer
SARAH LEE LIPPINCOTT, Research Associate and Lecturer
Astronomy deals with the nature of the universe about us and the methods em­
ployed to discover the laws underlying the observed phenomena. The elementary
courses present the problems in broad outlines and trace the growth of our
knowledge of the facts and development of theories. The advanced courses con­
sider some of these problems in detail. The seminars deal primarily with the
techniques, methods and problems of the Sproul Observatory research program.
The principal instrument of the Sproul Observatory is the twenty-four:inch
visual refractor of thirty-six-foot focal length, used almost exclusively for photog­
raphy. The instrument, recently renovated, has been in operation since 1912 and
provides a valuable and steadily expanding collection of photographs. Measuring
and calculating machines are available for the measurement and reduction of the
photographs. The principal program of the Observatory is an accurate study of
the distances, motions and masses of the nearer stellar systems.
The Sproul Observatory is open to visitors on the second Tuesday night of
each month during the college year—October through May. With clear weather,
visitors'have the opportunity of seeing many celestial objects of various types in
the course of a year. The visiting hours are from 7:00 to 8:30 p.m. in the fall and
winter, but are set later during the spring.

87

ASTRONOM Y
R

eq u irem en ts

and

Reco

m m end a tio ns

Prerequisites for an Astronomy major, in course, are Astronomy 1-2,1-12,11-2,
or 11, 12, advanced courses and seminars (taken as double courses) in Astron­
omy, combined with work in mathematics and physics.
Prerequisites for admission to the Honors program in Astronomy, either as a
major or a minor, are mathematics 11, 12, Astronomy 1-2, 1-12, or 11, 12,
Physics 1-2, and a reading knowledge of French, German or Russian.
1-2. Descriptive Astronomy. These courses provide an introduction to the
methods and results of astronomy. Fundamental notions of physics are studied
as they are needed to provide an adequate scientific basis for the course. Three
class periods each week, practical work to be arranged.
Year course. Staff.
11. Intermediate Astronomy (Astromechanics; Descriptive). Celestial sphere,
celestial navigation. Motions of stars, planets and satellites. Kepler’s laws. New­
ton’s law of gravitation.
The two-body problem, introduction to the three-body problem and perturba­
tions. Orbits.
Survey of solar system. Atoms and radiation. Architecture, composition and
radiation of the sun.
Prerequisites: Mathematics 3,4 or equivalent; Physics 1,2, or equivalent, may
be taken concurrently with consent of instructor.
Fall semester. Mr. Heintz.
12. Intermediate Astronomy (Astrophysics; Galactic Structure). Observa­
tional data; spectrum-luminosity relation. Double stars; mass-luminosity rela­
tion. Unstable stars. Stellar clusters. Interstellar material. Galaxies.
Structure of Milky Way system. Expanding universe; origin, age and evolution
of stars and galaxies.
Prerequisites: Mathematics 3,4, or equivalent; Physics 1,2, or equivalent, may be
taken concurrently with consent of instructor.
Spring semester. Mr. Heintz and Mr. van de Kamp.
53. Double Stars. Visual, spectroscopic, and photometric binaries. Their
observation and orbit computation.
Fall semester. Mr. Heintz.
54. Mathematical Tools of Astronomy. Spherical triangles and apparent
stellar places. Basic theory of errors and correlations. Equations of motion,
perturbations and numerical integration. Theory of radiation and model
atmospheres.
Spring semester. Mr. Heintz.
H

onors

Sem

inars

101. Astrometry. Spherical trigonometry, celestial sphere. Stellar positions
and their changes. Precession, proper motion, parallax and aberration. Solar
motion, galactic rotation. Relation between sphere and plane. Long-focus
photographic astrometry, technique and methods. Analysis of stellar paths for
proper motion and parallax; secular acceleration. Visual binaries; analysis for
88

ASTRONOM Y
mass-ratio; perturbations. Star fields; clusters and multiple stars. Theory of
errors, methods of least squares.
Spring semester. Mr. van de Kamp.
104. Astrophysics. Review of observational material. Atomic spectra. The
gaseous state. Radiation. Continuous spectra of stars. Formation of absorption
lines. Stellar interiors.
Fall semester. Mr. Hershey.
110. Research Project.
Staff.
G

raduate

W

ork

In conformity with the general regulations for work leading to the Master’s
degree (see page 74), this department offers the possibility for graduate work.
Candidates for the Master’s degree will normally take four Honors seminars,
selected from those listed in astronomy, mathematics or physics, in consultation
with the faculty member under whose direction the work is to be done. A
thesis may be substituted for one of the seminars.
Candidates for the Master’s degree must have a good reading knowledge of
two modern languages.
The opportunity exists for pursuing advanced work at the Bartol Research
Foundation, which conducts doctoral programs in astronomy and physics. (See
p. 12).

B IO L O G Y
LA U N CE J. FLEM ISTER, Professor
LU ZERN E G. LIVINGSTON, Professor
N O RM AN A. M EINKOTH, Professor and Chairman
N EA L A. WEBER, Professor
K E N N ETH S. RAWSON, Associate Professori
ROBERT E. SAVAGE, Associate Professor
SANDRA J. GILL, Assistant Professor
JAMES C. HICK M A N , Assistant Professor
JO H N B. JENKINS, JR., Assistant Professori
BARBARA Y. STEWART, Assistant
JEAN D. TOMEZSKO, Assistant
The student may be introduced to the study of biology by taking Biology 1
and Biology 2. Either course may be taken first. Together they offer an
overview of the field of biology. A broad diversity of advanced courses, some
offered on alternate years, affords the student the opportunity of building a
broad biological background while concentrating, if he chooses, in some
Specialized area such as plant biology (botany), animal biology (zoology),
cellular and developmental biology, physiology, genetics and evolution, ecology
or systematics.
^Absent on leave, 1971-72.
tAbsent on leave, spring semester, 1971-72.

89

B IO L O G Y
R

eq u irem en ts

and

Reco

m m en d a tio n s

Students electing a Course major in biology should include the following
supporting subjects in addition to the minimum of eight courses comprising
the major: introductory chemistry, at least one semester of organic chemistry,
and two semesters of college mathematics. These courses should be completed
before the senior year. Introductory physics (Physics 1,2) is strongly recom­
mended, and is prerequisite to some departmental offerings. Further, it should
be noted that medical schools and graduate schools in biology require intro­
ductory physics for admission.
H

onors

W

ork

Requirements for admission to Honors with a major in biology include:
Biology 1 and 2, an advanced course in biology, plus courses in chemistry
and mathematics as cited above, with physics strongly recommended. It should
be noted that certain subjects likely to be chosen as minors in other depart­
ments require a second year of mathematics.
Students planning an Honors minor in biology should note the prerequisites
listed for each Honors offering, and consult with the department chairman.
1. Principles of Biology. An introduction to the study of phenomena funda­
mental to living systems. The emphasis will be at the cellular level and will
include the consideration of cell structure and function, genetics, cell differen­
tiation, organic evolution, and ecology.
Three lectures and one three-hour laboratory per week.
Fall semester. Staff.
2. Organismal Biology. An introduction to the study of whole organisms,
chiefly the higher plants and animals. While basic taxonomy will be included
stress will be placed on adaptive aspects of the morphology and physiology of
organisms, their development, behavior, ecology and evolution.
Three lectures and one three-hour laboratory per week.
Spring semester. Staff.
12. Vertebrate Physiology. A general consideration of the functional process
in animals with emphasis placed on mammals and other vertebrates. The
aspects of adaptation of the animal to environmental stress are treated in such
a way as to serve the individual student’s area of concentration. Two lectures
and one conference per week. This course will not count toward a major in
biology.
Spring semester. Mr. Flemister.
14. Vertebrate Morphology. A consideration of the vertebrate body plan at
the microscopic, developmental and adult gross morphological levels. Areas
stressed in some detail will include the structure and microscopic appearance of
vertebrate tissues and organs, embryonic development of an amphibian through
organogenesis and adult mammalian gross morphology.
Three hours of lecture or discussion and one laboratory period per week.
Prerequisite: Biology 2.
Fall semester. Mr. Meinkoth.
15. Taxonomy of Seed Plants. An introduction to the classification of
flowering plants and gymnosperms and its underlying theory and methods.
Emphasis is upon biologically, culturally, and economically important aspects
of the world flora, with special reference to native spring plants. Recent ad­
vances in bio-systematics, plant speciation, biochemical and numerical taxon­
omy, phylogeny, and biogeography are included. Suggested as an early course
90

B IO L O G Y
for biology majors and as a cultural course for non-majors. Three lectures and
one field trip and/or laboratory per week.
Prerequisite: Biology 2 or consent of instructor.
Spring semester. Mr. Hickman.
16. Developmental Plant Anatomy. The fundamentals of anatomy of seed
plants approached from a developmental standpoint. The structure and be­
havior of meristems, problems and processes of differentiation, and a detailed
analysis of cellular, tissue and organ structure in higher plants.
Three lectures and one three-hour laboratory period per week.
Prerequisite: Biology 1,2.
Alternate years, fall semester. Not offered in 1971-1972. Mr. Livingston.
18. Biology of Lower Plants. An introduction to the algae, fungi, mosses,
and ferns, including aspects of their classification, phylogeny, structure,
physiology, and ecology. The laboratories are in* part exploratory and experi­
mental. Their content depends in part upon the current interests of staff and
students.
Three lectures and one field trip and/or laboratory period per week.
Prerequisite: Biology 1,2.
Alternate years, fall semester. Mr. Livingston.
20. Biology of the Gene. The course will deal with three basic areas: The
discovery, structure, and replication of the genetic material; the transmission of
the genetic material; and the mode of action of the genetic material, including
a consideration of development genetics. Some time will be devoted to the his­
torical development of genetic concepts. Areas of genetics not covered in this
course (i.e., population genetics, quantitative inheritance, etc.) will be treated in
Biology 22.
Three lectures per week and a laboratory or library project.
Prerequisites: Biology 1 and 2, or consent of the instructor.
Recommended: Organic chemistry.
Fall semester. Mr. Jenkins.
21. Cell Biology. A study of the ultrasructure and function of cell com­
ponents, including cell division and development, biosynthesis of macro-mole­
cules, and intermediary metabolism. Laboratory exercises are designed to illus­
trate the variety of approaches to findings in cell biology.
Prerequisites: Biology 1, and concurrent registration in organic chemistry.
Spring semester. Mr. Savage.
22. Organic Evolution. An introduction to the history of evolutionary
thought; an analysis of genetic mechanisms as they apply to the problem of
speciation, and a consideration of selected evolutionary pathways and the
evidence which supports them.
Two lectures and one discussion session per week.
Prerequisites: Biology 1 and 2.
Spring semester. Not offered in 1971-1972. Mr. Jenkins.
25. Field Zoology. Emphasis is on the living animals as they occur in
nature, their systematics, relationships to the environment, habits and distribu­
tion. Regional and world faunas will be discussed. Much of the work will be
done in the field.
Prerequisites: Biology 2, Biology 14 desirable.
Spring sem ester. Mr. Weber.

91

B IO L O G Y
30. Topics in Genetic Research. A laboratory course designed to acquaint
the student with some of the more sophisticated techiques and approaches to
modern genetic analysis. The emphasis will be on various types of viruses,
bacteria and drosophila.
One afternoon per week of literature discussion and research.
Prerequisites: Biology 20 and consent of instructor. Enrollment limited.
Fall semester. Mr. Jenkins.
40. Man and Environment. Consideration is given to the methodology
of ecological analysis and its application to the study of the causes and con­
sequences of the growth of technology and human populations, especially in
relation to the question of environmental deterioration. An attempt is made
to synthesize approaches and information from various disciplines within the
social and natural sciences. (Also listed as Sociology-Anthropology 40.)
Prerequisites: Completion of distrbution requirements in Groups 1 (Natural
Sciences and Engineering) and 4 (Social Sciences).
Spring semester. Mr. Hickman and Mr. Mitchell.
52. Developmental Biology. A study of animal morphogenesis, with em­
phasis on vertebrate development. Lectures will consider the relationship of
the embryo to its environment, the storage, partitioning, and expression of
information during early development, the process of specializations and inter­
actions of cells to form organs and tissues, and selected topics of postembryonic
development. The laboratory will be devoted to the developmental anatomy
of selected vertebrates, and the observation of living vertebrate and invertebrate
material under normal and experimental conditions.
Three lectures and one laboratory per week.
Prerequisites: Biology 1,2,14. Chemistry 28 recommended.
Spring semester. Ms. Gill.
53. The Social Insects. A study of the social insects, their evolution of the
social habit, colonies, populations, ecological relationships, behavior and
methods of communication. A laboratory created for living tropical fungus­
growing ant colonies will be used.
Fall semester, Mr. Weber.
54. Biology of Parasitism. A consideration of parasitology with reference to
evolution and adaptation to the parasitic habit. Surveys are made of parasites in
native animals. Classification, life cycles and epidemiology are reviewed.
Alternate years, spring semester. Not offered in 1971-1972. Mr. Meinkoth.
56. Invertebrate Zoology. A course designed to acquaint the student with
the fundamental morphology, classification, phylogeny and special problems of
the invertebrate phyla.
Three lectures and one laboratory period per week. Occasional field trips.
Spring semester. Mr. Meinkoth.
57. Comparative Physiology. A course of lectures and laboratory experi­
ments treating functional processes from the standpoint of adaptation of the
animal to its environment. These processes in representative animals are com­
pared in order to follow their elaboration from the more general to the more
specialized.
Two lectures and one laboratory period per week.
Prerequisites: Biology 14, organic chemistry and physics.
F a ll sem ester. Mr. Flemister.
92

B IO L O G Y
58. Physiological Ecology. A course of lectures, discussions and experi­
ments concerning the physiological adaptations of representative animals to
environmental stress. Requirements and availability of optimum conditions
of temperature, oxygen, food-stuffs and the maintenance of ionic independence
are appraised.
Two lectures and two laboratory periods per week.
Prerequisite: Biology 57.
Spring semester. Mr. Flemister.
59. Cytology. A consideration of the nucleus in regard to its structure and
activities and to its interaction with cytoplasm, including investigations of
nuclear ultrastructure, replication of chromosomal constituents, cell division,
biosynthesis of nucleic acids and proteins, the role of the nucleus and chromo­
somes in cell development. Laboratory experiments are designed to illustrate
the variety of approaches to findings in cytology.
Three lectures and one laboratory per week.
Prerequisites: Biology 1 and organic chemistry.
Fall semester. Not offered in 1971-1972. Mr. Savage.
60. Biology of Animal Communities. The study of animals at the emergent
level of populations. Problems of animal behavior as related to the growth and
maintenance of populations will be considered with particular reference to
communication and social interaction within animal groups. Both field and
laboratory study techniques will be used.
Two lectures per week and the equivalent of one laboratory meeting per week.
Prerequisite: Biology 2.
Fall semester. Not offered in 1971-1972. Mr. Rawson.
65. Directed Reading. With the permission of a staff member who is willing
to supervise it a qualified student may undertake a program of directed reading
in an area of biology not included in the curriculum, or as an extension of one
of his courses.
Fall or spring semester. Staff.
67. Plant Physiology. An integrated study of the physiological processes of
higher plants, including general cellular physiology, water relations, mineral
nutrition, enzyme action, photosynthesis, metabolic processes, translocation, the
physiology of growth and development, and related topics.
Two lectures, one discussion period, and one laboratory period per week.
Prerequisites: Biology 1,2 and organic chemistry.
Alternate years, spring semester. Mr. Livingston.
68. Biology of Bacteria. An approach to the study of bacteriology with
principal emphasis on the consideration of bacteria as organisms rather than as
causative agents of disease, etc. The morphology, physiology and biochemistry,
ecology, genetics, and classification of bacteria.
Three lectures and one laboratory period per week.
Prerequisites: Biology 1 and organic chemistry.
Spring semester. Not offered in 1971-1972. Mr. Livingston.
70. Plant Ecology. A study of the response of plant individuals and com­
munities to environmental factors and the influence of plants upon their own
environments and those of selected other organisms. The physical nature of
the ecosystem is developed, with reference to the role of plants in energy flow,
material cycles, and soil formation. Divergent concepts of niche, community,
93

B IO L O G Y
and biotic diversity are discussed, as are world patterns of vegetation and
productivity. Laboratory work emphasizes the collection, analysis, and inter­
pretation of field data.
Three lectures and one field trip or laboratory period per week.
Prerequisites: Biology 2 and permission of the instructor.
Recommended: Biology 15.
Fall semester. Mr. Hickman.
71,72. Special Topics. With the permission of the department, qualified
students may elect to pursue a research program not included in the regular
Course program.
Staff.
H

onors

Sem inars

102. Cytology. A study of the structure and function of the cell. Living
material will be examined and modem microscopical techniques employed in
the laboratory.
Spring semester. Mr. Savage.
103. Analysis of Development. Discussions will be devoted to the nature
of the developmental process, and analyses of selected problems of differentia­
tion and morphogenesis. Laboratories will include a survey of vertebrate
developmental anatomy, an introduction to experimental analysis of developing
systems, and individual student projects.
Prerequisites: Biology 1,2; 14 or 16. Biology 20 and Chemistry 28 recom­
mended.
Fall semester. Ms. Gill.
104. Comparative Physiology. An intensive consideration of the physical and
chemical phenomena underlying the function of animals. A comparative ap­
proach is maitained in order to consider the progression from more general to
the most specialized adjustments, acclimatizations and adaptations of animals
to physical, chemical and biological stresses in the environment. The terminal
portion of the laboratory program is devoted to the pursuit of original, inde­
pendent work by the student.
Prerequisites: Biology 14, organic chemistry and physics.
Fall semester. Mr. Flemister.
106. The Social Insects. Seminar treatment of course 53. Selected topics in
the evolution, ecological relationships, behavior and methods of communi­
cation in social insects. Current research will be considered and an opportunity
to study living colonies of ants will be afforded.
Fall semester. Mr. Weber.
107. Invertebrate Zoology. A study of the morphology, taxonomy, natural
history, distribution and adaptation of invertebrate phyla with a special em­
phasis on evolutionary trends, ecological relations, and problems peculiar to
each group.
Alternate years, fall semester. Not offered in 1971-1972. Mr. Meinkoth.
108. Physiological Basis for Animal Behavior. Quantitative description and
analysis of animal behavior and the sensory processes used in communication
and orientation. Field and laboratory experience will illustrate the seminar
topics. Specific problems will serve as a basis for subsequent seminar discus-

94

BIOLOGY
sions. Consequently, in addition to the seminar meetings, a commitment is
expected to a full day of laboratory or field investigation per week, free of
conflicting academic course commitments.
Fall semester. Not offered in 1971-1972. Mr. Rawson.
111. Plant Physiology. An extension of the area covered in course 67, with
particular emphasis on a critical study of original sources, both classical and
current. The seminar discussion is accompanied by a full day of laboratory
work each week.
Prerequisites: Biology 1,2 and organic chemistry.
Alternate years, spring semester. Mr. Livingston.
112. Problems of Plant Growth and Development. A correlated anatomical
and physiological approach to developmental plant anatomy and morphogenesis.
The seminar discussion is accompanied by a full day of laboratory work each
week.
Prerequisites: Biology 1,2 and permission of the instructor.
Alternate years, fall semester. Not offered in 1971-1972. Mr. Livingston.
113. Genetics. An extension of the area covered in course 20, with par­
ticular emphasis on current research in the field of inheritance in all its aspects.
The seminar discussion is accompanied by a full day of laboratory work each
week.
Spring semester. Not offered in 1971-1972. Mr. Jenkins.
118. Plant Ecology. A study of the interrelationships between plants and
their environment. Discussion periods are devoted to the development of basic
principles. Field and laboratory work applies these concepts to specific or­
ganisms and habitants. Laboratory work is used to isolate problems en­
countered in the field. Both higher plants and microorganisms are used as
experimental materials. Comparisons are made between aquatic and terrestrial
habitants.
Prerequisites: Biology 1,2 and permission of the instructor.
Alternate years, fall semester. Mr. Hickman.
120. Special Topics. With the permission of the department, qualified stu­
dents may elect to pursue a research problem not included in the regular
offerings in Honors.
Staff.

BLACK STUDIES
CLEM EN T COTTINGHAM , JR., Director
The purpose of the Black Studies program at Swarthmore College is (1) to
enrich the general education of Swarthmore students; (2) to expose all
interested students to the multiple contributions and culture of black Ameri­
cans; and (3) to inform students participating in the program about the
specific social, political, and economic conditions, past and present, affecting
the development of black communities, particularly in the United States, but
also in the Caribbean and in Africa.
The program first offered a limited number of courses in 1969-70. In
1970-71, the program expanded its offerings with additional courses in Political
Scence, History, Economics and Religion. It is hoped to expand course offer95

BLACK STUDIES
ings in 1971-72 with additions in Music, English, and Sociology-Anthropology.
By taking at least five semester courses in Black Studies students may graduate
with a concentration in this field in addition to their regular major. The
formal course program will be supplemented from time to time through special
colloquia, guest speakers or other presentations of special interest to students
interested in Black Studies.
Economics 26. Social Economics. The extent, consequences, and causes
of poverty and economic insecurity; an appraisal of reforms in social insur­
ance, medical care, public housing, and rural development; the economics of
discrimination and urban ghettos.
Fall semester. Not offered in 1971-1972.
Economics 75. The Black Worker in American Society. This course will
trace the economic status of black workers in this country from the period of
slavery to the present. The relative income position and career patterns of
black workers will be examined in terms of geographical, industrial and occu­
pational changes, and in terms of the economic, political and institutional
influences which have brought about these changes. Relevant policies of union,
management and government will also be reviewed. One major feature of the
course will be independent investigation and research of contemporary em­
ployment problems of black workers.
Spring semester.
Education 17. Problems in Urban Education. This course considers the
problems of schools in big cities, related to topics such as financial support,
community relations, professional staff, curricular innovation, pupil personnel.
A weekly seminar, individual study, and field investigation in the city of
Philadelphia.
Fall semester. Mrs. Brodhead.
English Literature 29. Black Literature. A survey of Afro-American litera­
ture from 1750 to the present. Emphasis will be placed on the modem period,
with special consideration given to the “political” dimension of Afro-American
writing as a problem in criticism.
Fall semester. Mr. Mayers.
History 8: Africa. African history and civilization, with an emphasis on
tropical Africa in modem times.
Fall semester. Mr. Wright.
History 40. Introduction to Afro-American History. An interdisciplinary
survey of the black experience in the United States from 1619 to the present
The major thrust of the course will be to examine black views on politics,
science, education, and philosophy, as well as black perspectives on race
relations.
Fall semester. Mrs. Morgan.
History 41. Topics in Afro-American History. A course of limited enroll­
ment devoted to an investigation into the sources, problems, and methods in­
volved in the study of black history, with special emphasis on folk history.
Spring semester. Mrs. Morgan.
History 42. Topics in African History. Special problems in African history.
Offered as opportunity permits. Limited enrollment. The topic in 1971-72 will
be South Africa, with an emphasis on White-Black relations.
S p rin g se m e s te r. Mr. Wright.
96

BLACK STUDIES
Political Science 10. Urban Sociology and Politics
11. Problems in Urban Housing
12. Problems in Urban Education
(See Department of Political Science for descriptions of these courses.)
Political Science 11. Problems in Community Government. This course will
explore problems of urban political change in Black urban communities as a
problem in community government. The course will focus upon (i) the con­
temporary social and cultural setting of local politics, (ii) the changing struc­
ture of black leadership, the flowering of competing ideological tendencies and
political strategies, (iii) Black urban communities, and (iv) the effects of
deteriorating financial resources upon urban government. A major section
of the course will be devoted to research on urban political problems.
Not offered in 1971-1972. Mr. Cottingham.
Political Science 21. Politics of Africa. The analysis of political processes
in a variety of African states, including a brief examinaton of traditional
systems, the colonial system and the rise of independence movements, and an
analysis of contemporary political patterns.
Spring semester. Mr. Hopkins.
Psychology 45. Group Dynamics. The course will deal with the psychologi­
cal aspects of behavior in groups. Issues such as intimacy, solidarity, group
problem solving, leadership development, splinter-group formation, and phases
of group development will all receive attention. Classroom sessions will focus
on the ongoing behavior within the group itself. Outside reading and papers
will be used to illuminate processes within the group and to raise significant
theoretical problems. (By application only)
Fall semester. Mr. Gergen.
Psychology 48. Intergroup Relations. An examination of factors that create
strife and conflict among persons, and conditions enhancing interpersonal toler­
ance and acceptance. Particular attention will be given to minority groups, race
relations, and communication between individuals of diverse backgrounds.
Fall semester. Not offered 1971-1972. Mr. Peabody.
Religion 15. The Contemporary Black Church in Historical Perspective. An
analysis of the present day Black Church and its relationship to the historical
struggle for liberation of the Black community. This course will examine the
development of the Black Church as it parallels the slave era, reconstruction,
Black Nationalist Movement of the 1920s, Black northern migratory patterns,
and contemporary Black social, political and theological movements. Half
course.
Spring semester. Mr. Bryant.
Sociology 51. Caribbean Society. A review of the attempt to develop gen­
eralizations about the structure of Caribbean society. Theoretical materials
will focus on the historical role of slavery, the nature of plural societies, race,
class, ethnicity, and specific institutions, such as the family, the school, the
church, and the political structure.
Not offered in 1971-1972. Mr. Branson.

97

CH EM ISTR Y
EDW ARD A. FEH N EL, Professor
JAM ES H. HAMMONS, Associate Professor
PETER T. THOM PSON, Associate Professor and
Acting Chairman
TERESA B. FREED M A N , Assistant Professor
JAM ES R. HUTCHISON, Assistant Professor
The aim of the department of chemistry is to provide a sound training in
the fundamental principles and basic techniques of the science rather than to
deal with specialized branches of the subject.
The minimum requirement for a major in chemistry is eight courses in the
department. Majors are strongly advised to include in their programs Chem­
istry 28,29 and 101 (or 51,59), as well as second year of mathematics.
Students are advised that sound preparation for professional work in chem­
istry includes: Chemistry 1,2 (or 11,12); 28,29; 101 (or 51,59); and at least
four additional semesters of chemistry; Physics 1,2 and two years of mathe­
matics; proficency in reading scientific German, Russian or French (preferably
German).
Majors who wish to meet the minimum standards for professional training
of chemists set by the American Chemical Society should consult with their
advisers as to what additional work is required.
To accommodate varying backgrounds in the preparation of incoming stu­
dents the department provides three routes for entrance to its advanced level
program. The normal route is to take Chemistry 1,2, followed by 28,29. Stu­
dents with especially strong pre-college background in mathematics may be
advised to take Chemistry 11,12 followed by 28,29. Still others with espe­
cially strong pre-college chemistry preparation may be advised to begin with
Chemistry 28,29 followed by 11,12.
Students who enter college with advanced training in chemistry are en­
couraged to take a placement examination during freshman orientation week to
determine which college chemistry course they should take.
I, 2. Introduction to Chemistry. A study of the central concepts and basic
principles of chemistry; the interpretation of chemical properties and reactions
through equilibrium constants, oxidation potentials, free energies, thermochem­
istry; the relation of chemical properties to atomic and molecular structure
and to the Periodic Table; rates and mechanisms of chemical reactions.
One laboratory period weekly.
Fall and spring semester. Mr. Hutchison.
II, 12. General Chemistry. The subject matter of this course parallels that
of Chemistry 1,2 but at a more advanced and mathematically oriented level.
The course is intended for students with a strong interest in chemistry, whose
high school preparation has been extensive, especially in mathematics.
Admission to this course is based on consultation with the staff and a placement
examination. Prior or concurrent enrollment in Physics 1,2 is highly desirable.
One laboratory period weekly.
Fall and spring semester. Mr. Thompson and Mrs. Freedman.
98

CHEM ISTRY
28, 29. Organic Chemistry An introduction to the chemistry of the more
important classes of organic compounds, with emphasis on nomenclature,
structure, reactions, and methods of synthesis. Current theoretical concepts of
structure and mechanism are applied throughout the course to the interpreta­
tion of the properties and reactions of a wide variety of organic compounds.
The laboratory work illustrates some of the principles and reactions discussed
in the classroom and provides practical experience in the techniques involved
in synthesizing, isolating, purifying, and characterizing organic compounds.
One laboratory period weekly.
Prerequisite: Chemistry 2 or 12 or permission of the instructor.
Fall and spring semester. Mr. Hammons.
51. Introductory Physical Chemistry. The macroscopic principles of physi­
cal chemistry are introduced with emphasis on thermodynamic principles;
states of matter, chemical equilibria, solutions, electrochemistry, electroanalytical techniques. The use of digital computers in solving chemical prob­
lems is introduced. This course is suitable for biology or pre-medical students
wishing a one semester introduction to physical chemistry.
Prerequisites: Chemistry 2 or 12, a year of college level mathematics including
differential and integral calculus, Physics 1,2.
One laboratory period weekly.
Fall semester.
56. Organic Structure Determination. Classroom and laboratory study of
the principles and techniques involved in the elucidation of the structures of
organic compounds. Emphasis is placed on the correlation of structure and
properties of organic molecules and on the theoretical principles underlying
various chemical and spectroscopic methods of identification and structure
determination.
Prerequisite: Chemistry 28,29.
One laboratory period weekly.
Fall semester. Mr. Fehnel.
57. Analytical Chemistry. Many of the principles and techniques of analytical
chemistry are taught within the context of other courses listed in this section of
the catalogue. Course 57 is intended to provide further, and more advanced, ex­
perience with the theories, techniques and instruments used in analysis.
Prerequisite: Introductory Physical Chemistry 51.
Not offered in 1971-1972.
58. Biological Chemistry. An introduction to the chemistry of living systems,
with emphasis on the relationship of molecular structure and chemical reactivity
to biological function. Consideration will be given to such topics as the organic
chemistry of cellular constituents, certain aspects of intermediary metabolism and
biosynthesis, mechanisms of enzyme action, and the chemical basis of genetics.
Prerequisite: Chemistry 1, 2 or 11, 12 and 28, 29.
Fall semester. Mr. Fehnel.
59. Chemical Dynamics and Structure. A continuation of the physical chem­
ical principles begun in Course 51 with emphasis on microscopic and timedependent properties; kinetic theory of gases, statistical mechanics, chemical
kinetics, elementary quantum chemistry, spectroscopic methods of molecular
structure determination, X-ray crystallography.
Prerequisite: Chemistry 51. Physics and Engineering students may enter 59
without taking 51 provided they have met the prerequisites for 51.
One laboratory period weekly.
Spring semester.

99

CHEM ISTRY
63. Quantum Chemistry. Quantum theory is developed and applied through­
out to a variety of topics including: atomic structure, molecular and atomic
spectroscopy, theories of chemical bonding, and molecular structure determina­
tion. Symmetry and group theoretical arguments are developed and applied ex­
tensively.
Prerequisite: Chemistry 59 and a second year of mathematics including some
linear algebra. Senior physics and engineering students may take Chemistry 63
without 59 provided they have met the prerequisites for 59.
Fall semester.
65. Advanced Inorganic Chemistry. Important principles for the understand­
ing of the chemical behavior of inorganic compounds are discussed. Topics in­
clude: electronic structure of atoms, ionic and covalent bonding, molecular or­
bital theory applied to inorganic compounds, and inorganic reaction mechanisms.
Considerable emphasis is placed on the chemistry of transition metal coordina­
tion compounds through the application of ligand field theory.
Prerequisite: Chemistry 59. Chemistry 63 is highly desirable.
67. Physical Organic Chemistry. Selected topics in organic chemistry, in­
cluding resonance and molecular orbital concepts, physical properties of or­
ganic compounds, stereochemistry, mechanisms of ionic reactions, free radicals,
electrocyclic reactions, photochemistry, and other topics of current interest. A
familiarity with physical chemistry is desirable.
Prerequisite: Chemistry 1, 2 or 11,12 and 28, 29.
Spring semester. Mr. Fehnel.
68. A d v a n c e d Laboratory. Individual projects of the investigative of research
type in which the student has primary responsibility for the design of the
experiment and the solution of the problem. Normally two or three projects
in different areas will be assigned in each semester. This laboratory work is in­
tended to give the student practical experience in the solution of a research
problem, to develop facility in the use of the chemical literature and in the in­
terpretation and communication of experimental results, and to stimulate interest
in current developments in chemical research.
A prerequisite to this course is normally the completion of seven semester
courses in chemistry.
Both semesters. Staff.
69. Special Topics. The course provides an opportunity for qualified ad­
vanced students to undertake original investigations or to make detailed
literature studies of selected topics in the fields of inorganic, organic, analytical,
or physical chemistry. Students who propose to take this course should consult
with the appropriate instructor during the early part of the semester preceding
that in which the work is to be done.
Approximately ten hours of laboratory and/or library work weekly.
Fall and spring semester. Staff.
H

onors

Sem

inars

Before admission to Honors work the chemistry major should complete Chem­
istry 1,2 or 11,12 and 28,29, two years of mathematics including a year of differ­
ential and integral calculus, and Physics 1,2. An Honors program in chemistry
should include Chemistry 56 and 57.
101. Physical Chemistry. The gaseous, liquid, and solid states, solutions,
elementary thermodynamics, chemical equilibria, electrochemistry, the kinetics

100

CHEMISTRY
of chemical reactions, elementary quantum theory and statistical mechanics.
Prerequisites: Second year mathematics and general physics.
One seminar and laboratory weekly.
Spring semester. Mr. Thompson.
106. Physical Organic Chemistry. An intensive study of essentially the same
material covered in course 67. A familiarity with physical chemistry is desir­
able.
Prerequisites: Chemistry 1,2 or 11,12 and 28,29.
108. Valence and Molecular Structure. Quantum theory is developed and ap­
plied throughout to a variety of topics including: atomic structure, molecular and
atomic spectroscopy, theories of chemical bonding, and molecular structure de­
termination. Symmetry and group theoretical arguments are developed and ap­
plied extensively.
Prequisite: Chemistry 101.
Fall semester. Mr. Thompson.
109. Thesis. Honors candidates may write a thesis as preparation for one of
their papers. The thesis topic must be chosen in consultation with some member
of the staff and approved early in the semester preceding the one in which the
work is to be done.

CLA SSICS
H ELEN F. NORTH, Professor and ChairmanX
M ARTIN OSTWALD, Professor and Acting Chairman
JU LIA H A IG GAISSER, Assistant Professor
THOMAS N. M ITCHELL, Assistant ProfessorX
A LDEN A. MOSSHAMMER, Assistant Professor
G ILBERT P. ROSE, Assistant Professor
The Department of Classics offers instruction in the various fields which con­
stitute the study of Greek and Roman culture. Courses numbered from 1 to 20 are
devoted to the Greek and Latin languages and literatures. Courses numbered
from 31 onwards presuppose no knowledge of the Greek or Latin languages and
are open (except for 42 and 44) without prerequisite to all students; they deal
with the history, mythology, religion, archaeology, and other aspects of the
ancient world and include the study of classical literature in translation
Swarthmore College contributes to the American Academy in Rome and the
American School of Classical Studies in Athens, and its students have the privi­
leges accorded to undergraduates from contributing institutions (use of the
library at both schools and consultation with the staff). Swarthmore is also one
of the institutions sponsoring the Intercollegiate Center for Classical Studies in
Rome, which provides facilities for the study of Classics, Archaeology and
Ancient History. Classics majors, recommended by the Department, are eligible
to study at the Center, usually during their junior year, either for one semester or
for two.
ÎAbsent on leave, 1971-72.

101

CLASSICS
R

eq u irem en ts

and

Reco

m m end a tio ns

Greek, Latin, or Ancient History may be offered as a major subject either in
Course or in Honors, and as a minor subject in Honors.
A major in Greek or Latin in Honors or in Course should complete during
the first two years either Intermediate Greek or Intermediate Latin.
In Honors, a major in Greek is also expected to study Latin through the
intermediate level and a major in Latin is expected to study Greek through the
intermediate level before graduation.
Minor students in Honors should complete during the first two years either
Intermediate Greek or Intermediate Latin.
Majors in both Honors and Course are strongly advised to take for at least
one semester a course in prose composition (Greek 9,10 or Latin 9,10).
In the Honors program, three or four papers constitute a major in Greek
or in Latin. Normally all but one of these will be prepared for by seminars.
Either Directed Reading in a field in which a seminar is not given (courses
17,18), a thesis, or a course supplemented by additional independent work
(i.e., an “attachment”) may be used to prepare for the remaining paper. A
minimum of two papers constitutes a minor in Greek or in Latin, at least one
of which must be prepared for by a seminar.
A major in Ancient History will consist of (1) Classics 42, with attachments,
(2) Classics 44, with attachments, and (3) either or both of the following:
Greek 113, Latin 102. The prerequisites for Classics 42 and 44 are Classics 31
and 32. For Greek 113 the prerequisite is one year of Intermediate Greek, for
Latin 102, one year of Intermediate Latin.
A minor in Ancient History will consist of (1) and (2) above, with the
specified prerequisites.
Majors in Latin in Course or Honors are eligible for certification as secondary
school teachers in Pennsylvania, provided that they include in their programs
a course in Roman history and either Classics 35 or Classics 36.

Greek
1-2. Elementary Greek. The essentials of Greek grammar are covered and
selections from masterpieces of Greek literature are read.
Year course. Mr. Ostwald.
9, 10. Greek Prose Composition. Course meets one hour a week. A require­
ment for majors, this course is recommended in conjunction with courses at the
intermediate level or above, to provide the student with grammatical and stylistic
exercise.
Half course, each semester. Staff.
11, 12. Intermediate Greek. Plato’s Apology, a play of Euripides, and selec­
tions from Homer are read.
Mr. Rose.
13, 14. Greek Prose Authors. The works read are determined by the interests
and needs of the members of the class. These readings are supplemented by a sur­
vey of the history of Greek Literature. Credit is given for each semester.
Miss North.
15, 16. Greek Poets. The works read are determined by the interests and
needs of the members of the class. Credit is given for each semester. The course
is offered only when required.
Mrs. Gaisser.

102

CLASSICS
17, 18. Directed Reading. A program of independent work under the super­
vision of the instructor. It is open only to advanced students and may be taken
only with the consent of the departmental chairman.
Staff.
19. Comparative Grammar of Greek and Latin. A study of the morphology,
phonology, and inflection of Greek and Latin words derived from Indo-Euro­
pean. Students are expected to have the equivalent of at least two college years
of one language and one college year of the other. No prior experience in linguis­
tics is assumed.
Fall semester. Not offered in 1971-72. Mr. Rose.
20. Special Topics. Readings selected to fit the needs of individual seniors in
preparation for their comprehensive examinations.
Staff.

Latin
1-2. Elementary Latin. An intensive course in the essentials of Latin grammar
aiming to provide sufficient knowledge of the language to make possible the
study and appreciation of Latin literature.
Study of the language is combined with a weekly meeting in which students are
introduced to a wide range of topics related to the study of Latin. These include
such subjects as Roman art, archaeology, palaeography, religion, and (in transla­
tion) masterpieces of Latin literature. These meetings will normally be conducted
by specialists from the Swarthmore faculty and from neighboring colleges.
The course will have four one-hour meetings each week, for the study of the
language, and one two-hour meeting each week for lecture and discussion. It
carries one and one-half course credits each semester.
Year course. Mr. Rose.
3. Intermediate Latin: Catullus. A study of the lyric, elegiac, and hexameter
poetry of Catullus. This course follows Latin 2 and is open to those with two
or three years of high school Latin.
Fall semester. Mrs. Gaisser.
4. Intermediate Latin: Cicero. An Oration and Selected Letters. This course
is designed to introduce students to a great historical and literary figure of the
Roman Republic. It combines a study of his major political and literary
achievements with a careful analysis of his prose style.
Spring semester. Mrs. Gaisser.
9, 10. Latin Prose Composition. The development of Latin prose style is
studied, with an analysis of Latin texts and extensive translation of English into
Latin. A requirement for majors, it is recommended in conjunction with Latin 3
and Latin 4. The course meets one hour a week.
Half course, each semester. Staff.
11. Introduction to Latin Literature. A study of Roman Comedy. This course
is normally open to students who have had four or more years of high school
Latin. Students admitted with fewer than four years of Latin are required to
take Latin 9 in conjunction with this course.
Fall semester. Mr. Mosshammer.

103

CLASSICS
12. Horace. A study of the Odes of Horace. This course is normally open to
students who have had four or more years of high school Latin. Students ad­
mitted with less than four years of high school Latin are required to take Latin
10 in conjunction with this course.
Spring semester. Staff.
13. Mediaeval Latin. Works chosen from the principal types of mediaeval
Latin literature (including religious and secular poetry, history and chronicles,
saints’ lives, satire, philosophy, and romances) are studied in this course.
Fall semester. Mrs. Gaisser.
17,18. Directed Reading. A program of independent work under the super­
vision of the instructor. It is open only to advanced students and may be taken
only with the consent of the departmental chairman.
Staff.
20. Special Topics. Readings selected to fit the needs of individual seniors in
preparation for their comprehensive examinations.
Staff.

Ancient History and Civilization
31. History of Greece. The course is devoted to the study of the political and
social history of the Greek states to the time of the Hellenistic kingdoms. This is
preceded by a brief survey of the Oriental civilizations by which the Greeks
were influenced. Special attention is given to the 6th and 5th centuries B. C.
Considerable reading is done in the primary sources in translation. Classics 31
meets the distribution requirement for Group 3; it counts towards a major
in History.
Fall semester. Mr. Mosshammer.
32. The Roman Republic. A study of the Roman world in the period 300-44
B.C. Four major subjects will be dealt with in detail: (1) The evolution of the
Republican constitution, (2) Rome’s wars of expansion and the acquisition of her
empire, (3) The Roman Revolution, and (4) The cultural background.
Students will be required to read the pertinent original sources in translation, as
well as a selection of modem viewpoints. Students’ reports and discussion will
accompany the lectures. There is no prerequisite. Classics 32 meets the distribu­
tion requirement for Group 3; it counts towards a major in History.
Spring semester. Mr. Mosshammer.
33. Greek Literature in Translation. In 1971-72 this course will focus on
Ancient Epic Poetry. Reading will include Homer’s Iliad and Odyssey, Virgil’s
Aeneid, and Ovid’s Metamorphoses. The primary goal will be to analyze each
poem on its own merits, but in addition some attention will be given to the de­
velopment of the epic genre and to the links between Homeric and Augustan
poetry (for example, Apollonius, Lucretius, Catullus). Differences between oral
and written epic poetry will be studied.
Fall semester. Mr. Rose.
34. Colloquium on the Ancient Theatre. All extant examples of Greek and
Roman drama (both tragedy and comedy) will be read in translation, and there
will be a study of ancient dramatic production and the physical remains of Greek
and Roman theatres. There is no prerequisite, but preference will be given to
students who have had some previous acquaintance with dramatic literature, or
have taken Classics 33 or 35.
Spring semester. Mr. Ostwald.

104

CLASSICS
35. Latin Literature in Translation—Classical and Mediaeval. The works
studied in this course range in time from the age of the Roman Republic to the
twelfth century after Christ. They include the major authors of the classical
period, St. Jerome and St. Augustine from the Latin Fathers, and from the Middle
Ages Boethius, Prudentius, the chief figures of the Carolingian Renaissance, and
the writers of Mediaeval Latin hymns and secular poetry.
The course is given in alternate years.
Fall semester. Not offered in 1971-72. Miss North.
36. Classical Mythology in Literature and Art. The course is designed to give
familiarity with those myths and legends that have served as material for writers
and artists from ancient times to the present. The principal works studied are
Homer’s Odyssey, Hesiod’s Theogony, selected Greek tragedies, Virgil’s Aeneid,
the Metamorphoses of Ovid, and Dante’s Commedia. A study is made of the way
in which mythological themes have been handled in painting and sculpture at
various periods, and topics for papers provide an opportunity for the study of the
treatment of mythology by writers from the Renaissance to modern times.
The course is normally given in alternate years.
Spring semester. Not offered in 1971-72. Miss North.
42. Greece in the Fifth Century B.C. An intensive study, chiefly on the basis
of primary sources, of Athens and the Greek world from the reforms of Cleisthenes to the end of the Peloponnesian War. Special emphasis is placed on the
political, social, and economic institutions of the Athenian democracy and on
the problems of the Delian League, both internal and in its relation to the Greek
and non-Greek world. Classics 42 counts towards a major in History.
The course is normally given in alternate years.
Prerequisite: Classics 31 or its equivalent.
Fall semester. Mr. Mosshammer.
44. The Roman Empire. This course treats in detail the political, economic,
social, and cultural history of the Roman world from the death of Julius Caesar
to the death of Marcus Aurelius in A.D. 180. Special attention is given to Octavian’s rise to power, the transformation of the republican constitution into an
autocracy, and the impact of this change on the administration of the empire, on
the structure of Roman society, and on literary and artistic movements. Classics
44 counts towards a major in History.
The course is normally given in alternate years.
Prerequisite: Classics 32 or its equivalent.
Spring semester. Mr. Mosshammer.
H

onors

Sem

inars

102. Roman Historians. This seminar combines a survey of Latin historical
writing to the end of the Silver Age with intensive study of selected books of
Livy and Tacitus, both as examples of Roman historiography and as sources for
Roman history.
Spring semester. Mr. Mitchell.
103. Latin Epic. This seminar traces the development of Roman epic poetry,
with particular emphasis on the De Rerum Natura of Lucretius and the Aeneid of
Virgil. Some attention is also given to early Roman epic, as represented by the
Armales of Ennius, and to the later epic, typified by Lucan’s Pharsalia.
Spring semester. Staff.
105

CLASSICS
104. Roman Satire. A study of the Satires and Epistles of Horace and of the
Satires of Juvenal is supplemented by a general survey of the development of
Roman satire.
Fall semester. Mr. Mitchell.
105. Cicero. A study of the political and forensic speeches of Cicero and of his
personal correspondence as sources for the political and constitutional history of
the final years of the Roman Republic. Attention is also paid to Ciceronian prose
style as exemplified in his letters and orations.
Fall semester. Mr. Mitchell.
111. Greek Philosophers. This seminar is devoted mainly to the study of
Plato, which is supplemented by study of the pre-Socratic philosophers and of
Aristotle and the Hellenistic schools. The orientation of the seminar is primarily
philosophical, although the literary merits of the Greek philosophers receive con­
sideration.
Fall semester. Mr. Ostwald.
112. Greek Epic. The study of Homer’s Iliad or Odyssey constitutes the chief
work of this seminar. Some attention is also paid to Hesiod’s Theogony and to
the Argonautica of Apollonius of Rhodes.
Spring semester. Miss North.
113. Greek Historians. This seminar is devoted to a study of Herodotus and
Thucydides, both as examples of Greek historiography and as sources of Greek
history.
Fall semester. Mr. Ostwald.
114. Greek Drama. The whole body of extant Greek tragedies and comedies
is studied, with a careful reading in the original language of one play by each of
the major dramatists.
Spring semester. Mr. Rose.

EC O N O M IC S
EDW ARD K. CRATSLEY, Professor
FR A N K C. PIERSON, Professor and Chairman
ROBINSON J. HOLLISTER, JR., Associate Professor
(part time)
H ELEN M. H U N TER, Associate Professor (part time)
VAN DOORN OOMS, Associate Professort
HOW ARD PACK, Associate Professor
FR ED ER IC L. PRYOR, Associate Professor
BERNARD SAFFRAN, Associate Professort
W ILLIAM J. STULL, Assistant Professor
LEWIS R. GATY, Lecturer
The courses in economics are designed: first, to acquaint the student with the
institutions and processes through which the business of producing, exchanging,
and distributing goods and services is organized and carried on; second, to train
him in the methods by which these institutions and processes may be analyzed;
$Absent on leave, 1971-72.

106

ECONOMICS
and third, to enable him to arrive at informed judgments concerning relevant
issues of public policy.
Course 1-2A is prerequisite to all other work in the department except courses
3 and 4. Students intending to major in economics are advised to take Political
Science 1 (Elements of Politics) and Economics 4 (Statistics). While not essen­
tial, college-level mathematics would also be helpful. Students intending to do
graduate work in economics should also take Mathematics 5,6,11, and, if possi­
ble, 22. Majors in Course are required to take courses 20 and 21, and course 59
in the senior year. Majors in Honors are advised to take seminars 103 and either
101 or 102. Students intending advanced work in business finance, money and
banking, public finance, or public regulation, and those intending to go to law
school or business school, will find Economics 3 (Accounting) helpful.
1-2A. Introduction to Economics. This course, which is lt/J semesters in
length, is designed both to afford the general student a comprehensive survey and
to provide students doing further work with a foundation on which to build. It
describes the organization of the economic system and analyzes the allocation of
resources, the distribution of income, the maintenance of economic stability, and
international economic relations. On completing the course, students will have
the option of joining seminars in Economics 2B for one half course credit during
the last half of the semester.
Staff.
2B. Contemporary Issues in Economics. This course, which is one-half semes­
ter in length, is normally taken by students immediately after completion of
Economics 1-2A. Each student may elect to join a seminar which meets weekly
for intensive investigation, through reading, written reports and discussion, of a
contemporary economic topic or problem. Recent topics covered by these semi­
nars have included Issues in Urban Economics; Macroeconomic Models and
Computer Simulation; Bonds, Stocks, and the Money Game; Marxism; Experi­
mentation in Social Research; Environmental Economics; and Experiments in
Socialism.
3. Accounting. The purpose of this course is to equip the student with the
rudiments of accounting that he will need to employ in his advanced work in
business finance, banking, taxation, and public regulation.
Spring semester. Mr. Cratsley.
4. Statistics. The course is designed to make the student a critical user of
statistics. Topics covered include frequency distributions, sampling, correlation,
economic time series, and an introduction to econometric analysis. Students
acquire some familiarity with the IBM computer.
Fail semester. Mrs. Hunter.
11. Economic Development. Requisites for the economic development of
underdeveloped countries. Obstacles to development. Strategy and tactics of
development. Aid for development.
Spring semester. Mr. Pack.
20. Economic Theory. Determination of prices in theory and in practice.
Distribution of income. Economic welfare aspects of various market structures.
Fall semester. Mr. Gaty.
21. Money and Banking. Organization and operation of commercial banking
in the United States. Central banking, the Federal Reserve system. Macroeconomic and monetary theory. Monetary policy.
Spring semester. Mrs. Hunter.

ECONOM ICS
22. Public Finance. Social goals and fiscal institutions, Federal, state, and
local, including analysis of public expenditures, taxation, the national debt,
fiscal federalism, and current fiscal policy.
Fall semester. Mr. Pack.
23. Econometrics. A six-week survey of the theory of multiple regression and
the problems encountered in using multiple regression in economic analysis.
This will be followed by individual empirical research projects on economic
topics selected by students. Admission by permission of the instructor.
Spring semester. Mrs. Hunter.
24. Business Finance. Analysis of private financial instruments, markets, and
institutions, and public regulation of financial practices.
Fall semester. Not offered in 1971-72. Mr. Gaty.
25. Labor Problems. The structure and functions of labor unions. Employer
approaches to labor relations. Analysis of wage policies. Governmental control
of labor relations.
Fall semester. Mr. Pierson.
26. Social Economics. The extent, consequences, and causes of poverty and
economic insecurity; an appraisal of reforms in social insurance, medical care,
public housing, and rural development; the economics of discrimination and
urban ghettos.
Fall semester. Not offered in 1971-72.
27. Managerial Economics. Analysis of business decision-making; economic
theory and management control; market structure, pricing, and output; the
budgetary process and business planning; business behavior and social welfare.
Fall semester. Not offered in 1971-72.
28. Public Control of Business. Maintenance of competition in American
industry; moderation of competition in agriculture, extractive industries, and
distributive trades. Regulation of public utilities, transport, and communica­
tions. Public ownership and operation of industry.
Spring semester. Not offered in 1971-72. Mr. Gaty.
30. International Economics. Theory and practice of international trade.
Balance of payments, foreign exchange, national commercial policies, inter­
national investment, and foreign aid.
Fall semester. Mr. Pryor.
31. Comparative Economic Systems. Analysis of methods by which economic
systems can be compared; case studies of the Soviet Union, Yugoslavia, and
several West European nations.
Fall semester. Mr. Pryor.
41. Urban Economics. The economic structure and development of modern
urban economies. Critical analyses of current urban problems and alternative
policy solutions. Topics covered will include housing, transportation, ghetto
development, urban renewal and local government finance.
Spring semester. Mr. Stull.
45. Psychological Aspects of Economics. Also listed as Psychology 60. A
look at selected topics on the border of psychology and economics. Discussions
and readings will consider certain problems concerning economic motivation,
exchange theory, decision making and rational choice, consumer behavior,

108

ECONOM ICS
and the relationships between the economy and personality. A research paper
will be required. Prerequisites include two semesters of either Economics or
Psychology.
Spring semester. Messrs. Peabody, Pryor and Travers.
47. Marxist Political Economy. Also listed as Political Science 47. A study
of Marxist economics and political theory with particular attention to general
problems of historical materialism. Primary emphasis in the reading is placed
on the works of Marx, Engels, and Lenin; however, some time is also devoted
to the background of Marxist thought as well as the development of Marxist
theory in the present era. Prerequisites include two semesters of either Political
Science or Economics.
Spring semester. Mr. Pryor and Mr. Smith.
59. Economic Stability. National income theory. Analysis of business fluctua­
tions and long-term economic change. Public policies for stabilization and
growth.
Spring semester. Mr. Pierson.
75. The Black Worker in American Society. This course will trace the
economic status of black workers in this country from the period of slavery to
the present. The relative income position and career patterns of black workers
will be examined in terms of geographical, industrial and occupational changes,
and in terms of the economic, political and institutional influences which have
brought about these changes. Relevant policies of union, management and
government will also be reviewed. One major feature of the course will be
independent investigation and research of contemporary employment prob­
lems of black workers.
Enrollment will be limited. Prerequisite: Economics 1.
Spring semester.
H

onors

Sem

inars

101. Finance. Social goals and fiscal institutions, Federal, State, and local,
including analysis of public expenditures, taxation, the national debt, fiscal fed­
eralism, and current fiscal policy. Analysis of private financial instruments,
markets, and institutions, and public regulation of financial practices.
Fall semester. Mr. Pack.
102. Economic Stability and Growth. The theory of cyclical fluctuations and
secular growth. Money and banking. Monetary and fiscal policy. Wage-price pres­
sures and the control of inflation.
Spring semester. Mr. Pierson.
103. Economic Theory. Contemporary theory: price determination, the func­
tional distribution of income, the level of employment. Evaluation of theory in
the light of simplifying assumptions and empirical evidence. The relevance of
theory to socio-economic problems.
Each semester. Mr. Hollister.
104. Public Control of Business. The maintenance of competition in American
industry. The moderation of competition in agriculture, the extractive industries,
and the distributive trades. The regulation of public utilities, transport, and com­
munications. Public ownership and operation of industry.
Spring semester. Not offered in 1971-72. Mr. Gaty.
109

ECONOM ICS
105. International Economics. Theory and practice in international economic
relations. The pure theory of international trade. The balance of payments and
the mechanism of international exchange. Restrictionism and discrimination.
Regionalism. Relations with controlled economies. International investment and
foreign aid.
Fall semester. Not offered in 1971-72. Mr. Ooms.
106. Comparative Economic Systems. Analysis of methods by which economic
systems can be compared; study of resource allocation and growth in socialist,
capitalist, and mixed economies; case studies of the U.S.S.R., Yugoslavia, China,
France, and other nations; examination of special problems in economic plan­
ning.
Fall semester. Mr. Pryor.
107. Labor and Social Economics. The organization of labor. Analysis of wage
policies. Government control of labor relations. Problems stemming from income
inequality and insecurity. Methods of income maintenance. Economic aspects of
education, medical care, public housing. Special topics in urban economics.
Fall semester. Mr. Hollister and Mr. Pierson.
108. Econometrics. Econometric theory and empirical studies. An empirical
research paper is required.
Prerequisites: Mathematics 11 and Economics 103.
Spring semester. Not offered in 1971-72. Mr. Saffran.
109. Economic Development. An examination of the problems of economic
development and growth in low-income countries, with attention to both
historical experience and current issues of development policy. Techniques of
economic planning and instruments of policy will be studied. Emphasis will
be placed upon case studies of individual countries, and each student will
prepare at least one research paper of considerable depth.
Spring semester. Mr. Pack.
110. Urban Economics. This seminar will deal in depth with the economic
structure and development of modem urban economies. Research methods ap­
propriate to the analysis of such economies will be discussed and applied to cur­
rent urban problems. Topics covered will include housing, transportation,
ghetto development, urban renewal, and local government finance.
Spring semester. Mr. Stull.

ED U C A TIO N
JOSEPH B. SHANE, Professor
ALICE K. BRODHEAD, Associate Professor and Director of
Student Teaching
BARBARA Z. PRESSEISEN, Assistant Professor
There is no major in Education. Swarthmore students may qualify for the
Instructional I Certificate for secondary school teachers in Pennsylvania (valid
in several other states) by taking a limited pre-professional sequence together
with a major or appropriate concentration in one or more of the following fields:
Biology, Chemistry, Comprehensive English, Comprehensive Social Studies,
110

EDUCATION
Economics, French, German, History, Latin, Mathematics, Physics and Mathe­
matics, Russian, Sociology, and Spanish. Students are referred to the pertinent
department and to the Program in Education for further information about
teacher certification. Courses in Education are not offered solely for students
seeking certification, but such students should pursue the following program.
Education 14. Introduction to Teaching.
One of the three introductory courses in Psychology:
Social Psychology, Personality, or Experimental Psychology.
Either Education 11, Learning and Evaluation
or Psychology 15, Child Psychology.
Education 16. Practice Teaching.
One additional course concerned with Education from the following:
Education 12. Principles and Methods of Secondary Education.
Education 15. History of Education.
Education 17. Problems in Urban Education.
Sociology and Anthropology 75. Education and Society.
Sociology and Anthropology 63. Psychological Anthropology.
Psychology 15. Child Psychology.
Psychology 45. Group Dynamics.
11. Learning and Evaluation. Topics will include learning theory and class­
room practice, intelligence and ability, test construction and evaluation, and
educational research.
Fall semester. Mrs. Presseisen.
12. Principles and Methods of Secondary Education. A study of the princi­
ples of secondary education, with emphasis upon aims and organization. Visits to
nearby schools are made.
Spring semester. Mr. Shane.
14. Introduction to Teaching. An exploratory course designed to help stu­
dents determine their own interest in preparing to teach as well as to furnish
them with opportunities for learning about elementary and secondary schools.
Current educational theory will be discussed and compared with contemporary
practice.
Each semester. Mrs. Brodhead and Mrs. Presseisen.
15. History of Education. Not offered 1971-72.
16. Practice Teaching. Supervised teaching with appropriate guidance in sub­
ject methods for students who seek teacher certification at the secondary level.
Education 14, Introduction to Teaching, and either Education 11, Learning and
Evaluation or Psychology 15, Child Psychology are prerequisite. Normally
taken for double credit.
Each semester. Mrs. Brodhead and Mrs. Presseisen.
17. Problems in Urban Education. This course considers the problems of
schools in big cities, related to topics such as financial support, community rela­
tions, professional staff, curricular innovation, pupil personnel. A weekly semi­
nar, individual study, and field investigation in the city of Philadelphia.
Fall semester. Mrs. Brodhead.
Spring semester. Mrs. Brodhead and Mr. Cottingham. [See Political Science
12. Students who elect Problems in Urban Education in the spring semester must
take concurrently Urban Sociology and Politics (Political Science 10 or Sociology
and Anthropology 59).]

Ill

EDUCATION
Linguistics 51. Colloquium in Reading. Cognitive, perceptual, visual,
acoustic, and sociological factors related to the problem of reading-acquisition,
as well as broader issues in cognitive theory suggested by the problem of explain­
ing reading skills.
Prerequisites: Linguistics 1 or 38 and permission of the instructor.
Fall semester. Mrs. Gleitman.
Mathematics 9. Mathematics for Teachers. The primary objective of this
course is to provide a mathematical background to topics appearing in elementary
and secondary school curricula. Topics will be chosen from the following areas:
the number systems, measurement (length, area, volume), infinity, elementary
notions in logic, set theory, topology, game theory, probability and statistics.
This course will be useful to students planning to teach mathematics in the
schools.
Spring semester. Mr. diFranco.
Psychology 15. Child Psychology. Cognitive development, the socialization
process, and the influence of childrearing will be emphasized.
Spring semester. Mr. Travers.
Sociology and Anthropology 75. Education and Society. Comparative study
of the functions of schools from the perspectives of sociology and anthropology.
Among the topics to be discussed are the relationship of educational institutions
to other sectors of society, and the question of alternatives to schooling in both
modernizing and “post-industrial” societies.
Fall semester. Mr. Bramson.

EN G IN EER IN G
SAM UEL T. CARPENTER, Professor and Chairman
JO H N D. McCRUM M , Professor
BERNARD M ORRILL, Professort
CARL BARUS, Associate Professor*
DAVID L. BOWLER, Associate Professor
M. JOSEPH WILLIS, Associate Professor
G. STUART PATTERSON, JR., Assistant Professor
VICTOR K. SCHÜTZ, Assistant Professor
MICHAEL S. BAR AD, Lecturer**
The Department of Engineering offers engineering programs directed toward
four principal educational aims: to introduce the student to a body of knowledge
fundamental to all of modern engineering; to provide him with a comprehensive
background in the basic sciences; to allow him maximum flexibility in
electing plans of study to suit individual objectives; to provide him the oppor­
tunity to study in the humanities and social sciences. The overall plan leading
to a degree of Bachelor of Science with the major in engineering is accredited
by the Engineers’ Council for Professional Development.
•Absent on leave, fall semester, 1971-72.
t Absent on leave, 1971-72.
**Fall semester, 1971-72.

112

ENGINEERING
The professional practice of engineering requires skill and resourcefulness in
applying scientific knowledge and methods to the solution of engineering prob­
lems of ever growing technical complexity. In addition, the role of engineers in
our society demands that the engineer recognize and take into account the eco­
nomic and social factors that bear on his technical problems. The successful engi­
neer will therefore possess an understanding of socio-economic forces, an appre­
ciation of the cultural and humanistic aspects of the society in which he lives, and
a sound working knowledge of human relations. Our total program furthers these
objectives by providing the student with a broad technical knowledge, together
with the foundation of a liberal education.
Courses in the Department of Engineering are open to all students who have
the interest and the prerequisite background. Special inquiries may be made
through the chairman of the department. Courses 1, 2, 7, 8 and 56 may be es­
pecially relevant to some student programs.
The use of the College’s computer facilities is central to an engineering educa­
tion at Swarthmore. The Department has developed a number of courses dealing
with computers which would be of interest to students in all departments of the
College. These include an introductory course in Digital Computers, a course in
Special Computer Topics, and a course in Special Topics—Numerical Analysis
for Computers. Additional courses will be offered if the demand warrants.
Educational plans available to engineering students at Swarthmore are as
follows:
(1) Four year course programs with the major in engineering, with elected
concentrations of study in the professional branches of engineering such
as Civil, Electrical, and Mechanical Engineering, and related engineering
areas. (See suggested Elective Plans).
(2) Four year course programs with the major in engineering, with elected
combinations of study in Biology, Chemistry, Economics, Mathematics,
Political Science, etc.
(3) Reading for Honors in Engineering.
(4) Special combinations to meet unusual needs or interests:
(a) A four year program relating engineering with other College areas of
study, or
(b) A five year program leading to both a B.S. degree with a major in
engineering and a B.A. degree.
A candidate for a degree in engineering must meet the general requirements of
the College as well as the requirements of the Department of Engineering. Curicular plans for the first two years must take two objectives into consideration:
(1) courses should provide an adequate background for work in engineering at
the upperclass level, and (2) the satisfying of the general College requirements.
During the second semester of the sophomore year the student, following College
procedure, will apply for a major in engineering. All four-year programs lead to
the degree of Bachelor of Science with the major in engineering.
Course Program
The prerequisities leading to a major in engineering are Engineering 1 and
Engineering 2 in the first year and Engineering 11 and Engineering 12 in the
second year. Prospective engineering majors are strongly urged to enroll in ap­
propriate courses in Chemistry, Physics, and Mathematics. In special cases, stu­
dents with preparation comparable to, but differing from, Engineering 1, 2, and
11 may apply to major in engineering after consultation with the department
chairman.

113

ENGINEERING
The departmental requirements beyond those indicated above for the degree
of Bachelor of Science with a major in engineering fall into two categories: (1)
satisfactory completion of the following courses which are required of all engi­
neering students: Introduction to Fields & Continua, Thermodynamics, and
Structure & Properties of Materials; (2) satisfactory completion of an approved
program of at least four additional advanced engineering courses, normally
elected from those numbered 23 or higher listed under Engineering, Civil Engi­
neering, Electrical Engineering, and/or Mechanical Engineering, with such elec­
tions establishing a major field of interest. In determining the total number of
engineering courses he may take, a student must bear in mind the general Col­
lege requirement that at least twenty courses be taken outside of the major field
of interest.
All programs leading to a Bachelor of Science degree with the major in engi­
neering must be submitted for approval to the Department of Engineering.
Course Advising
Students are advised to make their educational goals known to their advisers
at the earliest possible time. In this way the student can best benefit from the
flexibility provided for course election and provide for a curricular program
specifically oriented to his future educational goals. The plan for upperclass study
in engineering should be formulated during the second semester of the sopho­
more year when the student applies for a major in engineering.
Reading for Honors in Engineering
Students who wish to become candidates for a Bachelor of Science degree in
engineering with Honors should follow the application procedure given on pages
58-60.
A student’s program should include seminars and/or other work in engineer­
ing and, normally, science and mathematics. A student who wishes to concentrate
in civil, electrical, or mechanical engineering may prepare for up to four exam­
ination papers in his chosen area. The other two papers will usually be chosen
from mathematics, science, or (since the Engineering Department comprises the
merged civil, electrical and mechanical departments) a branch of engineering
other than the field of concentration.
Elective Plans in the Course Program
The following suggested plans of study for the last two years are listed to indi­
cate the flexibility of choice open to the student. Other plans may also be arranged
beyond those suggested. At least four elected and approved advanced courses in
engineering must be included in the program of the junior and senior years.
Electives in the humanities, social sciences and life sciences can also contribute,
in many cases, to the central educational aims. A course in Special Topics or a
Thesis is available for meeting special interests or needs.

Suggested Elective Plans
B io -E

n gineering

Engineering courses with ad­
ditional elections in Engi­
neering, Biology, and Chem­
istry.
114

The application of engineering principles
to biological and medical problems. Students
with this interest will normally elect two
semesters of biology and two semesters of

ENGINEERING
organic chemistry, and an appropriate se­
quence of engineering courses. Suggested se­
quences of study in this interdisciplinary field
are available upon request or can be devel­
oped with the assistance of your Engineering
adviser.

C ivil

E

n gin eering

and

General Civil Engineering
Structures
Urban and Regional Plan­
ning
Water Resources

E

lectrical

E

ngin eering

General Electrical Engi­
neering
Electronics and Informa­
tion Processing
Systems and Control
Electric Power and Energy
Conversion
Engineering Physics

E

n gin eering

R

elated

A

reas

The suggested course program in Mechan­
ics of Solids, Structural Mechanics I, Soil
Science, Civil Engineering Design, with a
fifth course chosen from Fluid Mechanics,
Structural Mechanics II, or Soil Engineering.
The sequence provides the prerequisites for
an additional elective sequence in Structures,
Water Resources and Planning, Pre-Architec­
ture, or General Civil Engineering. Plans may
be made for work in Bio-Engineering with an
emphasis on Environmental Control and
Water Resources.
The early planning of electives in Art,
Biology, Economics, Political Science, or So­
ciology, is essential for programs related to
Urban and Regional Planning or Water Re­
sources.

and

R

elated

A

reas

Students who plan to do work in electrical
engineering will normally include the follow­
ing courses in their programs: Circuit The­
ory, Electromagnetic Theory, Electronic Cir­
cuit Theory I (73).
The program should be filled out with
additional courses selected partly from those
numbered 55 and 74 to 80, inclusive, accord­
ing to individual interest. The full program
may emphasize an area of study such as
those listed at the left.

Sc ien ces

A number of feasible pro­
grams may be elected from
Engineering, Mathematics,
Chemistry, Physics, with the
engineering courses dealing
primarily with the theoretical
bodies of knowledge.

A program in Engineering Sciences pro­
vides for diversity and depth in engineering,
combined with mathematics, chemistry, or
physics. It is suitable for those planning to
enter college teaching or engineering research
after graduate study.
115

ENGINEERING
E n gin eering C o m bin ed
O th er C o l l e g e A reas

Bi^ogy
Economics
Mathematics
Political Science
Psychology
Sociology

W

Study

in

An engineering student is required to in­
clude at least four approved engineering
courses beyond the required engineering core.
Fourteen electives, including the six to satisfy
the College distribution requirements, are
available for planning a sequence of study
leading to concentrations or diversity in other
College areas. The areas listed on the left are
not exclusive but they do represent areas in
which engineering students may find a strong
interest and a relationship to future engineer­
ing work.

M echanical E ngi n e e r i n g

General Mechanical Engi­
neering
Applied Mechanics
Thermodynamics and
Energy Conversion
Fluid Mechanics and Heat
Transfer
Engineering Design

ith

and

R elated A reas

Sequences in general mechanical engineer­
ing will normally include, in addition to the
required engineering core, courses in ad­
vanced dynamics, solid mechanics, fluid me­
chanics and heat transfer, and automatic
controls. Courses in thermodynamics, applied
mechanics, fluids, heat transfer, and engineer­
ing design can be used to develop such spe­
cialized sequences as those shown at the left.
Plans may be made for work in bio-engineering with an emphasis on the structure and
function of biological systems.

E ngin eerin g
1. Introduction to Engineering. An introduction to engineering analysis evolv­
ing solution to engineering problems through the use of simple mathematical
models. The body of mathematics necessary for structuring these models is fully
developed within the course. The use of the digital computer is introduced and
several engineering problems are assigned for computer solution. During the last
four or five weeks of the course, the class is broken up into small seminar groups
directed by the engineering faculty and covering various current engineering
topics. The laboratory work introduces graphical concepts and some shop prac­
tice.
Three class periods and a laboratory each week.
Fall semester.
2. Mechanics. Special areas in the field of mechanics are discussed. Ele­
mentary beam theory and theory of torsion constitute the material discussed in
the first half of the course. The latter half concerns itself with problems in
dynamics which are approached from a Lagrangian point of view.
Three class periods and a laboratory each week.
S p r in g se m e s te r.

116

ENGINEERING
7, 8. Principles and Problems of Modern Technology. This course is designed
to meet the needs of non-science majors and fulfills the group I distribution re­
quirements. (See p. 56.) In the first semester, the logic and programming of the
digital computer will be introduced, elementary decision theory will be devel­
oped, and the engineering concepts of optimization, feedback, and information
discussed. In the second semester, special topics illustrative of modern technologi­
cal problems and activity will be developed. Topics will be chosen for their timeli­
ness, interest and importance to both society and technology. Past topics have
been: world communications, environmental engineering, and bio-engineering.
Three class periods and a laboratory every other week.
11. Electrical Science. The subjects to be considered in this course are the
following: the analysis and design of electric circuits; force and energy in electro­
magnetic fields; problems involving static electric and magnetic fields such as,
for example, magnetic circuits and dielectric materials. Students registering for
this course are assumed to be familiar with the basic concepts of electricity and
magnetism.
Three class periods weekly and a laboratory every other week.
Prerequisite: To be preceded or accompanied by Integral Calculus.
Fall semester.
12. Physical Systems Analysis. The study of physical phenomena and systems
which may be represented to a good degree of approximation by a linear model
or a lumped-parameter pictorial model. The formulation of the mathematical
model from basic physical laws and the treatment of the ordinary differential
equations resulting therefrom. Emphasis will be placed upon the unity resulting
from the mathematical representation for many types of physical systems: me­
chanical, electrical, electromechanical, thermal, etc. Techniques of analysis will
include classical solution of differential equations including power series solu­
tions, and also solution by Laplace transform methods. Transient and steady state
response, frequency response, pole-zero concepts, notions of stability, and energy
considerations. The analog computer will be used extensively.
Three class periods and a laboratory every other week.
Prerequisite: Engr. 11, or equivalent.
Spring semester.
23. Digital Computer. An introductory course on general aspects of informa­
tion processors. Topics covered include machine and system organization, lan­
guages (including both assembly language and a problem oriented language),
applications including Monte Carlo methods, non-numeric data processing, and
data banks. There will be extensive use of the College’s computer facilities.
Three class periods each week.
No prerequisites.
Fall semester.
24. Special Computer Topics. Topics covered may include systems program­
ming, compiler construction, or more advanced treatment of topics covered in
Engr. 23.
Three class periods each week.
Prerequisite: A knowledge of “ASSEMBLER” language.
Spring semester.

117

ENGINEERING
30,31. Superproblem in Public Technology. An interdisciplinary group
project examining a particular public-service technology including its associated
environmental and social problems. The project’s goal—-i.e., the “superproblem”
—is to formulate technical, social and regulatory policies likely to educe net
long-term social benefit from the technology in question and minimize social
and environmental harm. Examples of such technologies are transportation,
electric power, communications, housing, waste disposal-recycling, water supply,
and the like.
Credit will be given for a single semester. However, work on a given super­
problem is expected to continue for a full year or more, and students are
encouraged to stay with a project as long as possible. It is hoped that funds
will be available each summer to support a small study group working on the
current project. The course is open to all students.
Fall semester. Not offered in 1971-72.
51. Introduction to Fields and Continua. Analysis of field phenomena in a
variety of continuous media. Fluid-flow, elastic, thermal, electromagnetic, and
other fields are treated with emphasis on their common properties. The partial
differential equations governing time-invariant fields, diffusion, wave motion,
etc., are developed from basic principles. Application is made to realistic engi­
neering situations.
Three class periods and a laboratory each week.
Prerequisite: Engr. 12, or equivalent.
Fall semester.
53. Thermodynamics. Macroscopic concepts of thermodynamics: temperature,
the First Law, thermodynamic properties, reversibility. Statistical inference of
thermodynamics: probability, entropy and equilibrium, the partition function.
Ideal gases. The Second Law of Thermodynamics. Cycles. Maxwell’s Relations.
Three class periods and a laboratory each week.
Fall semester.
55. Systems Theory. Mathematical analysis of an assemblage of interacting
elements comprising a generalized system. Fourier methods and the Laplace
transform. Linear graphing and operators. Root locus theory. State variables, the
system state transition matrix and canonical forms. Linear vector spaces. Prob­
ability and stochastic functions. Response to random inputs. Correlation func­
tions and spectral distribution. Some aspects of socio-economic and urban sys­
tems. The role of the digital computer in systems analysis.
Three class periods each week; conference or laboratory every other week.
Prerequisite: Engr. 12, or equivalent.
56. Operations Research. The principles of operations research as applicable
to defining optimum solutions of engineering and financial problems as an aid to
managerial decision making. Probability and probability distributions, reliability,
random number simulation, queuing theory, linear programming, dynamic pro­
gramming, allocation and transportation theory. The working principles of engi­
neering economy are introduced and combined with operations research topics.
Three class periods each week.
Normally for junior and senior students.
S p r in g se m e s te r.

118

ENGINEERING
61. Structure and Properties of Materials. Response of materials in a bio­
logical, chemical, electrical, mechanical, optical, and thermal environment, in
terms of microscopic fundamentals. Design of self-disintegrating materials.
Emphasis is on the design, modes of thought, techniques, concepts, and problems
of today.
Three class periods each week (fall semester 1971 only).
Three class periods and a laboratory every other week (spring semester 1972 and
thereafter)
Prerequisite: Physical Chemistry (fall semester 1971 only). Permission of in­
structor (spring semester 1972 and thereafter).
Fall semester (1971 only); spring semester thereafter.
91. Special Topics. Subject matter dependent on a group need or individual
interest. Normally restricted to senior students and offered only when staff
interests and availability make it practicable to do so.
92. Thesis. With approval, a student may undertake a thesis project as a part
of his program in the senior year. The student is expected to submit a prospectus
of his thesis problem before the start of the semester in which the thesis project
is carried out.
C ivil

E

n gin eering

59. Mechanics of Solids. This course deals with the internal stresses and
changes of form when forces act on solid bodies. State of stress and strain,
strength theories, stability, deflections, and photoelasticity. Elastic and Plastic
theories.
Three class periods and a laboratory each week.
Prerequisite: Mechanics I, or equivalent.
Fall semester.
62. Structural Mechanics I. Principles of structural systems and advanced
mechanics of deformable bodies pertaining to deflection and stability. Structural
mechanics of space and plane framed structures including stress analysis, in­
fluence lines, and matrix solutions.
Three class periods and a laboratory each week.
Prerequisite: Engr. 59.
Spring semester.
63. Structural Mechanics II. A study of statically indeterminate structural
systems and advanced structural theory. Force and displacement methods with
matrix applications. Digital computer applications.
Three class periods and a laboratory each week.
Prerequisite: Structural Mechanics I.
Fall semester.
64. Soil Science. Using the basic concepts of physical geology as a unifying
framework, the principles of soil mechanics are studied. Subjects introduced
include formation of soils, clay mineralogy, transport and deposition of soils,
soil type identification, consolidation theory, flow through porous media, stresses
in earth masses, and slope stability.
Three class periods and a laboratory each week.
Spring semester.

119

ENGINEERING
65. Civil Engineering Design. An introduction to the design of engineering
structures with emphasis on structural components and structural materials;
design projects involving planning, analysis and synthesis, structural models, and
optimization criteria.
Three class periods and a laboratory each week.
Fall semester.
66. Structural Design. An advanced course in the design of structures dealing
with stability, flat plates, shells, pre-stressed concrete, high strength steels, ulti­
mate design, dynamic force systems, comprehensive design problems, advanced
structural model studies.
Three class periods and a laboratory each week.
Prerequisites: Engr. 59, 62, 63, 65.
Spring semester.
67. Enviromental Engineering. An introduction to the fundamentals of ap­
plied ecology in water resources engineering, with emphasis on pertinent areas of
hydrology, hydraulics, and water quality. Fundamentals are related to stream
quality management and planning for water resources projects. Opportunity for
individual student projects.
Three class periods and a laboratory each week.
Fall semester.
69. Soil Engineering. Advanced principles of soil mechanics with application
to problems in design. Theoretical aspects of seepage, settlement and foundation
stability analysis. The design of retaining walls, foundations, and earth structures
are among the specific topics.
Three class periods and a laboratory each week.
Prerequisite: Engr. 64.

E

lectrica l

E

n gin eering

71. Circuit Theory. Transient and steady-state analysis of electric circuits and
networks with emphasis on state variable as well as classical methods and
s-plane interpretation. Network topology, equilibrium equations, theorems,
network functions and their properties. Energy in electric networks. Matrix
formulation for the systematic representation of generalized networks for com­
puter analysis. Linear, nonlinear, time varying and time-invariant cases.
Three class periods and a laboratory each week.
Prerequisites: Engr. 12, or Physics 12.
Fall semester.
72. Electromagnetic Theory. Application of Maxwell’s equations. Macroscopic
field treatment of magnetic, dielectric and conducting bodies. Forces, motion and
energy storage. Field basis of circuit theory. Electromagnetic waves; wave-guides,
transmission lines, and antennas.
Three class periods and a laboratory each week.
Prerequisite: Engr. 51, or equivalent.
S p rin g se m e s te r.

120

ENGINEERING
73, 74. Electronic Circuit Theory. The principal emphasis of the course is on
the use of transistors as active circuit elements. The Ebers-Moll, charge control
and hybrid-pi models are introduced and used, together with appropriate analyti­
cal techniques, in such applications as biasing circuits, low-pass amplifiers, tuned
amplifiers, power amplifiers, feedback circuits and switching circuits. The bulk
of the laboratory work is oriented toward circuit design. Students are encouraged
to become familiar with and use the IBM Electronic Circuit Analysis Program
which is available in the Computer Center, or thè PCAP program.
The first semester provides a working knowledge of some basic aspects of the
subject for those who are unable to pursue it further.
Three class periods and a laboratory each week.
Prerequisite: Engr. 12, or equivalent.
75. Electromechanical Energy Conversion. The conversion of energy by
means of electromagnetic fields. Electromechanics of lumped parameter systems,
force-field relationships, energy storage and transfer in electrodynamic systems.
Transducers and rotating machines in engineering practice. Practical engineering
aspects of general purpose machines and special electromechanical devices.
Three class periods and a laboratory each week.
Prerequisite: Engr. 12, or equivalent.
77. Topics in Information Transmission. Selected topics relating to the trans­
mission and processing of information and information-bearing signals. Applica­
tion to communication and information-processing systems.
Three class periods and a laboratory each week.
Prerequisite: Engr. 12, or equivalent.
78. Control Theory and Design. An introduction to classical and modem con­
trol theory. Concepts of state, controllability and observability. Analysis and de­
sign of linear automatic control systems by means of Nyquist diagram, frequency
response and root locus method. Design by matrix methods and state variables.
Stability criteria. Computers and logic systems in control. Analog to digital con­
version. Introduction to optimum control. Special topics; sampled data systems,
nonlinear processes, etc., according to class interest.
Three class periods and a laboratory each week.
Prerequisite: Engr. 12 (and preferably Engr. 55).
80. Physical Electronics. The course begins with a study of the properties of
semiconductors based on the quantum mechanical point of view. This back­
ground is then used in a detailed consideration of the operation of semiconductor
devices. The connection between material properties and the characterization of
devices as circuit elements is stressed.
Three class periods and a laboratory each week.
Prerequisite: Engr. 61.
M

echanical

E

n gin eering

82. Fluid Mechanics. Fluid mechanics is treated as a special case of continuum
mechanics for which the relevant equations expressing the conservation of
mass, momentum, and energy are derived. Examples and applications are given
for the perfect fluid and the linearly viscous fluid. Current research and problem
areas in fluid mechanics and heat transport are discussed.
Four class periods each week.
Prerequisite: Ordinary differential equations and multivariate calculus.

121

ENGINEERING
84. Advanced Fluid Mechanics. A study of the more specialized areas of fluid
mechanics: boundary layer theory, compressible flow, wave motions, materialspatial coordinate transformations, and convective heat transfer. Independent
work in either an experimental or analytical area is an important part of each
student’s work.
Four class periods each week.
Prerequisite: Engr. 82.
86. Advanced Thermodynamics. An extension of the basic core thermo­
dynamics, Engr. 53. The fundamental laws of thermodynamics are applied to
conventional systems of energy conversion. Principles of irreversible thermo­
dynamics are developed and applied to systems of direct energy conversion.
Four class periods each week.
Prerequisite: Engr. 53.
87. Conduction and Radiation Heat Transfer. A course dealing with the basic
introduction to physical phenomena involved in the conduction and radiation
heat transfer processes. Work is done in both steady state and transient condi­
tions. Analytical, empirical and numerical approaches are covered.
Four class periods each week.
Prerequisite: Ordinary differential equations.
88. Advanced Dynamics. Review of kinematics and particle dynamics using
vectors. Vibrations and stability of lumped parameter system: Rigid body dy­
namics, including gyroscopes, in vector form. Lagrange’s equations and Hamil­
ton’s Principle. Vibration of distributed systems.
Four class periods each week.
Prerequisite: Engr. 51.
89. Machine Design. The study of the analysis and synthesis of the elements
of machines.
Three class periods and a laboratory each week.
Prerequisite: Engr. 59.
90. Engineering Design. A generalized approach to the design of engineering
systems and components is developed stressing inventiveness, engineering analy­
sis and decision making. The design process is studied through case histories and
student projects which utilize a number of areas of engineering science. Optimi­
zation theory, the use of probability and statistics in design, decision theory, and
reliability theory are discussed.
Three class periods and a laboratory each week.
Prerequisite: Senior Engineering standing.
H

onors

Sem

in ars

Seminars beyond those listed may be arranged on sufficient demand. Suggested
seminar areas are: Thermodynamics, Fluid Mechanics, Linear Systems and Elec­
tromagnetic Theory.
102. Engineering Systems. This seminar concerns itself with the representa­
tion of engineering systems as mathematical models. These models fall into' the
two fundamental classes of lumped parameters and distributed systems. Empha­
sis will be placed on the physical meaning of the applied mathematics.

122

ENGINEERING
109 Thesis.
gation.

Elective, upon approval of an acceptable field of original investi­

111. Circuit Theory. Classical and modern treatments of electric circuits
and networks. Time-domain and frequency-domain analysis of linear circuits.
Analytic properties of network functions and introduction to synthesis. Appli­
cation of linear graph theory.. State variable analysis and computer applica­
tions including nonlinear and time-varying cases.
113. Electronics. A study of electronic devices and circuits. Subject matter
includes physical theory of electronic devices; design of electronic circuits appli­
cable to communications, instrumentation, information processing systems, etc.;
transient and steady-state analysis of electronic circuits and systems; introductory
topics in the theory of communication and information. The seminar is accom­
panied by a full-day laboratory.

ENG LISH L IT E R A T U R E
DAVID COW DEN, Professor
BRENDAN K ENNELLY, Cornell Visiting Professor
HAROLD E. PAGLIARO, Professor and Chairman
D ER EK TRAVERSI, Professor
THOMAS H. BLACKBURN, Associate Professor
LEE DEV IN , Associate Professor and Director o f The Theatre
SUSAN B. SNYDER, Associate Professor
JO H N S. SHACKFORD, Assistant Professor
PH ILIP M. W EINSTEIN, Assistant Professor
THOMAS L. SHERM AN, Instructor
D A N IEL MAYERS, Visiting Lecturer
ROBERT TEITELBAUM , Technical Director o f The Theatre
This department offers courses in English literature, American literature, and
some foreign literatures in translation. The departmental curriculum is planned
to provide experience in several critical approaches to literature, in the intensive
study of the works of major writers, the study of the literature of limited periods,
and the study of the development of literary types. The department also provides
instruction in the techniques of writing.
R

eq u irem en ts

and

Reco

m m en d a tio n s

Prerequisites: English 1, or its equivalent by Advanced Placement or by depart­
mental examination, is the prerequisite for all other courses in literature. (This
prerequisite does not apply to seniors.) The minimum requirement for admission
as a major or as a minor in English is two semester-courses in the department.
Students considering a major in English are strongly urged to take one or two
additional courses during the sophomore year. Majors and prospective majors
should consult a member of the English department for information about
courses in other departments complementary to their work in English. Students
who plan to do graduate work should see a member of the department for early
help in planning their programs.

123

ENGLISH LITERATURE
Major in Course: The work of a major in Course consists of a minimum of eight
semester-courses in the department, including Shakespeare (English 61-62),
Problems of Literary Study (English 63-64) or its equivalent (English 65-66),’
and at least two other courses in literature written before 1800; such courses are
marked with an asterisk.
Major in Honors: Majors in Honors must prepare three or four papers in the
department, two of which must be on subjects covered in seminars in Group I
or on other early material decided upon after consultation with the department.
Minor in Honors: Minors in Honors are ordinarily required to prepare two
papers in the department.
C

ourses

1. Studies in Poetry and Prose. Emphasis on.sensitive reading and analysis:
exploration of lyrics, longer poetic forms, and imaginative prose works from
various periods.
Each semester.

Miss Snyder and Messrs. Blackburn, Pagliaro, Shackford,
Sherman, Traversi, Weinstein.

10. Advanced Composition. Analysis, organization, and effective presentation
of complex subject matter. The course will be conducted for the most part on a
tutorial basis.
Spring semester. Staff.
21. The English Lyric. The varieties of lyric poetry, mostly British, with
special attention to poetics.
Fail semester. Mr. Sherman.
22. Satire. Examination of satire as a literary genre.
Not offered in 1971-72. Mr. Blackburn.
23. The Development of Realism. Examination of realist authors from Eliot
to Joyce.
Spring semester. Mr. Weinstein.
24. Science Fiction. A study of the conventions and achievement of the
genre, including a short historical survey of its development.
Spring semester. Mr. Blackburn.
25. Shakespeare (for non-majors). Study of representative plays. Not open
to majors in the department.
Each semester. Staff.
26. Criticism and Theory of Literature. Examination of critical theories of
literature from classical times to the present.
Fall semester. Mr. Kennelly.
27. Poetry and Drama of the Irish Renaissance. Irish literature of the early
twentieth century, including the work of Yeats, Synge, and O’Casey.
Spring semester. Mr. Kennelly.
124

ENGLISH LITERATURE
29. Black Literature. A survey of Afro-American literature from 1750 to the
present. Emphasis will be placed on the modern period, with special considera­
tion given to the “political” dimension of Afro-American writing as a problem
in criticism.
Fall semester. Mr. Mayers.
31. Chaucer and Dante.* This course will aim at exploring the civilization
of the Middle Ages—a civilization very different from, but relevant to our own—
through the works of two of its greatest poets. Emphasis will be placed on a close
reading of Chaucer’s major poems (Troilus and Criseyde and The Canterbury
Tales) and on the Divine Comedy. The reading of Dante’s poem will use the
original Italian with an English translation to supplement it as required.
Spring semester. Mr. Traversi.
33. Renaissance Poetry.* Lyric and narrative poetry of the Elizabethan age
and early seventeenth century. This year, the poetry of Spenser and Donne.
Spring semester. Miss Snyder.
34. Renaissance Comparative Literature.*
tinental Renaissance studied in translation.
Not offered in 1971-72. Miss Snyder.

Selected major writers of the Con­

35. Tudor-Stuart Drama.* Development of the English drama in the sixteenth
and seventeenth centuries.
Fall semester. Mr. Blackburn.
36. Milton.* Study of Milton’s poetry with particular emphasis on Paradise
Lost.
Not offered in 1971-72. Mr. Blackburn.
37. Eighteenth-Century Literature.* Selected writers of England, 1660-1800.
This year, reason, irrationality, and imagination, chiefly in the literature of the
period.
Spring semester. Mr. Pagliaro.
38. Romantic Poetry. The major English romantic poets, with attention
given to the ideas as well as to the form and structure of their major works.
Spring semester. Mr. Pagliaro.
39. The Eighteenth- and Nineteenth-Century English Novel. Study of the
beginnings of the novel concentrating on eighteenth-century, romantic, and Vic­
torian novels.
Fall semester. Mr. Cowden.
40. American Transcendentalism 1830-1970. Transcendentalist thought, lit­
erature, and art studied in relation to American culture, including: Thoreau,
Emerson, Whitman, Melville, Dickinson, Hart Crane, T. S. Eliot, Ginsberg,
Henry Miller, N. O. Brown, and abstract expressionist painters.
Fall semester. Mr. Shackford.
41. Nineteenth-Century American Literature. Selected major writers of the
period.
Not offered in 1971-72. Mr. Shackford.
42. James, Conrad, and Faulkner. An intensive study of the major works.
Mr. Weinstein.

F all sem ester.

125

*

ENGLISH LITERATURE
43. Victorian Literature. This year, the art of Victorian prose, studied in
selected essays and fiction.
Spring semester. Mr. Cowden.
44. Twentieth-Century American Fiction. Selected major writers: Fitzgerald,
Hemingway, Faulkner, Nabakov. A study of experimentation with the form of
the novel.
Spring semester. Mr. Shackford.
45. Modern Poetry (British). A variety of critical approaches to major
British poets of the last hundred years.
Fall semester. Mr. Kennelly.
46. Modern Poetry (American). Selected major poets: Frost, Stevens, Wil­
liams, Pound.
Not offered in 1971-72. Mr. Shackford.
47. Contemporary Poetry. Varieties of American and British poetry since
1945.
Spring semester. Mr. Sherman.
48. Theatre: Modern Drama. Examination of the range of dramatic literature
since Ibsen.
Spring semester. Mr. Devin.
50. The Modern English Novel. Study of the development of the modern
novel beginning with James and continuing to the present.
Not offered in 1971-72. Mr. Cowden.
54. Independent Study. Students who plan independent study must submit a
prospectus to the appropriate instructor and receive departmental approval for
the project before the beginning of the semester during which the study is actu­
ally done.
61-62. Shakespeare. Study of the complete works of Shakespeare, tracing the
development of his craftsmanship and ideas. Required of Course majors in the
department, who meet weekly in small groups during the first semester of the
senior year. Students should read through the plays before beginning the course.
Fall semester. Staff.
63-64. Problems of Literary Study. In the spring semester of the senior year,
Course majors in the department pursue a literary problem of their own choos­
ing. They usually begin their work on this essentially independent project either
as part of a small group, which meets to discuss a subject agreed upon by students
and instructor, or as members of one of certain classes in the regular offering
in the Spring semester, whose meetings they attend until their work is under
way. After this beginning, the remainder of the semester (approximately half)
is devoted to writing a paper of magnitude.
Spring semester. Staff.
65-66. Thesis. Course majors may elect to substitute a thesis for Problems
of Literary Study (English 63-64). Application must be made by May 15 of the
junior year.
126

E N G L ISH L IT E R A T U R E
70. Fiction Writers’ Workshop. Projects in imaginative writing. Meetings will
be devoted primarily to the analysis of stories submitted by students, and sec­
ondarily to the discussion of readings in the theory of fiction, the craft of fiction,
and the work of contemporary authors. Admission and credit are granted at the
discretion of the instructor.
Spring semester. Mr. Kennelly.
71. Poetry Workshop. A class, limited to twelve, in which students wiil write,
read, and talk about poetry. Students should submit three poems or so for
admission to the course. The class will meet once a week together, and in indi­
vidual conferences. Admission and credit are granted at the discretion of the
instructor.
Fall semester. Mr. Kennelly.
72. Theatre: Scene Study. Performance and criticism of scenes from plays;
basic acting exercises; introduction to techniques of realism. One-half semestercourse of credit. This course may be repeated for credit with the instructor’s
permission.
Each semester. Mr. Devin.
73. Theatre: Production Workshop. Introduction to theatre technology; prob­
lems in lighting, sound, and scene design. One-half semester-course of credit.
This workshop may be repeated for credit with the instructor’s permission.
Each semester. Mr. Teitelbaum.
74. Theatre: Play Analysis. Examination of playwriting strategies and the
solution of problems in dramaturgy. Emphasis on Aristotle’s Poetics and other
“architectural” criticism. Application of critical principles to selected plays.
Fall semester. Mr. Devin.
75. Theatre: Ensemble. An intensive course in theatre technique consisting
in a rehearsal period of five weeks, five nights a week, 8:00-11:00 p.m. A company
of 14 actors and six technicians is selected at the beginning of each semester
through tryouts and interviews.
Each semester. Mr. Devin and Mr. Teitelbaum.
76. Theatre: Design for the Theatre. The philosophic grounding of con­
temporary theatrical design; practical application of basic technologies.
Fall semester. Mr. Teitelbaum.
80. Religion and Literature.* See Religion 22. Aspects of the relationship
between poetic sensibility and religious insight and between the world of reli­
gious metaphysics and the imaginative world of the writer. Materials will be
taken chiefly from the English traditions of preaching, poetry, and fiction.
Prerequisite: English 1 and one of the Religion courses numbered 3 through 6.
Spring semester. Miss Snyder and Mr. Henry.
H

onors

Sem

inars

Group l
101. Shakespeare. Study of Shakespeare as dramatist and poet. The emphasis
is on the major plays, with a more rapid reading of the remainder of the canon.
Students are advised to read through all the plays before entering the seminar.
Each semester. Staff.

127

E N G L IS H

L IT E R A T U R E

103. Chaucer and Dante. This seminar will aim at exploring the civilization
of the Middle Ages—a civilization very different from, but relevant to our own
^—through the work of two of its greatest poets. Emphasis will be placed on a
close reading of Chaucer’s major poems (T roilus and Criseyde and The Canter­
bury Tales) and on the Divine Comedy. The reading of Dante’s poem will use
the original Italian with an English translation to supplement it as required.
Not offered in 1971-72. Mr. Traversi.
104. Milton. Study of Milton’s works with special emphasis on Paradise Lost.
Spring semester. Mr. Blackburn.
105. Tudor-Stuart Drama. The development of English drama from medieval
morality plays to Jacobean tragedy and comedy.
Not offered in 1971-72. Mr. Blackburn.
108. Renaissance Poetry. Poetic modes and preoccupations of the English
Renaissance, with emphasis on Sidney, Shakespeare, Spenser, Donne, Herbert,
and Marvell.
Spring semester. Miss Snyder.
109. Eighteenth-Century Literature. Examination of the literary forms and
critical values of the age, with special attention given to the works of Dryden,
Swift, Pope, and Johnson.
Not offered in 1971-72. Mr. Pagliaro.
110. The Romantic Poets. Examination of the poetry of Blake, Wordsworth,
Coleridge, Byron, Shelley, and Keats.
Fall semester. Mr. Pagliaro.
Group II.
113. The Modern Novel. Studies in four novelists: James, Conrad, Joyce,
and Woolf.
Each semester. Mr. Cowden.
115. Modern Comparative Literature. Examination of novels by Flaubert,
Zola, Eliot, Tolstoy, Dostoevsky, Proust, Lawrence, Joyce, Faulkner, Kafka,
Sartre, and Borges.
Each semester. Mr. Weinstein.
116. American Literature. Novelists and poets from the nineteenth and
twentieth centuries, representative of the themes, forms, and character of Ameri­
can literature.
Each semester. Mr. Shackford.
118. Modern Poetry. Study of the modem tradition in English and American
poetry from Yeats to the present. The seminar will concentrate on the work of
major poets.
Spring semester. Mr. Kennelly.
119. Modem Drama. The range of dramatic literature since Ibsen.
Not offered in 1971-72. Mr. Devin.
120. Thesis. A major in Honors may elect to write a thesis as a substitute
for one seminar. He must select his topic and submit his plan of work for de128

E N G L IS H

L IT E R A T U R E

partmental approval no later than the end of the junior year. Normally, he
writes his thesis, under the direction of a member of the department, during only
one of the semesters of his honors work, but not the final semester.
125. Independent Study. Students may prepare for an Honors examination
in a field or major figure comparable in literatry significance to those offered in
the regular seminars. Independent study projects must be approved by the de­
partment and supervised by a department member.

H ISTO R Y
PA U L H. BEIK, Professor
JAM ES A. FIELD , JR., Professor
HARRISON M. W RIG H T, Professor and Chairman
ROBERT C. BANNISTER, Associate Professor
K A THRYN M ORGAN, Associate Professor
BERNARD S. SM ITH, Associate Professor
JEROM E H. WOOD, JR., Assistant Professor
M A RG A RET A. YARVIN, Assistant Professor
TSING YUAN, Assistant Professor*
ROBERT D. CROSS, President
JAMES F. GOVAN, Librarian
W ERN ER L. GUN D ERSH EIM ER, Visiting Lecturer**
The Department of History attempts to give students a sense of the past, an
acquaintance with the cultural and institutional developments which have pro­
duced the world of today, and an understanding of the nature of history as a
discipline. The courses of the department emphasize less the accumulation of
data than the investigation, from various points of view, of those ideas and insti­
tutions—political, religious, social, economic—by which man has endeavored to
order his world.
R

eq u irem en ts

and

Recom

m end a tio ns

Prerequisites: Any one of the introductory history courses (those numbered 1
through 9, or its equivalent by Advanced Placement, is the prerequisite for ad­
vanced history courses open to students of all classes (those numbered 11
through 49). In the sophomore and junior years, with the consent of the instruc­
tor and of the department chairman, an advanced course may be taken concur­
rently with an introductory course. In the senior year advanced courses may, with
the consent of the instructor, be taken withott prerequisite. The prerequisite for
admission to the department as a major in Course or Honors or as a minor in
Honors is at least two history courses taken at Swarthmore and a satisfactory
standard of work in all courses.
Advanced Placement: The department will grant one semester’s credit for in­
coming students who have achieved a score of 4 or 5 in Advanced Placement his­
tory tests. This credit may be counted toward the number of courses required for
*Absent on leave, fall semester, 1971-72.
**Fall semester, 1971-72.

129

H IS T O R Y
graduation. It may be used in partial fulfillment of the college distribution re­
quirements. It may serve as the prerequisite for advanced courses in history.
Major in Course: The work of the major in Course consists of at least eight
semester courses in the department, one of which is History 68. The choice of
courses is made so as to prepare for a comprehensive examination, in the spring
of the senior year, on three of the four following fiields: (1) Ancient, Medieval
and Early Modern Europe; (2) Modern Europe; (3) the United States; (4)
Africa, Asia, and Latin America. Students are expected to take at least two
courses (introductory or advanced) in each of the three fields on which they
intend to be examined.
Major and minor in Honors: Students entering the Honors program may elect
history as a major or a minor in the Division of the Humanities, in the Division of
the Social Sciences, or in cross-divisional programs. Majors in Honors may take
either three or four seminars in the department. Minors in Honors are ordinarily
expected to take at least two seminars.
General: Students seriously considering a major in history should try to take
more than two history courses during their freshman and sophomore years. Those
who intend to continue their studies after graduation should bear in mind that a
reading knowledge of one or two foreign languages (particularly French and
German) is now generally assumed for admission to graduate school.
1. Early Europe. Europe from the fall of the Roman Empire to the Enlight­
enment. This course will provide a theoretical and technical introduction to
the study of history, stressing the uses of primary sources in literature, religion,
philosophy, science, politics, and the arts.
Fall semester. Mr. Smith.
2. Modem Europe. Europe from the Enlightenment to the mid-twentieth cen­
tury.
Each semester. Mr. Beik or Mrs. Yarvin.
5. The United States to 1877. The colonial experience; independence, a new
society and a new government; transcontinental expansion and the struggle be­
tween North and South.
Fall semester. Mr. Bannister.
6. The United States Since 1877. Industrialism and its consequences; the
United States as a great power; the problems of a shrinking world.
Spring semester. Mr. Field.
8. Africa. African history and civilization, with an emphasis on tropical Africa
in modem times.
Fall semester. Mr. Wright.
9. China, The formation and maturing of Chinese civilization.
Spring semester. Mr. Yuan.
10. Freshman-Sophomore Seminar. Collaborative small group investigation
of subjects within the particular fields of interest of members of the depart­
ment.
Fall semester. Not offered in 1971-72.
130

H IS T O R Y
11. Early Medieval Europe. The history of western Europe from the acces­
sion of Diocletian to the last Carolingians.
Fall semester. Mr. Smith.
12. Later Medieval Europe. The history of western Europe from the tenth
to the fifteenth century, with emphasis on the role of the Papacy.
Spring semester. Mr. Smith.
13. England to 1485. The political, cultural, and religious history of England
from the Roman occupation to the accession of the Tudors.
Fall semester. Mr. Smith.
14. Medieval European Intellectual History. The history of ideas in western
Europe from the fifth to the fourteenth century, with roughly equal attention
being paid to the development of political theory, theology, philosophy, edu­
cation and science.
Prerequisite: History 11 or History 12.
Not offered in 1971-72. Mr. Smith.
16. The Renaissance. The birth of modem western civilization considered
in terms of intellectual and artistic developments and their relation to economic,
social, and political conditions.
Not offered in 1971-72.
17. The Reformation and the Seventeenth Century. The attempt to reform
religion, its failure, and the subsequent secularization of culture and society.
Not offered in 1971-72.
18. Tudor and Stuart England. The English Renaissance and Reformation,
constitutional developments and the origins of radical politics, the Civil War,
the Restoration and the Glorious Revolution.
Not offered in 1971-72.
Classics 31. History of Greece.
Classics 32. The Roman Republic.

(See listing under Department of Classics.)
(See listing under Department of Classics.)

Classics 42. Greece in the Fifth Century B.C.
of Classics.)
Classics 44. The Roman Empire.

(See listing under Department

(See listing under Department of Classics.)

21. The French Revolution and Napoleon. The place of the French Revolu­
tion and Napoleon in the development of European political institutions and
social theories.
Fall semester. Mr. Beik.
22. French Regimes since Napoleon. The succession of political shocks and
readjustments from 1814 to the present, studied in the context of social changes
and popular aspirations.
Not offered in 1971-72. Mr. Beik.
24. Modem England. The development of constitutional government and
the transition from an agricultural and aristocratic nation to an urban and
socialist one.
Spring semester. Mr. Govan.
131

H IS T O R Y
25. Modem Russia. The course begins with the reign of Peter and gives half
its time to the twentieth century.
Spring semester. Mr. Beik.
26. Modem Germany 1815-1950. Germany’s transformation from a people
in search of a national state to a national state in search of world power.
Mrs. Yarvin.
28. Europe of the Dictators, 1914-1945. The assault of radical politics, left
and right, on the social and political fabric of Europe; the interaction of
domestic and international conflict; nationalism, racism, militarism in their
historical context; the first effective experiments in the use of ideology, tech­
nology, and terror as means of social control; the political responses to the
crises of modernization and industrial capitalism.
Fall semester. Mrs. Yarvin.
29. Topics in European History. Offered as opportunity permits. In 1971-72
the course will be devoted to the intellectual history of nineteenth century Europe.
Fall semester. Mrs. Yarvin.
30. The American Colonies. The transit of civilization to British North Amer­
ica, and the modification of Old World ideas and institutions in a New World
environment, 1607-1763.
Fall semester. Mr. Wood.
31. The American Revolution. The conflict between intensive self-government
in the colonies and English ideas and projects for empire; the revolt against
colonial status and the elaboration of a “republican” ethos and “republican”
institutions, 1763-1789.
Spring semester. Mr. Wood.
32. American Intellectual History to 1865. The history of ideas in the United
States from the colonial period through the mid-nineteenth century. A general
knowledge of the political and social history of the period is assumed.
Fall semester. Mr. Wood.
33. American Intellectual History since 1865. The history of ideas in the
United States from the mid-nineteenth century to the present time. A general
knowledge of the political and social history of the period is assumed.
Spring semester.

Mr. Bannister.

34. America in the Progressive Era, 1896-1920. The attack on political privi­
lege and the movement for the control of industry; urban poverty, the new
immigration, race relations, womens rights, temperance, and conservation; the
emergence of America as a world power.
Spring semester. Mr. Bannister.
35. American Diplomatic History to 1900. The American role in world affairs
from the Revolution through the War with Spain: independence and westward
expansion; ideological and economic interaction with Europe and the outer
world; the growth of industrial power and the problem of “imperialism.”
Fall semester.

132

Mr. Field.

H IS T O R Y
36. American Diplomatic History since 1900. New responsibilities in the
Caribbean and the Far East; the expansion of American economic and cultural
influence; two world wars and the effort to prevent a third; the American “chal­
lenge” and the American “empire.”
Spring semester. Mr. Field.
37. American Religious Thought. The course of religious thought in the col­
onies and the United States, with appropriate reference to general intellectual
history and American church history.
Fall semester. Mr. Cross.
38. Topics in American History. Intensive study of particular problems.
Offered as opportunity permits. Limited enrollment. In 1971-72 the subject will
be higher education and American society from colonial times to the present.
Fall semester. Mr. Bannister.
Religion 38.

Quakerism.

(See listing under Department of Religion.)

40. Introduction to Afro-American History. An interdisciplinary survey of
the black experience in the United States from 1619 to the present. The major
thrust of the course will be to examine black views on politics, science, education,
and philosophy, as well as black perspectives on race relations.
Fall semester. Mrs. Morgan.
41. Topics in Afro-American History. A course of limited enrollment de­
voted to an investigation into the sources, problems, and methods involved in the
study of black history, with special emphasis on folk history.
Spring semester. Mrs. Morgan.
42. Topics in African History. Special problems in African history. Offered
as opportunity permits. Limited enrollment. The topic in 1971-72 will be South
Africa, with an emphasis on White-Black relations.
Spring semester. Mr. Wright.
43. The Expansion of Europe. A survey of European overseas expansion since
1415, and of its impact on non-European societies. The emphasis is on South and
Southwest Asia.
Not offered in 1971-72. Mr. Wright.
44. Modem China. The search for a modern Chinese identity since 1840.
This course will concentrate on such themes as the impact of the West on the
traditional Confucian society, reform and revolution, the failure of democratic
liberalism, and the adaptation of Marxism to China.
Spring semester. Mr. Yuan.
45. Modem Japan. The transformation of Tokugawa Japan into a modem
nation, with emphasis on westernization, imperialism, and the search for
national identity.
Not offered in 1971-72. Mr. Yuan.
46. Asian Nationalisms.
A comparative study of middle eastern and far
eastern Asian nationalisms, with emphasis on the Turkish, Arab, Chinese,
and Japanese forms.
Not offered in 1971-72. Mr. Yuan.

133

H IS T O R Y
48. Latin America. The development of the Latin American countries from
colonial times to the present.
Spring semester. Mr. Wood.
51-2. Colloquium. A double-credit course of restricted enrollment which
seeks, through intensive investigation of a limited topic, to illuminate an
important historical field. Open to majors in Course in any department. In 197172 the subject will be Transnationalism: economic, technological, and cultural
transcendence of national boundaries in the nineteenth and twentieth centuries;
the emergence of “world city,” “world farm,” and “world culture.”
Fall semester. Mr. Field.
53. Directed Reading. Individual or group study in fields of special interest
to the student not dealt with in the regular course offerings. The consent of
the chairman and of the instructor is required. History 53 may be taken for
one-half credit as History 53A.
Members of the department.
67. Thesis. With the consent of the chairman and of the supervising member
of the department a thesis may be substituted for a course in the fall semester of
the senior year.
Members of the department.
68. Special Topics. Group meetings of senior majors in their final semester to
review, integrate, and supplement their programs. The readings and discussion
center on the development of historical writing from the Middle Ages to the
present, on the relationship of the historian to his time, and on historical method
and its problems.
H

onors

Sem

inars

The following seminars are offered by the department to juniors and seniors
who are preparing to be examined for a degree with Honors. They may be taken
in any combination and without regard to chronological order. Some preliminary
reading or other preparation may be required for seminars on subjects in which
no work has previously been done.
Those who wish to specialize in international relations with a major in history
(see page 135), should include in their programs at least three of the following
seminars; 128, 134, 140, 144.
111. Medieval Europe. The course of European civilization from the con­
version of Constantine to the foundation of the western kingdoms.'
Prerequisite: History 11 or the permission of the instructor.
Spring semester. Mr. Smith.
116. The Renaissance and Reformation. The birth of Modern Europe as seen
in such developments as the recovery of classical culture, the crisis of religion
and the Church, the establishment of centralized polities, and the origins of
modern science.
Fall semester. Mr. Gundersheimer.
118. Tudor and Stuart England. The English Renaissance and Reformation,
constitutional developments, the Civil War and the Restoration.
Spring semester. Not offered in 1971-72.
134

122. Europe 1760 to 1870.
liberalism.
Fall semester. Mr. Beik.

H IS T O R Y
The disintegration of the old regime and the rise of

123. Europe 1870 to 1945. Political and social changes in Europe through the
Second World War.
Each semester. Mrs. Yarvin.
124. England Since 1785. The rise of the first modern industrial state. Its
social, political, and economic problems.
Spring semester. Mr. Govan.
128. Eastern Europe. The origins and consequences of the Russian Revolu­
tion and the development of the nations of East Central Europe.
Spring semester. Mr. Beik.
130. Early American History. Political, economic, social, and cultural aspects
of the period from the explorations to the early National period.
Spring semester. Mr. Wood.
132. Problems in American History. Selected topics in the history of the
United States.
Each semester. Mr. Bannister, Mr. Field or Mr. Wood.
134. Problems in American History: Foreign. A study of the evolution since
1776 of American relations with the outer world with emphasis on ideological,
economic, and strategic developments.
Fall semester. Mr. Field.
140. Modern Africa. Studies in African history with emphasis on the period
since 1800, the region south of the Sahara, and the European impact.
Fall semester. Mr. Wright.
144. The Modem Far East. Political, social, and intellectual movements in
China and Japan since about 1840.
Spring semester. Mr. Yuan.
167. Thesis. With the permission of the department Honors students may
write a thesis for either single or double course credit. Double-credit theses will
normally be written in the fall semester of the senior year for submission as
papers to the visiting examiners. Honors students wishing to write a thesis for
single credit should elect History 67.

IN T E R N A T IO N A L R ELA TIO N S
Students who plan to enter upon a career in the field of international relations
should include in their programs, during the first two years, introductory
courses in economics, history, and political science and should complete the in­
termediate course in one or more modern languages.
Advanced courses selected from the groups listed below may be incorporated
in the programs of students who do their major work in economics, history, politi­
cal science, or a modern language.
135

INTERNATIONAL RELATIONS
These students who wish to concentrate in international relations may take
their Senior Comprehensive Examination in this field. Students preparing for
this examination should take eight, nine, or ten courses from among those listed
below, including all of those listed in Group I, one or more in Group II, and one
or more in Group III. The examination is administered by a committee ap­
pointed by the chairmen of the Departments of Economics, History, and Political
Science, under the chairmanship of the Department of Political Science.
Group I
Political Science 4. International Politics
Political Science 13. International Law and Organization
Political Science 14. American Foreign Policy
Political Science 63. Advanced International Politics
Economics 30. International Economics
Group II
History 8. Africa
History 25. Modem Russia
History 35. American Diplomatic History to 1900
History 36. American Diplomatic History since 1900
History 43. The Expansion of Europe
History 44. Modern China
History 45. Modern Japan
History 46. Asian Nationalisms
History 48. Latin America
Group ID
Economics 11. Economic Development
Economics 31. Comparative Economic Systems
Political Science 3. Comparative Politics
Political Science 18. Politics of Developing Nations
Political Science 19. Comparative Communist Politics
Political Science 20. Politics of East Asia
Political Science 21. Politics of Africa
Political Science 55. Modern Political Theory
Political Science 64. Topics in International Relations
Students who plan to enter the Honors program will find it possible to select a
similar combination of courses and seminars in the field of international relations.
In planning such programs, they should consult with the chairman of their
prospective major department.

LIN G U ISTIC S
LILA R. GLEITM A N , Associate Professor
N A N CY DORIAN, Visiting Lecturer
Linguistics is the study of human language. The discovery and description of
universal features characterizing all human languages is the primary theoretical
goal. Specifically, synchronic or descriptive linguistics is the study of the syntactic,
phonological, and semantic structure of language; diachronic or historical lin­
guistics approaches these issues through the study of genetic language relation136

L IN G U IS T IC S
ships. Students of individual languages and students of mathematics and philos­
ophy may find work in linguistics relevant to their academic concerns. Further,
linguistic studies are closely linked with broad issues in the social sciences. Pos­
sible connections between language typology and culture have made language a
central concern of anthropologists and sociologists. Psychologists have recog­
nized that language studies bear on fundamental issues in human cognitive or­
ganization. The resulting collaboration between linguists and psychologists (Psy­
cholinguistics) is among the more hopeful current directions in the study of
human development and cognition.
A major in linguistics is not offered, but a joint major in linguistics and psy­
chology is available in Course. Honors students may minor in linguistics. Follow­
ing are the requirements (11 course units) for the joint major:
(a) Linguistics 1 and 2 (Introduction to the study of language)
(b) At least one course from the following:
Psychology 15. Child Psychology
Psychology 43. Psychology of Communication
(c) Three courses from among the following:
Linguistics 38. Reading and Writing
Linguistics 52. Diachronic Linguistics
Linguistics 68. Directed Reading or Research
Linguistics 107. Language and Thought
Linguistics 108. Transformational Grammar
Sociology 26. Language, Society and Culture
(d) Five courses (or four, in case both Psychology 15 and Psychology 43 are
chosen) from among:
Psychology 12. Experimental Psychology
Psychology 37. Learning and Behavior Theory
Psychology 46. Cognitive Processes
Psychology 50. Perception
Psychology 54. Methods of Psychological Research
Psychology 64. History and Systems of Psychology
1. Introduction to Linguistics. Languages of the world; language change; dia­
lect; human and animal languages; concepts in synchronic linguistics; syntax,
semantics and phonology; transformational and structural grammars.
Fall semester. Mrs. Gleitman.
2. The Psychology of Language. Developmental linguistics (acquisition of a
first language); the origins of language; the perception and use of language; bi­
lingualism; linguistic abnormalities; dialect and the social context; linguistic de­
terminism; issues in cognitive psychology; reading and writing.
Prerequisites: Linguistics 1 or permission of the instructor.
Spring semester. Mrs. Gleitman.
38. Reading and Writing. This course is designed primarily for students in­
volved in reading tutorial programs, and for those intending to teach. At issue is
the problem of reading in both its conceptual and social aspects. Students will
tutor or assist in teaching reading as part of the course work. Weekly meetings
with the instructor will concern theoretical issues in phonology, reading and
writing; methods of teaching; and discussion of the ongoing tutorial programs.
Not offered 1971-72.
137

L IN G U IS T IC S
51. Colloquium in Reading. Cognitive, perceptual, visual, acoustic and socio­
logical factors related to the problem of reading-acquisition, as well as broader
issues in cognitive theory suggested by the problem of explaining reading skills.
Prerequisites: Linguistics 1 or 38 and permission of the instructor.
Fall semester. Mrs. Gleitman.
52. Diachronic Linguistics. An introduction to historical linguistics: the re­
construction of prehistoric linguistic stages, the establishment of language fami­
lies and their interrelationships, and the examination of processes of linguistic
change on all levels, phonological, morphological, syntactic and semantic. The
history of the English language, as the language common to all participants,
will be central to the course.
Prerequisite: Permission of the instructor.
Fall semester. Miss Dorian.
53. Recreational Linguistics. An approach to questions of language organiza­
tion through a survey of language games: crypts, ciphers, puns and anagrams;
bridge bidding and other special-purpose languages; signs, creoles and pidgins.
Prerequisite: Linguistics 1. Not offered 1971-72.
68. Directed Reading or Research. Students may conduct a reading or re­
search program in consultation with the instructor (permission of the instructor
required).
Either semester. Mrs. Gleitman.
106b.

Cognitive Development

(see Psychology 111).

107. Language and Thought. Philosophical, psychological and linguistic ap­
proaches to the problem of meaning.
Prerequisite: Linguistics 1 and 2.
Spring semester. Mrs. Gleitman.
108. Transformational Grammar. Not offered 1971-72.

M A TH EM A TIC S
D AVID ROSEN, Professor and Chairmant
JAMES W. EN G LA N D , Associate Professor
STEVENS HECKSCHER, Associate Professor
E U G E N E A. KLOTZ, Associate Professor and Acting Chairman
J. ED W A RD SKEATH, Associate Professor
ROLAND B. di FRANCO, Assistant Professor
THOMAS W. HAW KINS, Assistant Professor
Pure mathematics is an abstract subject and may be looked upon as the model
of a deductive science. On the other hand, the subject matter of mathematics
has for the most part arisen out of concrete applications to the physical sciences,
among which geometry occupies a central position. The courses offered in the
Department of Mathematics attempt to combine these points of view and to give
$Absent on leave, 1971-72.

138

M A T H E M A T IC S
a picture of the power and beauty of the subject when studied for its own sake,
as well as its many relations to other fields of thought. The study of mathematics
is essential as a tool for the understanding of the principles of the physical sci­
ences and engineering; a knowledge of its techniques is indispensable for a suc­
cessful pursuit of these subjects. The same is becoming increasingly true in the
biological sciences and the social sciences.
The sequence consisting of Courses 5, 6, 11, 22 forms the normal preparation
for further work in mathematics as well as for work in physics, other sciences,
and engineering. Those students who have obtained a grade of 3 or better on the
Advanced Placement AB examination normally take Course 6 while those who
similarly qualify in the BC examination normally take Course 11.
A student who wishes to major in mathematics in Course must-complete six
courses in addition to the normal sequence of four courses listed above. It is ex­
pected that a Course major in mathematics will take some advanced courses from
the three major areas, namely analysis, algebra, topology-geometry. Physics 1, 2
is highly recommended and a reading knowledge of French, German, or Russian
is desirable for all mathematics majors.
In order to be admitted to the Honors program with work in mathematics a
student must have completed Course 22. An Honors student with a major in
mathematics will normally take in his junior year seminars 101 (Real Analysis),
and 102 (Modern Algebra). In his senior year he will normally take seminars 103
(Complex Analysis), and 104 (Topology); or 105 (Probability and Statistics).
An Honor student minoring in mathematics will normally offer two papers in
mathematics. A student may use Course 51, 52 as partial preparation for an
Honors paper in mathematics.
Mathematics majors in Course or Honors automatically meet the mathematics
requirements for being certified to teach mathematics in secondary school .Min­
imum requirements for certification in mathematics are: (a) 5 and 6; (b) one
course from 24, 41, 42, 102; (c) one course from 23, 53, 104; (d) two additional
courses that may be taken from 11, 14, 22, 30, 51, 52, 103, 105. Certification to
teach mathematics in secondary school requires departmental recommendation.
1. Elementary Statistics. This is a non-calculus statistics course available to
students in all disciplines. It does not satisfy any mathematics prerequisite nor
can it be counted toward a major or minor in the department. The course begins
with an introduction to discrete probability, and then shifts to methods and tech­
niques of statistical inference such as assembling and handling data, estimation
of parameters, hypothesis testing, correlation and regression analysis. Other
topics will be considered as desired by the class.
Fall semetser. Mr. Mullins.
3, 4. Probability and Calculus. This course, which covers the basic concepts
of probability theory and one variable calculus, is particularly useful for biology
and social science majors. Topics to be included are discrete probability, se­
quences, series, differentiation, integration, transcendental functions, extremal
problems, and an introduction to continuous probability and statistical tech­
niques, as time permits.
Year course. Mr. Heckscher.
5. Differentiation and Integration. This is an introductory calculus course
which presupposes such normal high school mathematics as algebra, analytic
geometry, and elementary trigonometry. Derivatives and integrals of functions of
139

M A T H E M A T IC S
one variable are studied in detail. Applications of the methods of calculus are
given, when possible.
Fall semester. Mr. England.
6. Topics in Calculus. Topics to be included are infinite series, techniques of
integration, transcendental functions, improper integrals and an introduction to
differential equations.
Prerequisite: Math 5 or its equivalent, or a grade of 3 or better on AB Advanced
Placement.
Both semesters. Mr. diFranco.
9. Mathematics for Teachers. The primary objective of this course is to pro­
vide a mathematical background to topics appearing in elementary and secondary
school curricula. Topics will be chosen from the following areas: the number
systems, measurement (length, area, volume), infinity, elementary notions in
logic, set theory, topology, game theory, probability and statistics. This course
will be useful to students planning to teach mathematics in the schools.
Spring semester. Mr. diFranco.
11. Linear Algebra. This course is the normal sequel to Math 6. It introduces
the student to vector spaces, matrices, and linear transformations, with applica­
tions to the solution of systems of linear equations, determinants and the eigen­
value problem.
Prerequisite: Math 4 or 6. Freshmen who score a grade of 3 or better on BC
Advanced Placement examination may begin with this course.
Both semesters. Mr. diFranco, Mr. Skeath.
12H. Analytic Geometry. This half course presents applications of linear
algebra to the geometry of n-space with special emphasis on n = 2 , and 3. It will
include such topics as lines, planes, and their higher dimensional analogs; euclid­
ean spaces, orthogonality, least squares, rigid motions, symmetric matrices, quad­
ratic forms, classification of surfaces corresponding to second degree equations.
Prerequisite: Math 11. Not offered in 1971-72.
14. Probability and Statistics. This course deals with the mathematical theory
of statistics, based upon a study of the concepts of probability. An introduction
to sampling and statistical inference will be given.
Prerequisite: Course 5.
Fall semester. Mr. Klotz.
17. Set Theory. Set theory will be presented in an axiomatic framework. The
course will include: operation on sets, well ordering and well founded relations,
transfinite induction, ordinal numbers, axiom of choice and its equivalents, cardi­
nal numbers and their arithmetic, and construction of the real numbers.
Prerequisite: permission of the instructor.
Not offered in 1971-72.
19. The Mathematics of Social Choice. This course is concerned with the
mathematical problems involved in going from the preferences of individual
members of a society to a collective decision by the society. It is of special inter­
est to students in economics, sociology, political science, psychology, and philos­
ophy, as well as mathematics.
Prerequisite: permission of the instructor.
Fall semester. Mr. Klotz.

140

M A T H E M A T IC S
22. Several Variable Calculus. This course considers differentiation and in­
tegration of functions of several variables with special emphasis on two and
three dimensions. It is the normal sequel to Math 11 and is a prerequisite for sev­
eral other mathematics courses.
Prerequisite: Math 11.
Spring semester. Mr. Skeath
23. Higher Geometry. This course considers an assortment of specialized
topics in geometry that are important in the present stream of mathematics. The
material consists of parts of euclidean geometry, convexity, and transformation
theory which will also relate to other courses in mathematics. The emphasis will
be on the theory of convex sets and the theory of congruence and similarity in
euclidean two space and three space.
Prerequisite: Math 11.
Fall semester. Not offered in 1971-72.
24. Introduction to Modem Algebra. This course, which is offered in alter­
nate years, is especially designed to accommodate those people who desire to be
certified to teach mathematics in secondary school or who desire a brief intro­
duction to modern algebra. The course will survey some of the important
topics of modern algebra, such as groups, integral domains, rings, and fields.
Prerequisite: Math 11 or permission of the instructor.
Spring semester. Not offered in 1971-72.
30. Differential Equations. An introduction to differential equations that will
include such topics as: first order equations, linear differential equations, approxi­
mative methods, some partial differential equations.
Prerequisite: Math 11.
Spring semester. Mr. Hawkins.
33. Graph Theory. This course is an introduction to graph theory and its ap­
plications. Topics included will be chosen from the following: undirected and
directed graphs; partitions, chains, and circuits; the Kuratowski characterization
of planar graphs; coloring theorems; matrix representations; and applications of
graph theory to such areas as linear programming, combinations, biology, en­
gineering, and physics.
Prerequisites: Math 11, or Math 22, or permission of the instructor.
Spring semester. Mr. Heckscher.
34. Numerical Methods. This course will deal with the numerical solution of
various mathematical problems, pure and applied. A laboratory period will be
included, and a knowledge of computer programming will be useful.
Prerequisite: Math 11.
Spring semester. Mr. Klotz.
35. Mathematics for the Social Sciences. This course will deal with various
topics in mathematics that have arisen from the social sciences. Topics include
such areas as Markov chain models, simulation, linear programming, game the­
ory, utility theory, and graph theory with applications to organization theory,
integer programming and optimal assignment problems. Examples will be drawn
from economics, political science, psychology and sociology-anthropology. Some
computer programming may be included.
Prerequisite: Math 11.
Spring semester. Not offered 1971-72.
141

M A T H E M A T IC S
41. Groups and Representations. An introduction to the theory of abstract
groups with application to such areas as symmetry groups, followed by the ele­
ments of representation theory.
Prerequisite: Math 11.
Fall semester. Mr. Hawkins.
42. Applied Modem Algebra. Topics will be selected from such areas as
Boolean algebras, finite state machines, programming languages, optimization
and computer design, and coding theory.
Prerequisite: Math 11 or permission of the instructor.
Not offered in 1971-72.
51, 52. Applied Real Analysis. This course considers techniques of applied
mathematics from the viewpoint of linear spaces and operators. Topics to be
covered are a brief introduction to complex function theory, spectral theory of
operators, Green’s function, eigenvalue problems of ordinary differential equa­
tions, and partial differential equations.
Year course. Mr. Hawkins.
53. Topology. This course is intended to bridge the gap between Advanced
Calculus and certain topics in abstract mathematics. The topics covered will vary
from year to year and will be selected from those topics in seminar 104.
Not offered in 1971-72.
56. Topics in the History of Mathematics. A detailed examination of the de­
velopment of various lines of mathematical thought in the nineteenth and early
twentieth centuries that have become fundamental to contemporary mathematics.
Topics to be covered will include: the development of real analysis (including set
theory, measure and integration theory, and Fourier series); the introduction of
imaginaries into analysis and the creation of complex function theory; the ori­
gins of the notion of an abstract topological space; the emergence of algebraic
structures.
Prerequisite: permission of the instructor.
Spring semester. Mr. Hawkins.
H

onors

Sem

inars

101. Real Analysis. This seminar concentrates on the careful study of the
principles underlying the calculus of real valued functions of real variables.
Not offered in 1971-72.
102. Modern Algebra. This seminar deals with the theoretical properties of
such formal systems as groups, rings, fields and vector spaces. While these con­
cepts will be illustrated by many concrete examples, the emphasis will be on the
abstract nature of the subject.
Spring semester. Mr. Klotz.
103. Complex Analysis. A brief study of the geometry of complex numbers
is followed by a detailed treatment of the Cauchy theory of analytic functions of
a complex variable. Various applications are given and some special classes of
functions, such as elliptic functions, are studied. Analytic continuation and the
theory of Weierstrass are also discussed.
Prerequisite: Math 22.
Fall semester. Mr. Heckscher.
142

M A T H E M A T IC S
104. Topology. The subject matter of this semester will include such topics
as point set topology with some application, piecewise linear topology, homology
and homotopy theory.
Not offered in 1971-72.
105. Probability and Statistics. The purpose of this seminar is to give the
mathematical background necessary for an understanding of the mathematical
analysis of statistical data. In addition, the modem development of this subject
provides a valuable application of the concepts and techniques acquired in the
study of advanced calculus. The topics treated may include: the axiomatic ap­
proach, the use of Stieltjes integrals, correlation and regression, some special
distributions, sampling theory, and a short introduction to the theory of statisti­
cal estimation.
Spring semester.
106. Models of Set Theory. This seminar will study various models for set
theory. The primary emphasis will be on those models which exhibit the relative
consistency and independence of the axiom of choice and the continuum hypo­
thesis.
Prerequisites: Math 17, Set Theory, and Phil. 12, Logic, or equivalent work.
Spring semester. Mr. diFranco.
107. Modem Analysis. This seminar deals with the foundations of global
analysis and includes some applications to mechanics. Honors majors may use
this seminar instead of Mathematics 101 for their program, or take it in addition
to Mathematics 101.
Fall semester. Mr. England.

143

M E D IA E V A L STUDIES
Coordinator: PA TRICK H EN RY
This program offers an opportunity for a comprehensive study of European
and Mediterranean civilization from the fourth century to the fifteenth. The
period, which has a perceptible unity and a critical importance for the under­
standing of Western culture, can be approached only through a combination of
several disciplines. Hence eight Departments (Art History, Classics, English
Literature, History, Modern Languages, Music, Religion, and Philosophy) co­
operate to provide a course of study which may be offered as a major in either
Course or Honors.
For a major in Course the requirements are as follows:
1. Latin 13: Mediaeval Latin
1 course in Mediaeval History (History 11 or 12)
Either Philosophy/Religion 19 or History 14.
The prerequisites for the above courses are:
Latin 1-2 or the equivalent; an introductory history course; Philosophy 1.
2.

Five other courses chosen from three of the following fields:
Art History (16, 17, 20).
History (11, 12, 13, 14).
Religion (11, 18, 19, 23).
Literature (Classics 35; English 31; CEL 13; French 22; Spanish 20).
Music (15).

3. A student may elect to write a thesis as a substitute for a course during the
first semester of the senior year.
4.

The student must pass a comprehensive examination in his senior year based
on courses taken in the mediaeval field.
For a major in Honors the requirements are as follows:

1. The student must satisfy the language and distribution requirements of the
program, as listed above, by appropriate courses or seminars. Some work in
one or more of the fields included in the program must be done prior to
admission to Honors.
2.

Seminars may be chosen from the following: Philosophy 110 (Mediaeval
Philosophy), History 111 (Mediaeval Europe), Art History 103 (Mediaeval
Art), English 103 (Chaucer and Dante); French 100 (Littérature du MoyenAge); Latin 104 (Mediaeval Latin).

3. By attachments to the courses listed above, and by writing a thesis, the stu­
dent may expand the possibility of work in Honors beyond these six seminars.
The minor program should be planned with the co-ordinator so as to insure a
close relation to the major. No minor program in Honors is offered. Students
wishing to minor in subjects included in this field should take them as minors in
the department in which they are normally offered.

144

MODERN LANGUAGES
AND LITERATURES
H ILD E D. COHN (G erm an), Professor
FRA N Z H. M A U TN ER (G erm an), Professor
FRANCIS P. TAFOYA (F ren ch ), Professor and Chairman
ELISA ASENSIO (Spanish), Associate Professor
G EO RG E C. AVERY (G erm an), Associate Professor
JEAN ASHM EAD PERKINS (F rench), Associate Professor
G EO RG E KRUGOVOY (Russian), Associate ProfessorX
PH ILIP M ETZIDAKIS (Spanish), Associate ProfessorX
THOM PSON BRADLEY (Russian), Assistant Professor
ROBERT ROZA (F rench), Assistant Professor
SIM ONE VOISIN SM ITH (F ren ch ), Assistant Professor
RICHARD TERD IM A N (F ren ch ), Assistant Professor
N ORM A B. GRASSO (Spanish), Instructor
M ARCIA ROSE SATIN (Russian), Lecturer
OLGA FER N A N D EZ CONNOR (Spanish), Lecturer
A N N E M ENARD (F rench), Lecturer
ELK E PLAXTON (G erm an), Lecturer
H ELEN P. SHATAGIN (Russian), Lecturer
The purpose of the departmental major is to acquaint students with the im­
portant periods and major figures in the literature of France and other Franco­
phone countries, the German-speaking countries, Russia, Spain and Latin
America, and in the process to develop an appreciation of literary values, to
provide training in critical analysis and foster an understanding of the interplay
between literary phenomena and the historical and cultural forces underlying the
various literary traditions.
Courses numbered IB through 6 are primarily designed to help students ac­
quire the linguistic competence necessary to pursue literary studies in a foreign
language through work with the language and selected literary texts. For a de­
tailed description of the orientation in these courses see the Explanatory Note
on language courses below. Courses numbered 11 or above stress the study of
literature as a humanistic discipline but also have as one of their aims the
achievement of competence in the spoken and written language.
Students planning to major in a foreign language and its literature are ad­
vised to present enough credits (three to four years at the high school level) upon
admission to enable them to register for courses numbered 11 and 12 in their
freshman year or at the very latest by the beginning of the sophomore year. Stu­
dents who enter with no previous knowledge of the language but who are in­
terested in majoring in a foreign literature should register for intensive language
courses (1B-2B) in their freshman year. Language courses numbered IB through
5 do not count toward the minimum of eight courses required for the major.
$Absent on leave, 1971-72.

145

MODERN LANGUAGES
Students who want to continue a language begun elsewhere will be placed at
the course level where they will profit best according to the rating of the College
Entrance Examination or placement tests administered by the department. Stu­
dents who place in courses numbered 1 through 3B must in addition take the
Modern Language Aptitude Test during freshman orientation. Students begin­
ning their study of a foreign language at Swarthmore are also required to take
the Modem Language Aptitude Test.
Prerequisites for majors are noted under the listing of each of the literatures
taught. Exceptions to course requirements are made for those who show compe­
tence in the language specialization. Students who speak French, German, Rus­
sian or Spanish fluently should consult with the department before electing
courses.
Majors are urged (a) to elect supporting courses in other literatures (classical
or modern), History, Philosophy, Linguistics and Art History; (b) to investi­
gate seriously the possibility of spending at least a summer and a semester
abroad. Interested students should request advice concerning timing and assist­
ance of departmental advisers familiar with programs in foreign countries.
Students wishing to receive teaching certificates in French, German, Russian or
Spanish should plan on taking the regular program of language and literature
courses required for the major or show proof of the equivalent. In addition, they
should take Linguistics 1 and courses in the foreign history and culture to pre­
pare them for the MLA Foreign Language Test for Teachers and Advanced Stu­
dents. This examination consists of seven sections: the four basic skills (listen­
ing, speaking, reading and writing), Applied Linguistics, Culture, and Profes­
sional Education. In order to be certified, students must pass this examination at
the level of “good.” Prospective teachers of a foreign language are urged to in­
clude in their program at least a summer and a semester abroad.
Students planning to do graduate work are reminded that, in addition to the
language of specialization, a reading knowledge of other languages is generally
required for admission to advanced studies. Students who need advice concern­
ing the choice of languages should consult with the department.

Continental European Literature
(Courses conducted in English)
Students acquainted with a particular foreign language would do best to elect
the appropriate literature course taught in the original language and not the
corresponding CEL 12 or CEL 50, though they might well take one in another
literature. These courses may be used to satisfy the distribution requirements,
but cannot be substituted for the 11 or 12 level courses in the original languages
to satisfy the departmental prerequisites for a major or minor. The CEL 50s
may in some cases form an appropriate part of the upper-level work in the major
in one of the foreign literatures or serve as the basis of preparation for an Honors
paper. Students planning programs where such considerations would apply must
consult with the department.
CEL 12 and CEL 50 courses will be offered according to the following se­
quence (other CEL courses listed after 50S):
1971-72
Fall
Spring
CEL 12 Spanish
CEL 12 Russian
CEL 50 French
CEL 50 German
146

MODERN LANGUAGES
1972-73
Fall
CEL 12 French
CEL 50 Spanish

Spring
CEL 12 German
CEL 50 Russian

12F. Man and Society in French Literature. An examination of the double
tradition of introspective individualism and deep social concern—and the inevita­
ble conflict between these impulses—in the works of such writers as Montaigne,
Corneille, Molière, Diderot, Stendhal, Balzac and Zola.
Fall semester, 1972.
12G. The Quest for a Tradition in German Literature. A selection of repre­
sentative works written in German-speaking countries from the Middle Ages to
the end of the nineteenth century. Emphasis on the emergence of characteristi­
cally German themes and forms as a response to the influences of historical and
cultural forces and of the European literary tradition. Authors will include Gott­
fried, Grimmelshausen, Lessing, Schiller, Goethe, Büchner, Fontane, and Wede­
kind.
Spring semester, 1973.
12R. Russian Thought and Literature. The development of Russian intellec­
tual traditions as reflected in Russian philosophy and literature from the eigh­
teenth century to the present.
Spring semester, 1972. Mr. Bradley.
12S. Individuality in Spanish Fiction. A study of the struggle of the individual
against the traditionalism of his society in Spanish literature from the Renais­
sance to the twentieth century. Special attention will be given to the figures of
the picaro, la Celestina, Don Juan, Don Quixote and Dona Perfecta.
Fall semester, 1971.
50F. Intellectual Trends in Twentieth Century French Literature. Principal
doctrines (Bergsonism, Surrealism, Marxism, Existentialism, Structuralism) as
reflected in, or related to, the major literary or critical works and essays of
writers such as Proust, Gide, André Breton, Löuis Aragon, Malraux, Sartre,
Camus, de Beauvoir, Roland Barthes, Claude Lévi-Strauss, or others.
For fall semester, 1971, the course will focus on:
Man, Freedom, and Praxis. Primarily an examination of these concepts as treated
in selected literary works or philosophical and political essays by Camus, Sartre,
Simone de Beauvoir, Merleau-Ponty or others. Some attention will be given the
leading French opponents of Existentialist literary and philosophical or political
doctrines.
Mr. Tafoya.
50G. German Literature Since 1900. The reflection in German literature of
the political and cultural crises that have dominated the century. Works by Rilke,
Thomas Mann, Hesse, Kafka, Musil, Broch, Döblin, Brecht, and contemporary
authors.
Spring semester, 1972.
50R. Russian Literature and Revolutionary Thought. A study of continuity
and change; the relationship between the major political and social movements
and the writers before and after 1917. Special attention will be given to the post­
revolutionary literary and political struggle in the 1920’s and the literary revival
of the 1960’s with emphasis on Herzen, Bakunin, Chernyshevsky, Trotsky, Babel,
Olesha, Mayakovsky, Tertz and Solzhenitsyn.
Spring semester, 1973. Mr. Bradley.

147

MODERN LANGUAGES
50S. Spanish Thought and Literature of the Twentieth Century. The struggle
between traditionalism and liberalism, its background and manifestations in
Spanish thought and letters from the turn of the century through the Civil War
to the present day. Emphasis on Unamuno, Ortega y Gasset, Frederico García
Lorca, José Camilo Cela, Carmen Laforet and Juan Goytisolo.
Fall semester, 1972. Mrs. Connor.
13. Medieval Comparative Literature. The tension between ideals and their
realization as reflected in the literature of the Middle Ages, especially the epic
(Roland, Cid, Nibelungen) and the romance (Tristan, Yvain, The Grail).
Spring semester, 1973. Mrs. Perkins.
17. The Age of Enlightenment The intellectual hisory of the late seventeenth
and eighteenth centuries in Europe as illustrated in selected work exemplifying
such important themes as the rise of rationalism and its eventual decline, the
opposing forces of optimism and pessimism, and new views of the nature of man
and his place in society.
Spring semester, 1972. Mrs. Perkins.
20. The German Novel since 1945. A study of intellectual, literary, and
sociological currents in Germany, Austria, and Switzerland since the end of
World War II as reflected in representative works of prose fiction. Authors will
include Thomas Mann, Hesse, Giinter Grass, Max Frisch, and Uwe Johnson.
Fall semester, 1971. Mr. Avery.
34.

Renaissance Comparative Literature. See English Literature 34.

48.

Modem Drama. See English Literature 48.

31.

Chaucer-Dante. See English Literature 31.
E x plan a to ry N o t e

on

F ir st

and

S econd -Y ear L anguage C o u r s e s :

a. Courses numbered 1-2, 3 are designed for students who begin their study
of the language in college and whose primary interest is the acquisition of
reading skills:
1-2 combines the presentation of grammar with readings from the humani­
ties (including literature), social sciences and sciences. Classes meet
three times per week and are conducted in English. May be used to
prepare for fulfilling the reading requirement of graduate schools and
may be followed by an additional semester of courses numbered 3,
but does not prepare students for intermediate or advanced courses in
literature taught in the original language.
Taught in alternate years according to the following schedule:
1971- 72 French 1-2 and German 1-2
1972- 73 Russian 1-2 and Spanish 1-2
3 builds upon 1-2 and is designed for students who want further practice
in extensive reading. Taught in intervening years according to the
schedule listed above but only to satisfy manifest interest. Students
wanting to take the courses must indicate their desire to do so before
spring registration. Course descriptions will be distributed prior to
spring registration.
b. Courses numbered 1B-2B, 3B carry one and one-half credits per semester.
Three semesters in this sequence are equivalent to two years of work at the
college level. Designed to impart an active command of the language and
combine the study or review of grammar essentials and readings of varied
148

M ODERN LANGUAGES
texts with intensive practice to develop the ability to speak the langauge.
Recommended for students who want to progress rapidly and especially for
those with no previous knowledge of the language and who are interested
in preparing for intermediate or advanced courses in literature taught in the
original langauge. Students who start in this orientation can major in a
foreign language and literature not studied previously. These courses
(a) meet as one section for grammar presentation and in small groups for
oral practice with a native speaker of the language, and (b) require
periodic work in the language laboratory.

French
French may be offered as a major in Course or as a major or minor in Honors.
Prerequisites for both Course and Honors students are as follows:
Required: French 6, H and 12; the equivalent, or evidence of special compe­
tence.
Recommended supporting subject: see the introductory departmental statement.
Majors in Course and Honors, as well as minors in Honors, are expected to be
sufficiently proficient in spoken and written French to do all of their work in
French, i.e., discussions and papers in courses and seminars, and all oral and
written examinations, including comprehensive and Honors examinations.
C ourses
N o t e : Not all advanced courses are offered every year. Those announced for
1971-72 guarantee adequate coverage for majors but do not preclude additional
offerings or special arrangements to satisfy manifest interest. Students wishing
to major or minor in French should plan their program in consultation with the
department.

1-2,3. French Reading and Translation. For students who wish to acquire
the fundamentals of French grammar and a reading knowledge of the language.
This is a terminal sequence. See the explanatory note on language courses above.
1-2 is a year course; offered in 1971-72.
1B-2B, 3B. Intensive French: For students who begin French in college.
Designed to impart an active command of the language. Combines the study of
grammar with intensive oral practice, writing, and readings in literary or ex­
pository prose. Admission contingent upon satisfactory score in the Modem
Language Aptitude Test or special permission. See the explanatory note on
language courses above. Normally followed by 6, 11 or 12.
6. Studies in Stylistics. For majors or those who wish an advanced course
to develop self-expression in the written and oral language. Original composi­
tions are based on a stylistic study of texts (by representative French authors)
from the eighteenth century to the present. Generally taught in both fall and
spring semesters.
11. Readings in French Literature. The transition from language learning to
literary study is facilitated through intensive readings in modem French literature
(works by authors such as Beckett, Butor, Camus, Genet, Gide, Sartre or others).
Frequent oral exposés and written compositions as well as extensive readings are
assigned to improve fluency and accuracy in French.
Prerequisite: French 3B, the equivalent, or special permission.
Each semester.
149

MODERN LANGUAGES
12. Introduction to Literary Studies. An analytical approach to French lit­
erature through the study of particular genres or specific modes of expression.
The topic for fall semester 1971 is: La Tradition Comique. The evolution of
French humor as a vehicle for social comment. Selected fictional or dramatic
works from various periods.
Prerequisite: French 11, the equivalent, or a score of 650.
Each semester.
13. Freshman Seminar. For freshmen only. Limited enrollment.
Prerequisite: a score of 675 or above in French, and special permission of the
instructor. The topic for fall semester, 1971 is: Littérateurs Engagés. An ex­
amination of ideas of commitment as exemplified in selected literary works and
essays by Malraux, Sartre, Camus, de Beauvoir, Merleau-Ponty or others.
Fall semester, 1971. Mr. Tafoya.
14. L’Humanisme de la Renaissance. The evolution of French thought from
the optimism of Rabelais to the skepticism of Montaigne as reflected primarily
in the prose works of the Renaissance.
Mrs. Smith.
15. Le Theatre Classique. The development of dramatic techniques in French
drama from the sixteenth century through the age of Classicism. Emphasis on
Corneille, Racine, and Moliere.
Fall semester, 1971. Mrs. Smith.
16. Le Classicisme. The major writers of the seventeenth century,, excluding
the dramatists: Descartes, Pascal, La Fontaine, Boileau, La Rochefoucauld, La
Bruyere, Mme. de La Fayette.
Mrs. Smith.
17. L’Esprit du 18e Siecle. Development of the critical approach in the works
of Montesquieu, Voltaire, Diderot and Rousseau.
Mrs. Perkins.
19. Roman du 19e Siècle. A study of innovations in technique and form as
well as the examination of moral problems arising from socio-political changes in
19th century France. Based primarily on the novels of Balzac, Stendhal, Flaubert
and Zola.
Fall semester, 1971. Mr. Terdiman.
20. Roman du 20e Siecle. A study of aesthetic innovations and of principal
themes in their ideological and sociological context. Readings to be chosen from
the works of authors such as Beckett, Breton, Butor, Camus, Céline, Gide,
Malraux, Queneau, Robbe-Grillet, Sarraute, Sartre or others.
21. Théâtre Moderne. Major trends in twentieth century drama with special
emphasis on the works of Giraudoux, Anouilh, Sartre, Camus, and the Theatre
of the Absurd.
Mr. Roza.
22. Littérature du Moyen-Age. The genesis of the French novel in its relation
to the epic model and its successor. The function of Love and Adventure in the
courtly romance. Emphasis on the Chanson de Roland, the romances of Chrétien
de Troyes and La Quete du Graal.
Mrs. Perkins.
150

MODERN LANGUAGES
23. Poésie Symboiiste. The evolution of symbolist aesthetics from Baudelaire
through Apollinaire. Includes Rimbaud, Mallarmé, Verlaine, LaForgue and
Valéry.
Mr. Roza.
25. Poésie Contemporaine. Major poets after Apollinaire: includes the Sur­
realists (Breton, Reverdy, Éluard, Aragon and Char) as well as Saint-John
Perse, Supervielle and representative poets since World War II (Guillevic hnd
Bonnefoy).
28. La France Contemporaine. A study of events and ideas which have shaped
French society from the nineteenth century to the present. Selected French works
in history, political science, sociology and literature. Emphasis on the evolution
of governmental institutions, the changing educational system, the family, and
the way the French look at themselves and the rest of the world.
Spring semester, 1972. Mrs. Smith.
30. Littérateurs Engages. A study of the literature of commitment before and
after World War II. Principally an examination of the literary manifestations of
French Existentialism. Includes works by Malraux, Sartre, de Beauvoir, Camus
or others.
Mr. Tafoya.
40. Littérature et Négritude. This course is designed to provide interested
students with an introduction to the works of French-speaking African and West
Indian writers. Some emphasis will be placed on the relationship of African
authors to the French literary milieu, on the link between their socio-political
and aesthetic concerns, and finally on their efforts to adjust themes and forms
typical of African vernacular literatures to the tenets of French cultural tradi­
tion. The two major figures to be discussed are Léopold Senghor and Aimé
Césaire.
50. Colloquium. Autobiographic: moi public et moi privé. The various ap­
proaches to autobiographical material: confessional, justificatory, exploratory,
exemplary, and introspective. Works will include St. Augustine, Montaigne,
Rousseau, Chateaubriand, Stendhal, Gide, de Beauvoir and Sartre. Emphasis
will be laid on the play between the individual’s public and private life and his
view of these two spheres. This colloquium will be offered in English. Students
who wish to include it in their French program may do so by doing the reading
and writing in French. Separate discussion groups will be organized if there is
sufficient student interest.
Fall semester, 1971. Mrs. Perkins.
52. Special Topics (for senior majors).
themes or critical problems.
Spring semester, 1972.

Study of individual authors, selected

53. Thesis.
54. Directed Reading.
H

onors

Sem

inars

100. Littérature du Moyen-Age. Old French readings in lyric poetry, theatre
and romance.
Mrs. Perkins.
151

MODERN LANGUAGES
101. La Renaissance. Prose works of Rabelais, Marguerite de Navarre, and
Montaigne. Poetic innovations from Marot through the Pléiade.
Mrs. Smith.
102. Le Théâtre Classique. Corneille, Racine, Moliere.
Mrs. Smith.
103. L’Age des Lumières.
Mrs. Perkins.

Concentrating on Diderot and Rousseau.

104. Stendhal et Flaubert.
Mr. Roza.
105. Proust.
Mr. Terdiman.
106. Poésie Moderne. Baudelaire, Rimbaud, Verlaine, Mallarmé, Claudel,
Valéry.
Fall semester, 1971. Mr. Roza.
108. Le Roman du 20e Siecle.
Mr. Roza.
110. Special Topics. Study of individual authors, selected themes or critical
problems not included in the regular program to satisfy the interest of students
and instructors.
Each semester.
112. Thesis.
N o t e : Some seminars treat the same subjects as the courses, but the reading
required in both texts and critical material is more extensive. The work of a
seminar corresponds to two courses.

German
German may be offered as a major in Course or as a major or minor in
Honors. Prerequisites for both Course and Honors students are as follows:
Required: German 11 or 12, or equivalent work.
Recommended supporting subjects: see the introductory departmental state­
ment.
Majors are expected to speak German with sufficient fluency to take part in
discussion in courses and seminars in the language and to pass oral examinations
in German.
N o t e : Not all advanced courses or seminars are offered every year. Students
wishing to major or minor in German should plan their program in consultation
with the department.
C

ourses

1-2,3. German Reading and Translation. For students who wish to acquire
the fundamentals of German grammar and a reading knowledge of the language.
This is a terminal sequence. See the explanatory note on language courses above.
1-2 is a year course; offered in 1971-72.

152

MODERN LANGUAGES
1B-2B, 3B. Intensive German. For students who begin German in college.
Designed to impart an active command of the language. Combines the study
of grammar with intensive oral practice, writing, and readings in literary or
expository prose. Admission contingent upon satisfactory score in the Modem
Language Aptitude Test or special permission. See the explanatory note on
language courses above. Normally followed by 6,11 or 12.
4. Intermediate German. For entering students with high school language
training and for whom the “B” sequences or German 6 would not be appropriate.
Review of grammar, literary readings of moderately difficult texts, such as
Hesse’s Knulp, Brecht’s Kalendergeschichten, Dürrenmatt’s Der Besuch der alten
Dame, and Kafka’s Der Landarzt; poems and examples of expository prose.
Normally followed by German 6 or 11 in spring semester. Admission contingent
upon departmental testing or permission of the instructor.
Fall semester, 1971. Mr. Mautner.
6. Writing and Speaking German. Oral discussions and writing practice based
on general and literary topics of contemporary interest. For students who want
to consolidate their skills of expression.
Prerequisite: German 3B or 4; the equivalent, or permission of the instructor.
Fall semester, 1971. Miss Cohn.
11. Introduction to German Literature (19th and early 20th centuries). A
study of representative prose fiction, poetry, and drama from the German Ro­
mantics to Kafka. Discussion, papers. Not a survey course.
Prerequisite: German 3B or 4; the equivalent, or permission of the instructor.
12. Introduction to German Literature (Goethe and his Age). A study of
works by Lessing, Goethe, and Schiller. Discussion, papers. Not a survey course.
Prerequisite: German 3B or 4\ the equivalent, or permission of the instructor.
14. Goethes Faust, Erster und Zweiter Teil. An intensive study of Faust,
I and II. Also for students who only know Faust, Part One.
Spring semester, 1972. Mr. Mautner.
15. Die Deutsche Romantik. Also taught as a seminar. See German 105 below.
Mr. Avery.
16. Die Deutsche Novelle seit Goethe. Also taught as a seminar. See German
110 below.
Miss Cohn.
17. Moderne Deutsche Literatur. A study of leading German writers of the
twentieth century, including Hauptmann, Thomas Mann, Rilke, Hofmannsthal,
Kafka.
Miss Cohn.
18. Studies in German Poetry. Also taught as a seminar. See German 111
below.
Mr. Mautner.
20. Die Deutsche Komödie. Also taught as a seminar. See German 109
below.
Mr. Mautner.
153

MODERN LANGUAGES
21. Kafka und Brecht. A study of the principal works of each author with
stress on the interpretation of major themes and the examination of literary
craftsmanship. Includes consideration of the cultural and social environment in
which the works were written.
Mr. Avery.
30. Herman Hesse. A study of the central themes and the development of
narrative technique in Hesse’s novels. Works to be examined will include:
Knulp, Demian, Siddhartha, Der Stepenwolf, and Die Morgenlandfahrt. Pre­
requisite: German 11 or 12. Meets IV2 class hours per week. Offered by special
arrangement. Half-course.
Mr. Avery.
50-51. Colloquium. Offered from time to time in response to student and
faculty interests. Devoted to an intensive examination of subjects or topics not
covered in the regular program. Enrollment is limited and subject to depart­
mental approval.
52. Special Topics (For senior majors). Study of individual authors, selected
themes or critical problems.
H

onors

Sem

inars

103. Deutsches Barock und Aufklaerung. A study of German literature in
the seventeenth and early eighteenth centuries. The lyric poetry of the period,
the mysticism of Angelus Silesius and Jakob Böhme, the plays of Gryphius, and
the prose of Grimmelshausen; a study of Lessing.
104. Goethe. Goethe’s most significant works and his role in German intel­
lectual history will be studied.
Fall semester, 1971. Mr. Mautner.
105. Die Deutsche Romantik. Romanticism as the dominant movement in
German literature, thinking, and the arts of the first third of the nineteenth
century. Authors: Hölderin, Novalis, Tieck, Büchner, Brentano, Eichendorff.
Spring semester, 1972. Mr. Avery.
107. Moderne Prosa. The development of German prose fiction since 1900 as
reflected in works by Schnitzler. Hofmannsthal, Rilke, Mann, Kafka, Döblin
and Grass.
Mr. Avery.
108. Das Deutsche Drama. Representative examples of the dramatic genre
in German literature from the end of the eighteenth century to the present.
109. Die Deutsche Komödie. Outstanding comedies from Goethe to the
present time will be studied in their own right, as examples of the genre, and
as illustrations of German intellectual history.
110. Die Deutsche Novelle. A study of significant examples of this typically
German genre. Authors: Goethe, Eichendorff, Kleist, Stifter, Keller, Thomas
Mann, and contemporary writers.
Miss Cohn.
111. Studies in German Poetry. A study of selected examples of German
poetry from the Baroque period to the present time. The interrelation of Aussage,
Gehalt und Gestalt.
154

MODERN LANGUAGES
112. Modemes Drama und Lyrik des XX. Jahrhunderts. The emergence of
modem trends as reflected primarily in the poetic and dramatic works of
Hauptmann, George, Hofmannsthal, Rilke, Trakl, Stemheim, Benn and Brecht.
Miss Cohn.

Russian
Russian may be offered as a major in Course or as a major or minor in Honors.
Prerequisites for both Course and Honors students are as follows:
Required: Russian 11, 12 and 13, or evidence of equivalent work.
Recommended supporting subjects: see the introductory departmental state­
ment.
C

ourses

Not all advanced courses or seminars are offered every year. Students wishing
to major or minor in Russian should plan their program in consultation with
the department.
1-2, 3. Russian Reading and Translation. For students who wish to acquire the
fundamentals of Russian grammar and a reading knowledge of the language.
The first year will be devoted primarily to grammar and the third semester to
reading and translation. (Refer to the explanatory note on language courses
above).
Not offered in 1971-72.
1B-2B, 3B. Intensive Russian. For students who begin Russian in college.
Designed to impart an active command of the language. Combines the study
of grammar with intensive oral practice, writing, and readings in literary or
expository prose. Admission contingent upon satisfactory score in the Modern
Language Aptitude Test or special permission. See the explanatory note on lan­
guage courses above. Normally followed by 6 and 12.
5, 6. Advanced Russian. For majors and those primarily interested in per­
fecting their command of language. Advanced conversation, composition, trans­
lation and stylistics. Readings of dramas and newspapers. Conducted in Russian.
11. Introduction to Literature. A survey of Russian literature from eighteenth
century Classicism through the Romantic period to the emergence of Russian
Realism. Emphasis on Pushkin, Lermontov, Gogol, Turgenev, Dostoevsky, and
Tolstoy. Readings and class discussions in Russian.
12. Introduction to Literature. A survey of Russian prose and poetry from
the later nineteenth century through the post-revolutionary period. Consideration
of representative works and new literary movements. Writings of Garshin,
Chekhov, Blok, Zamyatin, Babel, Pasternak, Akhmatova, and Solzhenitsyn will
be read and discussed in Russian.
13. Russian Novel. Lectures and reading in English. The Russian majors
will be required to read a part of the material in Russian.
14. Poetry and Poetics. A study of the major literary theories and movements
from the late nineteenth century through the post-revolutionary period with
emphasis on Symbolism, Russian Formalism, and Futurism. Readings in Rus­
sian. Lectures and discussion in English.
52. Special Topics. (For senior majors).
themes or critical problems.

Study of individual authors, selected
155

MODERN LANGUAGES
H

on ors

S

em inars

101. Tolstoy.
102. Russian Short Story.
103.

Pushkin and Lermontov.

104.

Dostoevsky.

105.

Literature of the Soviet Period.

107.

Russian Lyrical Poetry.

108.

Modem Russian Poetry.

Spanish
Spanish may be offered as a major in Course or as a major or minor in
Honors. Prerequisites for both Course and Honors students are as follows:
Required: Spanish 11 and 12, or equivalent work.
Recommended supporting subjects: see the introductory departmental state­
ment.
Majors are expected to speak Spanish with sufficient fluency to take part in dis­
cussion in courses and seminars in the language and to pass all oral compre­
hensive or oral Honors examinations in Spanish.
N o t e : Not all advanced courses are offered every year. Those announced for
1971-72 and 1972-73, guarantee adequate coverage for majors but do not pre­
clude adidtional offerings or special arrangements to satisfy manifest interest.
Students wishing to major or minor in Spanish should plan their program in con­
sultation with the department.
C

ourses

1-2, 3. Spanish Reading and Translation. For students who wish to acquire
the fundamentals of Spanish grammar and a reading knowledge of the language.
This is a terminal sequence. See the explanatory note on language courses above.
Not offered in 1971-72.
1B-2B, 3B. Intensive Spanish. For students who begin Spanish in college.
Designed to impart an active command of the language. Combines the study of
grammar with intensive oral practice, writing, and readings in literary or ex­
pository prose. Admission contingent upon satisfactory score in the Modem
Language Aptitude Test or special permission. See the explanatory note on
language courses above. Normally followed by 6,11 or 12.
5. 6. Composition and Diction. For majors and others who wish advanced
courses in which the emphasis is not primarily literary. An effort is made to
correct faulty pronunciation and to improve self-expression in the language
both oral and written.
II. Introduction to Spanish Literature. A study of representative prose fiction,
poetry and drama of the nineteenth and twentieth centuries (works by authors
such as Espronceda, Zorrilla, Bécquer, Pérez Galdós, Unamuno, Baroja, Lorca,
etc.). Discussion, papers.
Prerequisite: Spanish 3B, the equivalent, or special permission.
156

MODERN LANGUAGES
12. Introduction to Spanish Literature. A study of representative prose fiction,
poetry and drama from the later Middle Ages through the Golden Century
(authors to be read include: Jorge Manrique, Romances, Cervantes, Lope de
Vega, Calderón, Quevedo, etc.) Discussion, papers.
Prerequisite: Spanish 3B, the equivalent, or special permission.
N o t e : Spanish 11 and 12, the equivalent, or consent of instructor, are pre­
requisite for the courses in literature that follow.

20. La Literatura Medieval. From the Poema del Cid to La Celestina. Also
included are works by Gonzalo de Berceo, Don Juan Manuel, el Arcipreste de
Hita, and Jorge Manrique.
Fall semester, 1972.
21. El Teatro del Renacimiento y del Siglo de Oro. Special emphasis will be
placed on the outstanding dramatists of the Golden Century (Lope de Vega,
Tirso de Molina, Ruiz de Alarcón, Calderón, etc.).
Spring semester, 1972. Mrs. Asensio.
23. La Poesía del Renacimiento y del Siglo de Oro. From the Romancero
through the Baroque. Special emphasis on Garcilaso de la Vega, Herrera, Fray
Luis de León, San Juan de la Cruz, Lope de Vega, Quevedo and Góngora.
Spring semester, 1973.
24. Cervantes. The works of Cervantes with special emphasis on the Quijote.
Fall semester, 1971. Mrs. Asensio.
26. La Novela en el Siglo XIX. Realism and Naturalism in nineteenth century
prose fiction. Works by Alarcón, Valera, Pérez Galdós, Pardo Bazán, Clarín,
Blasco Ibáñez and others.
27. La Generación del 98. Studies in the works of Valle-Inclán, Azorín,
Baroja, Unamuno, Benavente and Antonio Machado.
Fall semester, 1972.
28. Literatura Española Contemporánea. Major figures of the twentieth cen­
tury not covered in Spanish 27: Juan Ramón Jiménez, García Lorca, Alberti,
Salinas, Guillén, Hernández, Hierro and Aleixandre among the poets; novels by
Cela and Goytisolo; the theater of Casona and Sastre.
Spring semester, 1973.
29. Literatura Hispanoamericana. The nineteenth-century realistic novel,
modernism and the post-modernist novel. Representative works of authors such
as Rubén Darío, Silva, Rodó, Lugones, Chocano, Rivera, Gallegos, Azuela, or
others.
Spring semester, 1972. Miss Grasso.
30. La Poesía Hispanoamericana en el Siglo XX. A study of the poetry of
Mistral, Agustini, Ibarbourou, Storni, Vallejo, Huidobro, Gorostiza, Paz,
Nicolás Guillén, Neruda, Borges, and others.
31. La Novela Hispanoamericana en el Siglo XX. Works by Mallea, Sábato,
Cortázar, Carpentier, Asturias, Rojas, Vargas Llosa, Rulfo, Fuentes, García
Márquez or others.
Fall semester, 1971. Miss Grasso.
157

MODERN LANGUAGES
50-51. Colloquium. Offered for double credit and devoted to the intensive
investigation of subjects or topics not covered by the regular program. Enroll­
ment is limited and subject to departmental approval.
52. Special Topics (for senior majors).
themes or critical problems.
H

onors

Sem

Study of individual authors, selected

inars

108. Las Obras de Cervantes.
109. La Generación del 98: Valle-Iuclan, Azorin, Baroja, Unamuno, Maeztu,
Benavente, Antonio Machado.
110.

Literatura Española Contemporánea.

111.

La Poesía Hispanoamericana en el Siglo XX.

112.

La Novela Hispanoamericana en el Siglo XX.

113.

La Teatro del Renacimiento y del Siglo de Oro.

114. La Poesía del Renacimiento y del Siglo de Oro.
N o t e : Some seminars treat the same subject as the courses, but reading re­
quired in both texts and critical material is more extensive. The work of a seminar
corresponds to that of two courses.

M USIC
PETER GRAM SW ING, Professor and Chairman
JAMES D. FR EEM A N , Assistant Professor
DAVID H. STEINBROOK, Instructor
JA N E STRONG O’LEARY, Lecturer
G ILBERT KALISH, Associate in Performance
ROBERT M. SMART, Associate in Performance
PA U L ZUKOFSKY, Associate in Performance
The study of music as a liberal art requires an integrated approach to theory,
history and performance, experience iii all three fields being essential to the un­
derstanding of music as an artistic and intellectual achievemet. Theory courses
and seminars train the student to work with musical material, to understand
modes of organization in composition and to evolve methods of musical analy­
sis. History courses and seminars introduce students to methods of studying the
development of musical styles and genres, and the relationship of music to
other arts and areas of thought. The department encourages students to develop
performing skills through private study and through participation in the orches­
tra, chorus and chamber music coaching program which it staffs and administers.
Scholarships are available to assist music majors who are talented instrumen­
talists or singers finance the cost of private instruction.
Students wishing to combine instrumental or vocal studies outside the College
with a major in music at Swarthmore can, with special permission from the de­
partment and the provost, elect a five-year plan of study, thus reducing the
normal number of courses to be taken per semester.
Two semester courses in theory and one semester course in history are pre158

M U SIC
requisite for acceptance as a major. Majors will normally take six semester
courses in theory (including Music 61-62), four semester courses in history
(including Music 15, 16), and meet the basic piano requirement.
Major in Honors: A student intending to major in Honors will generally stand
for four papers in music. The department strongly recommends that one paper
be a thesis or research project. Music 61-62, required of all majors, may be used
as the basis of a paper. Papers in history can be prepared by tutorial, by seminar
or by taking a history course with a concurrent or subsequent attached unit of
additional research.
Minors in Honors: A student intending to minor in Honors will generally
stand for two papers in music. Two semester courses in theory and one semester
course in history are prerequisite for a minor. Music 1 may, with permission of
the department, be substituted for the theory prerequisite.
Language Requirements for Graduate Schools: Students are advised that gradu­
ate work in music requires a reading knowledge of French and German. A
reading knowledge of Latin is also desirable for students planning to do gradu­
ate work in musicology.
Proficiency on an instrument: All majors in music will be expected to play a
keyboard instrument well enough to perform at sight a two-part invention of
J. S. Bach and a first movement of an easy late 18th or early 19th century sonata.
By the end of the junior year they should be able to read chamber music scores,
vocal music in four clefs, and realize figured basses. The department recom­
mends that majors take one or two semesters of Music 39 to develop these skills.
Students with exceptional proficiency in an instrument other than the piano, or
in singing, will not be expected to meet the performing standards of pianists.
The basic piano program: This program is designed to develop keyboard pro­
ficiency to a point where a student can effectively use the piano as a tool for
study, also to help students meet the keyboard requirements outlined above.
It is open to freshmen and sophomores planning to major in music. No aca­
demic credit is given for basic piano.
C redit

for

P

erformance

A student who has taken Music 1, Music 11-12, or Music 13-14 (or who has
equivalent prior training) has the option to receive credit for study of an instru­
ment or voice, participation in the department’s chamber music coaching pro­
gram, participation in the Swarthmore College Orchestra, and participation in
the Swarthmore College Chorus. The amount of credit received will normally be
a half-course in any one semester, and will usually be granted only to students
participating for a full year in a particular activity. Students applying for credit
will be given an audition at the beginning of the semester and will fulfill re­
quirements established for each activity, i.e., regular attendance at rehearsals
and performances and participation in any supplementary classes held in con­
nection with the activity. Students will be graded on a credit/no credit basis.
A student applying for credit for study of an instrument or voice will first
demonstrate to the department his ability to undertake such study at least at an
intermediate level. He will arrange to work with a teacher of his choice, subject
to approval of the department. The department will then supervise the course
of study in any semester for which credit is to be given. The teacher will submit
a written report of the student’s work at the close of the semester to be used by
the department in making its evaluation. The department may use public per­
formance or a final audition as additional evidence for evaluating work. The
College does not undertake to pay for instruction; the student is expected to
make his own financial arrangements directly with the teacher.
159

M U SIC
C

ourses

and

Sem

in ars

All seminars are open to qualified Course students.
1. Introduction to Music. A course combining study of the materials of music
(including fundamentals) with training in listening and analysis. Students will
work with a selected repertory of compositions from different eras. The course
assumes no prior training in music.
Open to all students without prerequisite.
Fall semester. Mr. Freeman.
Spring semester. Mr. Swing.
note:

Theory and Com position
11-12. First Year Theory. A course in elementary tonal theory offering basic
training in harmony and counterpoint. Emphasis will be placed on written
exercises along with ear-training, dictation and keyboard harmony. Frequent
reference will be made to a variety of keyboard and chamber compositions
which will be carefully analyzed.
Year course. Miss Strong.
13-14. Second Year Theory. A continuation of Music 11-12.
Year course. Mr. Steinbrook.
61-62. Third Year Theory. A continuation of Music 13-14 covering special­
ized areas of harmony, counterpoint and analysis.
Year course. Mr. Steinbrook.
63-64. Advanced Theory.
Year course. Mr. Steinbrook.

History of M usic
15. Introduction to the History of Music (I). Topics in music of the Middle
Ages and the Renaissance, with emphasis given to the analysis and performance
of selected compositions. This course is concerned with studying the relationship
of music to the art and thought of the times, and the function of music in the
Roman Catholic liturgy.
Prerequisite: Music 1 (or the equivalent).
Fall semester. Mr. Swing.
16. Introduction to the History of Music (II). Topics in music of the 17th,
18th and 19th centuries. In 1971-72 the course will be concerned with a study of
orchestral music and with the development, expansion, and eventual decay of
the orchestra as a primary compositional medium.
Spring semester. Mr. Freeman.
22. Contemporary Music. An examination of a selected group of composi­
tions. Rather than attempt a survey based on stylistic considerations, or an
aesthetic evaluation, the course will deal with the analysis of individual solutions
to common compositional problems.
Spring semester. Mr. Steinbrook.
27. J. S. Bach. A study of representative compositions (including the Mass in
B minor and the Passion according to St. Matthew) coordinated with readings
160

M U SIC
in primary and secondary sources. A reading knowledge of German is desirable,
but not essential.
Open to students with permission of the instructor.
Not offered in 1971-72. Mr. Swing.
32. History of the String Quartet. This course traces the development of the
string quartet from the middle of the 18th century to the present through study
and (whenever possible) performance of selected works.
Open to students with permission of the instructor.
Not offered in 1971-72. Mr. Swing.
40. Analysis, Research, Performance. An examination of the relevances of
analytical and historical research to intelligent performance through study of
selected compositions. Ability to perform instrumentally or vocally is required,
though it need not have reached an exceptionally skilled level.
Fall semester. Mr. Freeman.
42. Lieder. A study, through performance and analysis, of various solutions
by various composers to the problems of relating text and music. Students
should be moderately proficient either as singers or as pianists. A knowledge of
German is required.
Spring semester. Mr. Freeman.
70. Senior Reading and Research.
Staff.
71-72. Senior Thesis.
Fall and spring semesters.

Staff.

91. Tutorial.
Staff.

Special work in composition, theory, or history.

H

inars

onors

Sem

101. The Sixteenth Century Parody Mass. An investigation of parody as a
concept and as a technique of composition, giving particular attention to Masses
by different composers on the same model.
Spring semester. Mr. Swing.
103. Early Nineteenth Century Romanticism. A study of the origins and
rationale of musical Romanticism in the first half of the nineteenth century.
A reading knowledge of French or German will be very helpful.
Not offered in 1971-72. Mr. Freeman.
171. Senior Thesis.
Fall and spring semesters.

Staff.

191. Tutorial.
Staff.
P

erformance

n o t e : All performance courses are for half-course credit per semester. See
p. 62 and p. 159 for general provisions governing work in performance under
the provisions for Creative Arts.

161

M U SIC
34. Performance (chamber music).
Both semesters. Mr. Kalish, Mr. Zukofsky and staff.
35. Performance (orchestra).
Both semesters. Mr. Freeman.
36. Performance (chorus).
Both semesters. Mr. Swing.
37. Individual Instruction.
Both semesters.
39. Figured Bass and Score Reading.
Both semesters. Mr. Smart.

PHILOSOPHY
JO H N M. MOORE, Professor
D A N IEL BENNETT, Associate Professor
H U G H L. LACEY, Associate Professor**
HANS OBERDIEK, Associate Professor
CHARLES R A FF, Assistant Professor and Acting Chairman
RICHARD SCH U LD EN FREI, Assistant Professor
RICH A RD SHARVY, Assistant Professor
U W E H EN K E, InstructorX
RICHARD J. BERNSTEIN, Visiting Lecturer**
G ILM O R E STOTT, Lecturer
Students majoring in philosophy must complete at least one course or seminar
in each of these areas: (1) Logic, (2) Ancient or Modern Philosophy, and (3)
Moral or Social Philosophy. Prospective majors should complete the Logic re­
quirement as early as possible. Mastery of at least one foreign language is
strongly recommended. Students majoring in Course are required to write a
senior thesis.
1. Introduction to Philosophy. Methods of philosophical investigation are in­
troduced through discussion of typical philosophical problems, such as: the
problem of freedom, the arguments for the existence of God, the nature of logic
and mathematics, the sources and limits of human knowledge, the justification
of moral judgments. Readings include classical and current sources.
Introduction to Philosophy is a prerequisite for all other philosophy courses
except Logic.
Each semester. The staff.
1A. Freshman Seminar in Moral Philosophy. A seminar open only to fresh­
men, an alternative to Philosophy 1. Enrollment limited to eight students, chosen
by lot from those interested.
Fall semester. Mr. Stott.
10. The Nature and Methods of Inquiry. From the perspectives of their
$Absent on leave, 1971-72.
♦♦Spring semester, 1971-72.

162

PHILOSOPHY
fields the instructors in this course will explain and critically examine the
methodological foundations of the various disciplines they represent. At the
same time an attempt will be made to compare and relate methodology and
substantive problems of different disciplines with the goal of arriving at a co­
herent view of scientific inquiry. The emphasis given to different disciplines will
vary depending on the composition of the staff.
Not offered in 1971-72. Interdepartmental staff.
11. Ethics. A study of the principal theories about value and moral obligation,
and of their.justification. The emphasis is systematic, but works of leading ethical
philosophers, both classical and contemporary, will be read as illustrations of
the major theories.
Each semester. Mr. Oberdiek or Mr. Stott.
12. Logic. An introduction to the principles of deductive logic with equal
emphasis on the syntactic and semantic aspects of logical systems. Topics include
the notions of logical truth, logical consequence, and proof. Some attention is
given to the development of axiomatic theories and selected topics in the philoso­
phy of logic.
Fall semester. Mr. Sharvy.
13. Selected Modern Philosophers. A history of modern philosophy is pre­
sented through the metaphysical and epistemological problems common to Des­
cartes, Leibniz, Spinoza, Locke, Berkeley, Hume and Kant. One or more of
these philosophers may be selected for separate and detailed examination. As the
content varies from year to year, the department may permit students to take this
course twice. This year the course will concentrate on Berkeley and Leibniz.
Spring semester. Mr. Sharvy.
14. Ancient Philosophy. The analysis of selected topics in Plato and Aris­
totle. Primary attention is given to problems in epistemology, metaphysics, and
the philosophy of logic.
Spring semester. Not offered in 1971-72. Mr. Sharvy.
16. Philosophy of Religion. The nature of religion; the psychology and in­
terpretation of religious experience; the problem of religious knowledge; the
validity and difficulties of Christian theology and ethics. (Also listed as Religion
16.)
Fall semester. Mr. Bennett.
17. Aesthetics. An examination of problems like representation, meaning,
structure, form and content, piece and performance, and abstraction as they
arise in describing, perceiving, interpreting and constructing works of art. Read­
ings from Aristotle, Kant, Husserl, Goodman, Boretz, and others.
Fall semester. Mr. Sharvy.
18. Philosophy of the Social Sciences. Philosophical problems that arise in
the application of scientific methods to human behavior; i.e., problems concern­
ing concepts, laws, theories, values, explanation and prediction in the social
sciences and history; and the differences and similarities between social and
natural science.
Fall semester. Not offered in 1971-72.
19. Medieval Philosophy. See Religion 19.
Fall semester. Not offered in 1971-72. Mr. Urban.
163

P H IL O S O P H Y
20. Existentialism and Religious Belief.
Spring semester. Mr. Urban.

See Religion 20.

21. Social and Political Philosophy. An analysis of conceptual and moral
problems that socio-political life poses for many.
Not offered in 1971-72.
22. American Philosophy. A critical examination of selected major American
philosophers, such as Peirce, James, Dewey, Quine, and Goodman, and their
contributions to such philosophical traditions as Pragmatism and Positivism.
This year the course will focus on the response to Positivism by Quine and
Goodman, with an emphasis on analyzing their metaphysical and epistemo­
logical positions.
Fall semester. Mr. Schuldenfrei.
23. Contemporary Philosophy. A study of current attempts to resolve funda­
mental philosophical issues. Readings include articles and books by major 20th
century philosophers, such as G. E. Moore, Bertrand Russell, and Ludwig
Wittgenstein.
Fall semester. Mr. Raff.
24. Epistemology. The analysis of some problems about knowledge and be­
lief, such as: the justification of beliefs and its connections to the justification of
actions, the definition of knowledge, the possibility of a priori knowledge, the
nature of perception, an assessment of rationalism, pragmatism, and empiricism.
Readings from both classical and current sources.
Spring semester. Mr. Schuldenfrei
25. Advanced Logic. Topics selected from the areas of deductive logic, in­
ductive logic, the logic of decision and choice, modal and tense logic, model
theory, algebraic logic, etc.
Spring semester, alternate years. Not offered 1971-72.
26. Philosophy of Language. Topics include the objectivity of meaning, the
determinacy of translation, language and ontology, logical grammar, the nature
of propositions, category mistakes, the notion of grammaticality, and some philo­
sophical implications of recent work in linguistics. Readings from Aristotle,
Augustine, William of Sherwood, Frege, Russell, Geach, Quine, and Chomsky.
Philosophy 12 or Linguistics 1 recommended.
Spring semester. Mr. Sharvy.
27. Metaphysics. This course will examine such topics as Universal and
Particular, Abstract and Concrete, Essence and Accident, Physical Object and
Event, Space, Time and Causation.
Philosophy 12 recommended.
Spring semester. Mr. Bennett.
28. Marxist Philosophy. An introduction to the philosophy of Marx, Engels
and Lenin. Based on the major writings of these philosophers, the course will
begin with a systematic exposition of the fundamental concepts of Marxist
social, economic and political theory. Then, in keeping with Marx’s conception
of the intimate connection between social analysis and social philosophy, an
attempt will be made to deepen the understanding of certain theoretical concepts
(alienation, consciousness, etc.) by applying them in the analysis of selected
contemporary social problems.
Fall semester. Not offered in 1971-72. Mr. Henke.
164

P H IL O S O P H Y
29. Philosophy of Mind. Concepts of mind will be explored with special
attention given to the mind-body problem and the nature of motive, intention,
and human action. Readings from both historical and contemporary sources.
Fall semester. Not offered in 1971-72. Mr. Oberdiek.
30. The Philosophy of Education. The idea of education in philosophy, and
the implications of philosophical and psychological theories for educational
practice. Readings may include: Plato, Rousseau, Kant, Tolstoy, Dewey, James,
Whitehead, Montessori, Skinner, Piaget, Neill, Laing, and McLuhan.
Not offered in 1971-72.
31. Religion and Ethics. The perennial problems of ethics and their relation­
ship to religious perspectives. Attention will be given to the analysis of moral
and religious discourse. Both classical and contemporary authors will be
examined.
Prerequisite: Philosophy 1 or Religion course numbered 3 through 6, or the
consent of the instructors. (Also listed as Religion 31.)
Fall semester. Mr. Oberdiek and Mr. Urban.
34. 19th Century Philosophy. Topics or systems are selected for intensive
treatment from Continental, British or American Philosophy; this year: the
philosophy of Hegel.
Spring semester. Mr. Bernstein.
37. History of Science. A survey of the development of physics and astron­
omy in the sixteenth and seventeenth centuries, emphasizing the nature of the
scientific revolution, the revolt against Aristotle, the new role of mathematics
within science, the role of experiment, and the gradual development of con­
cepts of mass, force, universal gravitation, and the heliocentric universe. The
philosophical and sociological origins of the scientific revolution will also
be studied. Readings are drawn mainly from the writings of Copernicus, Kepler,
Galileo, Descartes, and Newton.
Spring semester. Mr. Lacey.
38. Philosophy of Science. The focus of the course is on recent systematic
attempts to solve certain major and related problems concerning science. Among
these problems are distinguishing scientific from non-scientific bases for the
acceptance or rejection of claims, determining the proper field for scientific
inquiry, and determining the foundation of scientific knowledge.
Spring semester. Not offered in 1971-72. Mr. Lacey.
50. Directed Reading.
Each semester. The staff.
51. Thesis. Required for majors in Course.
Fall semester. The staff.
60-61. Colloquium: Legal and Political Philosophy. A study of concepts of
law, including examination of the relationships between legal systems and other
social and political institutions. Such issues as the proper relationship between
law and morality, civil disobedience, legal enforcement of morality, and justifi­
cations of punishment are considered. Readings in both historical and con­
temporary sources.
Not offered in 1971-72. Mr. Oberdiek.
165

P H IL O S O P H Y
63-64. Colloquium: Philosophy of the Social Sciences. This colloquium will
concentrate on philosophical anthropology. It will consider some different con­
ceptions of man which have been important historically or are of contemporary
relevance, such as those of B. F. Skinner, Freud, Dewey, Durkheim, and Marx.
The different conceptions will be examined with special emphasis on their
implications for social organization and the nature and possibility of human
happiness.
Fall semester. Mr. Schuldenfrei.
H

onors

Sem

in ars

101. Moral Philosophy. An examination of the principal theories about value
and moral obligation, and of their justification; of the concepts of justice and
human rights; of the implications for ethics of different theories about the free­
dom of the will. Works of representative theorists, both classical and con­
temporary, will be read.
Spring semester. Mr. Oberdiek.
102. Ancient Philosophy. The development of Greek thought in ethics, meta­
physics, logic and science, with special attention to Plato and Aristotle. Empha­
sis is given to tracing the emergence of distinctively philosophical and scientific
methods, and the relation of these methods to contemporary techniques.
Spring semester. Mr. Bennett.
103. Modern Philosophy. Metaphysical and epistemological problems about
the nature of minds and bodies, the varieties of knowledge and freedom, are
approached through the philosophical systems of Descartes, Spinoza, Leibniz,
Locke, Berkeley, Hume, Reid, Kant.
Spring semester. Mr. Raff.
104. Contemporary Philosophy. Some current philosophical problems are
investigated in light of the work of Bradley, Moore, Wittgenstein, and the most
recent contributions.
Fall semester. Mr. Raff.
105. Philosophy of Science. A consideration of the nature of scientific in­
quiry through a study of its fundamental concepts, among them theory, evidence,
explanation, causation, induction. Emphasis will also be given to the distinc­
tions between empirical and non-empirical science and between scientific and
non-scientific inquiry.
Fall semester. Not offered in 1971-72. Mr. Lacey.
106. Aesthetics. A systematic examination of the philosophy of art. (See
Course 17).
Fall semester.
107. Logic. This seminar will examine selected topics in technical logic which
are of philosophic importance, such as predicate logics with identity, modal
logic, tense logic, algebraic logic, and formal properties of deductive systems,
e.g., consistency, decidability, and completeness. Some non-standard logics may
be studies and compared.
Spring semester. Mr. Lacey.
108. Foundations and Philosophy of Mathematics. This seminar will aim at
developing the major results in selected areas in metamathematics and the
foundations of mathematics. Topics may include the development of Godel’s
incompleteness theorem, recursive function theory, axiomatic set theory, non166

PH IL O SO PH Y
standard analysis, and the consistency and independence of the axiom of choice
and of the continuum hypothesis.
Not offered in 1971-72. Mr. Henke.
109. Metaphysics. The logical analysis of problems and theories about time,
change, form, matter, essence, substance, identity and universals. Readings from
such philosophers as Aristotle, Leibniz, McTaggart, Russell and Quine.
Fall semester. Not offered in 1971-72. Mr. Sharvy.
110. Medieval Philosophy. See Religion 110.
Fall semester. Not offered in 1971-72. Mr. Urban.
111. Philosophy of Religion. Current techniques of philosophical analysis are
brought to bear on the philosophical issues raised by religious belief and
experience.
Fall semester. Mr. Bennett.
112. Philosophy of Mind. Concepts of mind will be explored with special
attention given to the mind-body problem and the nature of human action. Read­
ings from both historical and contemporary sources.
Fall semester. Not offered in 1971-72. Mr. Oberdiek
113. Epistemology. The seminar will concern itself primarily with the prob­
lem of the sources of knowledge and the problem of justifying belief.
Fall semester.
114. Hegel.
Mr. Bennett.
115. Language and Thought

See Linguistics 107.

117. Philosophy of the Social Sciences. Philosophical problems that arise in
the application of scientific methods to human behavior (see Course 18). The
discussion will focus on the nature of human action.
Spring semester.
120. Thesis. A thesis may be submitted by majors in the department in place
of one Honors paper, upon application by the student and at the discretion of
the department.

167

PH Y SIC A L E D U C A T IO N
FOR MEN
W ILLIS J. STETSON, Professor o f Physical Education
fo r M en and Director o f Athletics
GOM ER DAVIES, Associate Professor
LEWIS H. ELVERSON, Associate Professor
ERN EST J. PRU D EN TE, Associate Professor
W ILLIAM C. B. CULLEN, Assistant Professor
DOUGLAS M. WEISS, Instructor
BROOKE P. COTTMAN, Assistant
H EN R Y C. FORD, Assistant
JA CK HOUTZ, Assistant
JOSEPH LEITNER, Assistant
JAMES J. McADOO, Assistant
ROBERT McCOACH, Assistant
C. J. STEFANOW ICZ, Assistant
ED G A R TOWNSLEY, Assistant
JO H N P. UDOVICH, Assistant
A N D REW J. ZACHORCHEM NY, Assistant
DR. MORRIS A. BOWIE, College Physician
DR. HAROLD C. ROXBY, Team Physician
The course in Men’s Physical Education is designed to promote an aware­
ness of one’s physical well being through a regular exercise program. In addi­
tion the learning of new sports skills and the improvement of previously learned
ones is achieved by planned instructional opportunities. Emphasis is placed on the
individual, or so-called “carry-over” sports, as well as those involving a team
effort.
The intercollegiate athletic program is a comprehensive one with varsity
schedules in eleven different sports. In many of these activities there are contests
arranged for junior varsity teams, thus providing ample opportunity for large
numbers of men to engage in intercollegiate competition.
F

aculty

R

eq u irem en ts

Physical Education is required of all non-veteran freshmen and sophomores
unless excused by the College physician. By meeting certain minimum objec­
tives, one may be exempted from the program after satisfactorily completing one
year’s, work. During participation in the program men students must participate
in their assigned activity a minimum of three hours per week.
All men not excused for medical or other reasons are expected to fulfill this
requirement. A semester’s work failed in the first two years must be repeated in
the Junior year. No man with a deficiency in physical education is permitted to
enter his Senior year.
♦Intercollegiate competiton only.
♦♦Intercollegiate competition and course instruction.
tSome co-ed sections.

168

PH Y SIC A L E D U C A T IO N FO R M EN
F

all

A

ctivities

Adapted Physical Education
tAquatics
tArchery
Badminton

♦Cross Country
tFolk Dance
♦Football
tGolf

tModern Dance
♦♦Soccer
tTennis
Touch Football

i n t e r I a n d II A c t i v i t i e s
Adapted Physical Education
tFolk Dance
tAquatics
tModern Dance
tBadminton
Squash
♦♦Basketball
♦Swimming

W

Spring

A

tTennis
tVolleyball
Weight Training
♦Wrestling

ctivities

Adapted Physical Education
tAquatics
♦Baseball
♦♦tGolf

♦Lacrosse
tModern Dance
Softball
♦♦tTennis

♦Track
tVolleyball

‘Intercollegiate competiton only.
“ Intercollegiate competition and course instruction.
tSome co-ed sections.

PH Y SIC A L E D U C A T IO N
FOR WOMEN
ELEANOR K. HESS, Chairman and Associate Professor
IR EN E MOLL, Associate Professor*
M ARY A N N YOUNG, Assistant Professor
PATRICIA BOYER, Lecturer
JA N IC E FELLM A N , Lecturer
DR. MORRIS A. BOWIE, College Physician
The aim of the Department is to contribute to the education of all women
students through the medium of physical activity. We believe this contribution
can best be achieved through participation in a broad program of sports, dance
and developmental activities. The program provides instruction and experience
in sports and dancing, and swimming instruction on all levels. It is our hope that
the student will also acquire: appreciation of the dance as an art form; good
sportmanship; added endurance; good posture; leadership training; joy in out­
door exercise; and a program of interests and skills that will carry over for her
after college, so she may become a useful part of her community.
An attempt is made to keep classes small in order to insure individual atten­
tion, and students are grouped where possible according to ability. Ample
opportunities are given for intramural and intercollegiate competition, as well
as for public performances and demonstrations.
Freshmen and sophomores take three periods of activity each week. These
may be elected from classes listed below with the stipulation that they take swim­
ming for a maximum of one semester (at least 36 water hours) if they fail to
‘Absent on leave, fall semester, 1971-72.

169

PH Y SIC A L E D U C A T IO N FO R W OM EN
pass the beginning swimming test. In the sophomore year, the department en­
courages the students to develop greater initiative in acquiring habits of regular
exercise by planning their own programs of physical activity. This is accom­
plished by granting greater freedom in the fulfillment of the requirement through
a variety of programs worked out by the student and the department. After the
freshman year, a student may be exempted out of the required program if she
has successfully passed the physical fitness test, the swimming test and two prac­
tical and written tests in activities chosen from the areas of individual sports,
team sports and dance.
In addition to the departmental requirements, the faculty regulations state the
following: “If any semester’s work of the first two years is failed, it shall be
repeated in the junior year. No student shall be permitted to enter her senior year
with a deficiency in physical education.”
Each student is expected to wear clothing appropriate for the activities which
she elects to pursue. These can either be ordered through the College or brought
from home. Blanks for those who wish to order gym uniforms will be sent out
from the office of the Dean to all incoming freshmen.
A

ctivities

Archery.*
Fall and Spring.

Class and Varsity.

Badminton.
Winter. Class and Varsity.
Basketball.
Winter. Class and Varsity.
Bowling.
Winter. Class.
Conditioning Exercises.
Fall, Winter and Spring.
Fencing.
Winter.
Folk and Square Dancing*
Fall, Winter and Spring. Class and Performance Group.
Golf.*
Fall and Spring.

Class.

Hockey.
Fall. Class and Varsity.
Jogging.
Winter.
Lacrosse.
Spring. Class and Varsity.
Modem Dance.*
Fall, Winter and Spring.

170

Class and Performance Group.

Dance Composition.

PH Y S IC A L E D U C A T IO N FO R W O M EN
Self-Defense.
Winter.
Soccer.
Winter.

Class.

Softball.
Spring. Class and Varsity.
Squash.
Winter.
Swimming. Beginning, intermediate and advanced classes in strokes and div­
ing. Class and Varsity.
American Red Cross Life Saving and Water Safety. Instructor’s Course. (Upon
successful completion of these courses, American Red Cross certificates will be
awarded.)
Fall, Winter and Spring.
Tennis.
Fall, Winter and Spring.
Volleyball.*
Fall and Winter.

Class and Varsity.

Class and Varsity.

Water Ballet.*
Fall. Class and Performance Group.
*Co-ed classes.

PHYSICS
OLEXA-MYRON BILANIUK, Professorf
W ILLIAM C. ELM ORE, Professor*
M ARK A. HEALD, Professor and Chairman
PA U L C. M ANGELSDORF, JR., Professor
ALBURT M. ROSENBERG, Associate Professor
JO H N R. BOCCIO, Assistant Professor
CYRUS D. CANTRELL, Assistant Professor
The physics department, through its introductory course in general physics,
endeavors to give an integrated account of basic physics. In this course, as well
as in the advanced work of the department, emphasis is placed on quantitative,
analytical reasoning, as distinct from the mere acquisition of facts and skills. The
introductory course makes no pretense of covering all material of interest to
physicists, but rather comprises a selection of topics which form a coherent
group.
Advanced work in the department involves a more intensive study of topics
covered at the introductory level, and of many phases of modern physics which
require a considerable background in mathematics and electricity. In all courses
*Absent on leave, fall semester, 1971-72.
tAbsent on leave, spring semester, 1971-72.

171

PH Y SIC S
and seminars particular importance is attached to laboratory work, since physics
is primarily an experimental science. Honors candidates taking physics seminars
accompanied by experimental work must submit their laboratory notebooks to
the visiting examiners for their inspection.
In addition to curricular work, students are encouraged to pursue research
projects in consultation with members of the faculty. Good shop facilities, a
wide range of electronic instrumentation, and the Computer Center are available
in support of independent work. The Department holds research colloquia
jointly with the Bartol Research Foundation, which is located on the Swarthmore campus and which otfers a Ph.D. program in physics through an affiliation
with Thomas Jefferson University (see p. 68). In special cases Swarthmore stu­
dents may take graduate courses at Bartol or at the University of Pennsylvania.
R

eq u irem en ts

and

Reco

m m end a tio ns

Students who intend to major in physics normally take Physics 1, 2 and Chem­
istry 3, 4 in the freshman year and Physics 11, 12 in the sophomore year. In
addition they should complete Mathematics 22 by the end of their sophomore
year. In view of graduate school requirements and of the extensive literature of
physics in French, German and Russian, it is strongly recommended that the stu­
dent acquire a reading knowledge of one of these languages. Satisfactory
work in Physics 1, 2 or its equivalent is prerequisite for all further work in the
department, and Chemistry 2 or 4 is a prerequisite for Physics 112 and 114.
Honors students majoring in physics normally take Physics 102, 106, 112, in
that order, and Mathematics 51, 52, and 102. Physics 114 or a second mathe­
matics seminar is encouraged but not required. Other seminars and courses in
the program may be chosen to meet the interests of the student. Students pre­
paring for graduate work in physics usually present four papers in physics and
two in mathematics; one or two papers in. chemistry, astronomy, engineering,
economics, or another minor may be substituted. An Honors major with three
papers in physics and greater diversity in the minors and supporting courses con­
stitutes an effective educational program for careers in law, medicine, and other
professions inasmuch as the aim throughout is to achieve an understanding of
fundamental ideas and concepts, as distinct from the mastery of information,
skills, and techniques in a limited segment of science. Honors students minoring
in physics may prepare for examinations by taking Physics 11, 12, as well
as by one or more seminars.
Course students majoring in physics normally complete the following courses
in their junior and senior years: Mathematics 51, 52; Chemistry 61, 62; and
Physics 51, 52, 54, 55, 72. It is recommended that Physics 60 or additional work
in engineering or chemistry be included in the program of Course students who
intend to do graduate work in physics. This program provides a well-rounded
study of physics, and by requiring less intensive concentration than an Honors
program offers the student more opportunity to extend his work outside the Divi­
sion of the Natural Sciences. It should also meet the needs of those who wish
to teach science in secondary school.
Secondary school students who are considering majoring in physics at Swarth­
more are strongly encouraged to complete four years of mathematics and a
minimum of two years of French, German, or Russian.
1, 2. General Physics. An introductory course in basic physics. During the
first semester special emphasis is placed on mechanics, conservation principles,
harmonic motion, wave motion and heat. During the second semester the topics
include basic concepts in electricity and magnetism, direct current circuits, al­
ternating current circuits, optics and modern physics. This-course, or its equiva­
172

PH Y SIC S
lent, must precede any advanced courses or seminars in physics. It is required of
most science majors. Three lectures, a conference, and a laboratory period
weekly. The introductory course can be supplemented by directed reading in
current topics. Entering freshmen who may be qualified for advanced placement
should see the department chairman.
Prerequisite: First year mathematics (calculus) taken concurrently, or adequate
preparation in mathematics.
Mr. Cantrell, Mr. Heald, and Staff.
6. Principles of the Earth Sciences. An analysis of the forces shaping our
physical environment, drawing on the fields of geology, geophysics, meteorology
and oceanography. Recent developments in these fields are emphasized with
readings and discussion based on current literature. The underlying physical and
chemical principles are stressed. Laboratory demonstrations and one or more
field trips. No special scientific background required.
Fall semester. Mr. Mangelsdorf.
7, 8. Concepts and Theories in Physical Science. The first semester consists
of an analysis of motion leading to the Newtonian synthesis, the conservation
laws of physics, the development of an atomic theory of matter, the periodic
table of elements, and the kinetic theory of gases. The second semester considers
the evolution of modern physics: physical properties of light, aspects of rela­
tivity, the wave versus the quantum theory of light, certain electrical phenomena,
atomicity of charge, Bohr’s model of the atom, radioactivity, elementary parti­
cles, the nuclear atom and nuclear energy, stellar energy.
This course is designed as a terminal course in physical science to meet the
needs of non-science majors and fulfills the group 1 distribution requirement. It
is not intended to fulfill the physics requirement of medical schools, and cannot
be used as a prerequisite for further work in the Division of the Natural Sciences.
Three lectures and one three-hour laboratory per week.
Not offered in 1971-72. Mr. Rosenberg.
7A. Concepts and Theories in Physical Science. A one-semester condensed
version of Physics 7,8. Falling bodies and the birth of mechanics; Newton’s
laws of motion and gravitation; the classical physicist’s “world view”; Einstein’s
relativity and space-time; the atom and the quantum; origin and interpretation of
wave mechanics and the uncertainty principle. Text, R. H. March’s Physics for
Poets. Includes weekly laboratory.
Fall semester 1971. Mr. Rosenberg.
7B. Basic Physics Applied to Living Systems. Illustrations showing where
physical theory and instruments are important in understanding living cells
and organisms, integrated with a conceptual development of physical principles
and techniques. Includes weekly laboratory. Not intended for biology and premed majors.
Fall semester 1971. Mr. Rosenberg.
9A. Order and Symmetry in Physical Systems. Analysis of the forms
and principles involved in order and symmetry. A study of pattern as it arises
from (1) statistical regularities governed by the laws of chance, (2) fluid be­
havior of streams and gas flows, and (3) geometrical packing or mathematical
ordering. Examples selected from molecular systems, crystals, atoms, nuclei, and
elementary particles. Symmetries in man-made designs will also be considered.
The IBM 1130 computer and graphic display will be used in producing various
173

P H Y SIC S
patterns. Three lectures plus laboratory weekly. Intended for non-science majors.
Spring semester 1972. Mr. Rosenberg.
9B. Analysis of the Perturbed Environment. Problems associated with
numbers and flow in the movement of people. Energy resources and distribution.
Selected problems of pollution, including radioactive contamination. The com­
puter will be used to simulate different ecological situations. The value and im­
plication of these models will be sought. Where needed basic physical concepts,
computer techniques, and analytical methods will be taught. Lectures plus
projects. Intended for non-science majors.
Spring semester 1972. Mr. Rosenberg.
10. Topics in Biophysics. Applications of physical tools and analysis to liv­
ing systems. Emphasis is at the subcellular level of integration. The course is
intended for physical science, mathematics, and engineering students. Previous
biological training is not required. Three lectures per week. In lieu of laboratory
work, visits will be made to nearby biophysical laboratories.
Not offered in 1971-72. Mr. Rosenberg.
11,12. Mechanics and Wave Motion. Particle and rigid body mechanics with
an introduction to advanced dynamics. Elastic waves and wave motion. Inter­
ference and diffraction phenomena. Considerable emphasis is placed on labora­
tory work, both to illuminate and extend the subject matter, and to foster the
students’ ability to work independently. Three lectures and a laboratory period
weekly. This course may be taken by Honors students with a minor in physics
in preparation for an Honors examination.
Prerequisite: Second-year mathematics taken concurrently.
Mr. Boccio and Mr. Mangelsdorf.
21. Principles of Aeronautics. Principles of flight, elements of aircraft struc­
ture and performance, flight instruments, navigation aids and methods, flight
meteorology. No prerequisites, open to all students. Two lecture hours and an
afternoon ground lab weekly.
Fall semester. Mr. Bilaniuk.
51. Modern Physics I. A selection of topics including the special theory of
relativity, and atomic, nuclear, and particle physics. Three lectures and one
laboratory period weekly. Open to seniors only.
Prerequisite: Second-year mathematics and consent of the instructor.
52. Modem Physics II. Quantum mechanics and solid-state physics.
Three lectures and one laboratory period weekly.
Prerequisite: Physics 51 and/or Engineering 61.
54. Thermal Physics. Continuum properties of matter and of thermal energy.
Thermodynamics and statistical mechanics of mechanical, chemical, electrical
and magnetic systems. Entropy, fluctuation theory, irreversible thermodynamics.
Brownian motion, diffusion theory, transport processes. Three lectures and one
conference section weekly.
Prerequisite: Second-year mathematics.
55. Introduction to Fields and Continua. Analysis of field phenomena in a
variety of continuous media. Fluid-flow, elastic, thermal, electromagnetic,
and other fields are treated with emphasis on their common properties. The par­
tial differential equations governing time-invariant fields, diffusion, wave motion,
etc., are developed from basic principles. Application is mhde to realistic engi­
174

PH Y SIC S
neering situations. Three class periods and a laboratory each week. Also listed
as Engineering 51.
Prerequisite: Physics 12.
Fall semester. Mr. Patterson.
60. Special Project. Laboratory work directed toward the acquisition of
knowledge and skills that will be useful in future research. The project ordinarily
involves development of apparatus and the performance of an experiment of
contemporary significance in physics. An oral and written report will be pre­
sented to the instructor.
61. Directed Reading. This course is to provide an opportunity for individual
students to do special work in fields not covered by the undergraduate courses
listed above. Weekly topics and problems will be assigned, and the student will
present oral and written reports to the instructor.
62. Introduction to Oceanography. The theory and practice of modern
marine sciences. Topics to be covered include physical oceanography and meas­
urement techniques, the dynamics of rotating stratified fluids, air-sea interac­
tion, coastal and estuarine processes, the ocean as a biological habitat, and the
energy, mass, and chemical budgets of the oceans. This course is intended to
enable the student to follow current literature in marine sciences. Exercises on
the computer and a field trip.
Prerequisite: Mathematics 51 or consent of the instructor.
Spring semester. Mr. Mangelsdorf.
71. Circuit Theory. Transient and steady-state analysis of electric circuits and
networks with emphasis on Laplace and Fourier methods and s-plane interpre­
tation. Network topology, equilibrium equations, theorems, network functions
and their properties. Energy in electric networks. Introduction to synthesis.
Three class periods and a laboratory each week. Also listed as Engineering 71.
Prerequisite: Physics 12.
Fall semester. Mr. McCrumm.
72. Electromagnetic Theory. Application of Maxwell’s equations. Macro­
scopic field treatment of magnetic, dielectric and conducting bodies. Forces,
motion and energy storage. Field basis of circuit theory. Electromagnetic waves;
wave guides, transmission lines and antennas. Three class periods and a labora­
tory each week. Also listed as Engineering 72.
Prerequisite: Physics 55.
Spring semester.
H

onors

Sem inars

102. Electricity and Magnetism. Classical electrodynamics, covering static
and dynamic electricity, magnetism and electromagnetism, with some electronics.
Laboratory measurements in direct and alternating currents and in magnetism,
together with fundamental experiments in electronics.
Prerequisites: Mathematics 22, and Physics 11, 12.
Fall semester. Mr. Heald.
106. Atomic and Nuclear Physics. Special theory of relativity. Wave-particle
duality. Introduction to wave mechanics, the hydrogen atom, structure and
spectra of many-electron atoms. Elements of solid state physics. Properties and
systematics of nuclei, nuclear reactions, nuclear forces and models. Introduction
175

P H Y SIC S
to fundamental particles, their symmetries, and interactions. The accompanying
laboratory includes basic experiments in atomic and nuclear physics.
Prerequisite: Physics 102, or equivalent preparation in the Honors program
in Engineering Sciences.
Spring semester. Mr. Elmore.
112. Radiation and Statistical Physics. Free and guided electromagnetic
waves, with particular emphasis on waves in the microwave, optical, and
X-ray regions. The velocity of electromagnetic waves and the four-vector formu­
lation of the special theory of relativity. Thermodynamics and statistical me­
chanics. Thermal radiation, and quantum statistics with applications. Ac­
companied by experimental projects.
Prerequisites: Chemistry 2 or 12, and Physics 106.
Fall semester. Mr. Mangelsdorf.
114. Quantum Mechanics. Advanced classical dynamics. Classical vs. quan­
tum physics, correspondence principle. Heisenberg’s and Schrôdinger’s ver­
sions of quantum mechanics. Observables and quantum mechanical operators.
Eigenfunctions and eigenvalues. Approximation methods. Identical particles
and spin. Scattering and the Born approximation. Quantum mechanics of the
nucleon-nucleon interaction and nuclear structure.
Prerequisite: Physics 112.
Spring semester.

PO L IT IC A L SC IEN C E
CHARLES E. GILBERT, Professor
J. ROLAND PENNOCK, Professor*
DAVID G. SM ITH, Professor and Chairman
ROBERT O. K EOHANE, Associate Professorf
CLEM EN T COTTINGHAM , JR., Assistant Professor
RAYM OND F. HOPKINS, Assistant Professor
N A N N ER L O. KEOHANE, Assistant Professor (part tim e)f
ROBERT GALLUCCI, Instructor
K E N N E T H G. LIEBERTHAL, Instructor**
PA U L LUTZKER, In stru c to r
Courses and seminars offered by the Political Science Department deal with
the place of politics in society and contribute to an understanding of the pur­
poses, organization, and operation of political institutions, domestic and inter­
national. For the beginning student, the department offers courses dealing
generally with the basic concepts of political science and the processes of
politics as illustrated by case studies, by theoretical analysis, and by more
extended study of the elements of politics in various institutional settings. In
appropriate places throughout the curriculum, attention is focused on problems
of change (evolutionary and revolutionary), freedom and authority, war and
peace—and on the development of political institutions that are responsive to
♦Absent
tAbsent
{Absent
♦♦Spring

on leave, fall semester, 1971-72.
on leave, spring semester, 1971-72.
on leave, 1971-72.
semester, 1971-72.

176

P O L IT IC A L S C IE N C E
the needs of our day. Courses are provided that give special attention to
political theory, comparative political systems, political development, politics
and government in the United States, and international relations.
R

eq u irem en ts

and

Reco m

m end a tio ns

Students planning to study political science are strongly advised to start with
Elements of Politics (Political Science 1), and to continue with one or more
of the other introductory level courses, Policy-Making in America (Political
Science 2), Comparative Politics (Political Science 3), International Politics
(Political Science 4). Any one of these courses may be taken without pre­
requisite and as a terminal course. Normally any two of these courses, pre­
ferably including Political Science l | constitute the prerequisite for further
work in the department. Students who intend to major in political science
should begin their work in the freshman year if possible. Political Theory,
either in seminar for Honors students, or in course (Political Science 54) for
Course students, is required of all majors. Course majors must take Political
Science 60.
P

rogram

in

Intern a tio na l

R

elations

Students who plan to enter upon a career in the field of international relations
should include in their programs, during the first two years, introductory
courses in economics, history, and political science and should complete the in­
termediate course in one or more modern languages.
Advanced courses selected from the groups listed below may be incorporated
in the programs of students who do their major work in economics, history,
political science, or a modem language.
Those students who wish to concentrate in international relations may take
their Senior Comprehensive Examination in this field. Students preparing for
this examination should take eight, nine, or ten courses from among those listed
below including all of those listed in Group I, one or more m Group II, and
one or more in Group III. A thesis or other form of independent work is
strongly recommended. The examination is administered by a committee ap­
pointed by the chairmen of the Departments of Economics, History, and Political
Science, under the chairmanship of the Department of Political Science.
Group I
Political Science 4— International Politics
Political Science 13—International Law and Organization
Political Science 14— American Foreign Policy
Political Science 63—Advanced International Politics
Economics 30—International Economics
Group II
History 8—Africa
History 25—Modern Russia
History 35—American Diplomatic History to 1900
History 36—American Diplomatic History since 1900
History 43—The Expansion of Europe
History 44— Modern China
History 45—Modern lapan
History 46—Asian Nationalisms
History 48—Latin America
177

P O L I T I C A L S C IE N C E
Group III
Economics 11—Economic Development
Economics 31—Comparative Economic Systems
Political Science 3—Comparative Politics
Political Science 18—Politics of Developing Nations
Political Science 19—Comparative Communist Politics
Political Science 20—Politics of East Asia
Political Science 21—Politics of Africa
Political Science 55—Modern Political Theory
Political Science 64—Topics in International Relations
Students who plan to enter the Honors program will find it possible to select a
similar combination of courses and seminars in the field of international rela­
tions. In planning such programs, they should consult with the chairman of
their prospective major department.
1. Elements of Politics. Using materials particularly from the United States
and the Soviet Union, but drawing also on experiences of other societies, this
course asks: Who governs? How? Under what constraints? It therefore in­
volves a study of the basic institutions, concepts and moving forces of politics.
Through the use of readings from contemporary political sciences, it also
presents an introduction to the analytical tools and methods of the discipline.
Normative problems of freedom and authority, equality and inequality, obliga­
tion and protest, are considered in conjunction with the study of political forces
and institutions.
Fall semester. Staff.
2. Policy-Making in America. Consideration of basic elements of American
national politics, and of ways of defining and explaining the functions and re­
sults of American politics. Major attention will be devoted to electoral organ­
izations, voting behavior and opinion formation, legislation and presidential
leadership.
Spring semester. Staff.
3. Comparative Politics. An introduction to the theory of comparative poli­
tics, and to the data used in comparing political systems. Major attention will be
given to Great Britain, India, France, and the USSR. The course will focus on
political culture, the party system, and the legislative and executive institutions
of the central government.
Spring semester. Staff.
4. International Politics. An introduction to the analysis of the contemporary
international system and its evolution since 1945, The course will consider the
foreign policies of major powers and their interaction, contemporary forces in­
fluencing the nature of international relations, and the role of ideologies. Various
approaches to world order, such as diplomacy, collective security, disarmament
and world government will be considered.
Spring semester. Staff.
10. Urban Sociology and Politics. Also listed as Sociology-Anthropology 59.
Particular emphasis will be placed on the politics and sociology of the contempo­
rary American city and upon aspects of the urban crisis that relate especially to
racial and economic segregation. The course will examine the way in which
urban problems become defined and major alternative approaches toward the
178

P O L IT IC A L S C IE N C E
resolution of these problems. This course is required for students who wish to
take Problems in Urban Education and/or Problems in Urban Housing.
Spring semester. Mr. Cottingham and Mr. Van Til.
11. Problems in Urban Housing. See Sociology-Anthropology 59A. Students
who take this course are required to take Urban Sociology and Politics concur­
rently.
Spring semester. Mr. Van Til and Mr. Willis.
12. Problems in Urban Education. See Education 17. Students who take this
course are required to take Urban Sociology and Politics concurrently.
Spring semester. Mrs. Brodhead and Mr. Cottingham.
13. International Law and Organization. An analysis of international law and
organization in the context of the international political system. Special atten­
tion will be given to the political process of the United Nations and to its
accomplishments, limitations, and prospects. The course will also consider the
relations between international politics and international law, and the theory
and practice of regionalism.
Alternate years, spring semester. Not offered in 1971-72. Mr. Keohane.
14. American Foreign Policy. The problem of defining the objectives of
American foreign policy and of selecting the means for achieving them; past,
present and suggested American strategies in world politics; the influence of
internal and external conditions on the making of foreign policy; the effects of
American policies in crucial areas of the world.
Spring semester. Mr. Gallucci.
15. Legislative Behavior. An analysis of the various forces that shape the
results of the legislative process and the behavior of individual legislators.
The influence of personality, constituency, party leadership, ideology, rules and
procedures, the committee system, the Executive Branch. The main focus will
be on the Congress, with some illustrative material from other legislative bodies.
Fall semester. Not offered in 1971-72. Mr. Lutzker.
18. Politics of Developing Nations. Non-western states of Africa, Asia and
Latin America will be studied. Individuals, groups, and institutions that are
politically important will be analyzed with respect to their role in effective
power processes and in promoting or hindering developmental changes.
Fall semester. Mr. Hopkins.
19. Comparative Communist Politics. A comparative study of the political
organization of the Soviet Union, China, and the Eastern European states, with
emphasis on the Party structure, state bureaucracy, policy formation, and politi­
cal communication.
Spring semester. Not offered in 1971-72. Mr. Lieberthal.
20. Politics of East Asia. A comparative analysis of politics in China and
Japan. Special emphasis will be placed on China: the Chinese Revolution,
ideology, policy-making, local politics, and the Cultural Revolution.
Spring semester. Mr. Lieberthal.
21. Politics of Africa. A survey of political forces in contemporary Africa.
Selected countries will be studied to illuminate important aspects of political
change including traditional attitudes, leadership, ethnic rivalry, socialism, neo­
colonialism, military intervention and national integration.
Spring semester. Mr. Hopkins.
179

P O L IT IC A L S C IE N C E
47. Marxist Political Economy. A study of Marxist economics and political
theory with particular attention to general problems of historical materialism.
Primary emphasis in the reading is placed on the works of Marx, Engels, and
Lenin; however, some time is also devoted to the background of Marxist thought
as well as the development of Marxist theory in the present era. Also listed as
Economics 47.
Prerequisite: two semesters of either Political Science or Economics.
Spring semester. Mr. Pryor and Mr. Smith.
51. Public Administration. An analysis of policy-making and administration
in modern governments with illustrative material drawn chiefly from the na­
tional government of the United States and with particular reference to recent
developments. Problems of administrative organization, conduct of regulatory
and managerial activities, financial administration, personnel, public relations,
administrative law, politics and administration.
Open to juniors and seniors only, except by special arrangement.
Fall semester, alternate years. Mr. Smith.
52. American Constitutional Law. The role of the Supreme Court in the
American political system, viewed both historically and through analysis of
leading cases. Areas of Constitutional development emphasized are: the nature
and exercise of judicial review; federalism and the scope of national power;
due process, equal protection and other civil liberties.
Open to sophomores and upperclassmen.
Spring semester. Mr. Smith.
53. American Party Politics. An historical and functional analysis of Ameri­
can political parties. The study of interest groups, public opinion and voting be­
havior, electoral systems and representation, the legislative process.
Alternate years, fall semester. Not offered in 1971-72. Mr. Lutzker.
54. Political Theory: Plato to Montesquieu. The development of political
thought based on the work of the chief political philosophers from Plato to
Montesquieu. The course will consider classical, medieval, and early modem
theories concerning: the sources of authority and obedience; the origins and
functioning of the polity; the role of law in government; the relationship be­
tween the state and the individual; and the character of the good state.
Open to spohomores planning to take the “Modem and Analytical” version of
the Political Theory honors seminar; otherwise to juniors and seniors only, ex­
cept by special arrangement.
Fall semester. Mrs. Keohane.
55. Modem Political Theory. A study of the development of liberalism,
socialism, democratic theory, and sociological theories of politics. The course
includes intensive reading of a few works by Rousseau and Marx plus discussion
of other such authors as Burke, Tocqueville, Mill, Lenin, and Weber. In a con­
cluding section, several contemporary democratic theories will be considered.
Spring semester. Mrs. Keohane or Mr. Smith.
56. Jurisprudence. A study of the sources and nature of law; historical,
sociological and philosophical approaches to legal theory; the nature of the
judicial process; key problems of jurisprudence illustrated by case study in
selected areas of American constitutional law.
Open to juniors and seniors only, except by special arrangement.
Spring semester. Mr. Pennock.

180

P O L IT IC A L S C IE N C E
57. Problems of Democratic Theory. Individualistic, pluralistic, and “hol­
istic” approaches will be studied, including contemporary attacks upon liberal­
ism and pluralism. Democracy will be considered from the point of view of
justification theory, theories of requisites, and both normative and descriptive
operative theory.
Fall semester. Not offered in 1971-72. Mr. Pennock.
60. Special Topics in Political Science. This course, conducted in seminar
fashion, is designed for senior majors. By means of papers and assigned read­
ings it covers aspects of political science not elsewhere intensively developed
and helps the students to integrate materials studied previously.
Spring semester. Mr. Smith.
62. Political Sociology. Sociological analysis of political elites, politics
and political institutions in comparative-historical perspective. Although the
major focus will be on modern societies, a part of the course will be devoted
to pre-modern, primarily medieval European conditions and the rise of the
modern nation-state. Particular emphasis will be given to theories and empirical
studies of various types of protest movements in historical and contemporary
societies. Also listed as Sociology and Anthropology 62.
Fall semester. Mr. Mueller.
63. Advanced International Politics. This course will consider foreign policies
of small and middle powers in contemporary world politics. Attention will be
paid not only to their conventional diplomatic problems but also to their
interactions with multilateral institutions and their relations wth transna­
tional actors, particularly in the economic field. The course will therefore
attempt to analyse world politics from the perspective of small states, as well
as to compare these states’ efforts to cope with the situations they encounter.
Prerequisite: Course 4 or the equivalent.
Alternate years, fall semester. Mr. Keohane.
64. Topics in International Relations. An analysis of certain problems of
international relations chosen by the instructor. Possibilities include: comparative
foreign policy, war, international relations of developing nations, regionalism.
Prerequisite: Course 4 or the equivalent and Course 63.
Alternate years, spring semester. Not offered in 1971-72. Mr. Keohane.
69. Directed Readings in Political Science. Available on an individual or
group basis, subject to the approval of the chairman and the instructor.
70-71.

Colloquium. Staff.

72. Thesis. With the permission of the chairman and a supervising instruc­
tor, any major in Course may substitute a thesis for one course, normally
during either semester of the senior year.
H

onors

Sem

inars

The following seminars prepare for examination for a degree with Honors:
101. (a) and (b) Political Theory. The nature of the state, the bases of
political obligation, sovereignty and the nature of law, liberty, equality, rights,
democracy, totalitarianism—all in the light of the theories set forth by writers
on these subjects from Plato to the present. This seminar is given in two ver­
sions, one (101a) beginning with Plato and proceeding chronologically, and the
181

P O L IT IC A L S C IE N C E
other (101b, designated “Modem and Analytical”) starting with Hobbes, or­
ganized in more topical fashion and giving considerable attention to modern
democratic theory. It is desirable but not required for students planning to take
101b to take Political Science 54 during their sophomore year.
Each semester. Mr. Pennock or Mr. Smith.
102. Politics and Legislation. The study of political parties, interest groups,
public opinion and voting behavior, electoral systems and representation, the
legislative process. Emphasis is on American politics, with some comparative
material; and, ultimately, on politics from the standpoint of theories of political
democracy.
Spring semester. Mr. Gilbert.
103. Problems in Government and Administration. Problems of administra­
tive organization, policy-making and responsibility, with primary reference to
the United States and to selected fields of policy.
Fall semester. Mr. Smith.
104. International Politics. An inquiry into the principles and problems of
international politics, this seminar will consider theories of international stability
and disorder, the relationship between foreign policies and the international
system, and approaches to international order such as diplomacy, international
law, and collective security. Basic to the analysis will be the question: what are
the causes of war and the conditions of peace?
Prerequisite: Course 4 or the equivalent.
Spring semester'. Not offered in 1971-72. Mr. Hopkins.
105. American Foreign Policy. A study of key problems faced by the United
States in the modern world together with a detailed, critical investigation of the
making and implementing of American foreign policy. A variety of purported
explanations of American foreign policy will be discussed and evaluated, and the
political economic and social influences upon it will be carefully considered. Key
assumptions of United States policy-makers will be subjected to scrutiny, and
alternate assumptions and policies will be analyzed.
Fail semester. Mr. Keohane.
106. Public Law and Jurisprudence. Sources and nature of law; historical,
sociological, philosophic, “realistic,” and behavioral approaches to law; key
problems of jurisprudence illustrated by the study of court cases, especially, but
not solely, from selected areas of public law.
Spring semester. Mr. Pennock.
107. Comparative Communist Politics. A comparative study of the political
organization of the Soviet Union, China, and the Eastern European states, with
emphasis on the Party structure, state bureaucracy, policy formation, and politi­
cal communication.
Spring semester. Mr. Lieberthal.
108. Comparative Politics. A comparative study of several Western European
democracies. Great Britain, France, and Italy will be the major countries studied,
but attention will also be paid to Germany, Switzerland, Scandinavia and the
Low Countries. The seminar will focus on theories proposed to explain success­
ful democracy, and attempt to determine how far these theories are borne out
in the countries studied. Political culture, the party systems, and group partici­
pation in government will receive special attention.
Fail semester. Not offered in 1971-72. Mrs. Keohane.
182

P O L IT IC A L S C IE N C E
109. Political Development. A comparative study of the politics of societies
undergoing change and modernization. Various theories, approaches, and meth­
ods of explanation are examined and considered in the context of states in Asia,
Africa, the Middle East and Latin America.
Spring semester. Mr. Hopkins.
110. Urban Sociology and Politics. The impact of urbanization on con­
temporary politics and social structure, from the perspectives of political science
and sociology. Emphasis will be placed on empirical study of selected problems
such as physical planning, social welfare, and political organization.
Fall semester. Not offered in 1971-72. Mr. Gilbert and Mr. Van Til.
129. Thesis. Approval must be secured early in the student’s junior year.
All members of the department.

PSYCHOLOGY
K E N N ETH J. G ERG EN , Professor and Chairman
D EA N PEABODY, Professor
HANS W ALLACH, Professor
SHEL FELD M A N , Associate Professor^
BARRY SCHWARTZ, Assistant Professor
JEFFR EY TRAVERS, Assistant Professor
CLAUS BAHNSON, Lecturer
MARY K. G ERG EN , Assistant
The work of the Department of Psychology deals with the scientific study of
human behavior and experience; the basic processes of perception, learning,
thinking and motivation, and consideration of their relation to development of
the individual personality; and the social relations of the individual to other per­
sons and to groups. For those students planning graduate and professional
work in psychology the courses and seminars of the department are designed to
provide a sound basis of understanding of psychological principles and a grasp
of research method. Other students learn the nature of psychological inquiry and
the psychological approach to various problems encountered in the humanities,
the social sciences and the life sciences.
A joint major is available in conjunction with the Linguistics Department
emphasizing fundamental issues in human cognitive organization. A full descrip­
tion of this program may be found under “Linguistics.”
R

eq u irem en ts

and

Recom

m end a tio ns

There is no required introductory course in Psychology. However, the follow­
ing courses may be considered pre-requisites for more advanced work in the
Department.
Psychology 12: Experimental Psychology (Fall)
Psychology 16: Social Psychology (Fall)
Psychology 18: Personality (Spring)
Students who wish to pursue advanced work in learning, perception or physiotAbsent on leave, spring semester, 1971-72.

183

PSYCHOLOGY
logical psychology should take Psychology 12. Those who wish to do advanced
work in child development, abnormal psychology, or other areas dealing with
human interaction should take Psychology 16 or 18 or both. Psychology majors
will be expected to take Psychology 12 and either Psychology 16 or 18.
Majors should include advanced work in two areas of psychology: (a) basic
processes underlying human and animal behavior, such as perception, learning
and physiological psychology; (b) human behavior in its social context, such as
personality, child psychology, social psychology. Majors in Course should take
at least two courses and majors in Honors, at least one seminar from each area.
It is highly desirable for all majors to take at least one course providing them
with experience in basic research (e.g. Psychology 54 or 69). In addition, all
majors in Course are encouraged to enroll in Psychology 64 during the spring
semester of their senior year. This course is especially suited for preparation
for the comprehensive examinations.
12. Experimental Psychology. A basic introduction to the areas of learning,
perception, cognition and psychophysiology.
Fall semester. Staff.
13. Statistics for Psychologists.
Fall semester. Mr. Mullins.

See Math 1.

15. Child Psychology. Cognitive development, the socialization process, and
the influence of childrearing practices will be emphasized.
Spring semester. Mr. Travers.
16. Social Psychology. An examination of theory and research relevant to the
understanding of social interaction from a psychological viewpoint. Special em­
phasis will be placed on social perception and its distortion, attitude develop­
ment and change, conformity, the relationship of personality to social inter­
action, and social motivation.
Fall semester. Staff.
17. The Mathematics of Social Choice. See Mathematics 19.
Fall semester. Mr. Klotz.
18. Personality. An examination of contrasting theories of the human per­
sonality. Theories of Freud, Jung, Fromm, Rogers and others will be discussed,
and special attention will be given to current empirical work.
Spring semester. Staff.
36. Primate Social Behavior.
37. Learning and Behavior Theory. The experimental analysis of the major
phenomena of learning and conditioning is studied mainly at the animal level.
Specific empirical and theoretical issues are considered in detail, and the major
theories are evaluated. The laboratory is designed to acquaint students with the
major processes considered.
Spring semester. Mr. Schwartz.
38. Abnormal Psychology. Several views of abnormality are considered, in­
cluding those that allow conceptions of normality. Biological and learned bases
of positive and negative abnormality are considered, along with various methods
of behavior modification and psychotherapy.
Spring semester.
41.

Comparative Psychology.
184

PSYCHOLOGY
42. Physiological Psychology.
43. The Psychology of Communication. Topics such as non-verbal behavior
and self-disclosure, language acquisition and the Whorf hypothesis, propaganda
and rumor are approached from the perspectives of psychological and linguistic
theory. Attempts to integrate studies of mass and interpersonal communication.
Not offered in 1971-72.
45. Group Dynamics. The course will deal with the psychological aspects of
behavior in groups. Issues such as intimacy, solidarity, group problem solving,
leadership development, splinter-group formation, and phases of group develop­
ment will all receive attention. Classroom sessions will focus on the ongoing
behavior within the group itself. Outside reading and papers will be used to illu­
minate processes within the group and to raise significant theoretical problems.
(By application only.)
Fall semester. Mr. Gergen.
46. Cognitive Processes. Centers on those processes the individual uses to
understand the world. Emphasizes those processes used in dealing with people,
and their relation to those dealing with impersonal objects.
Fall semester. Mr. Peabody, Mr. Travers.
48. Intergroup Relations. An examination of factors that create strife and
conflict among persons, and conditions enhancing interpersonal tolerance and
acceptance. Particular attention will be given to minority groups, race relations,
and communication between individuals of diverse backgrounds.
49. The Psychology of Language.
Spring semester. Mrs. Gleitman.

See Linguistics 2.

50. Perception. Laboratory section one afternoon per week to be arranged.
The major facts and some problems of visual perception are outlined and used
to acquaint the student with experimental research.
Spring semester. Mr. Wallach.
52. Human Learning and Thinking. An examination of the phenomena of
association, memory, problem solving, thinking and language.
54. Methods of Psychological Research. Discussion will focus on the rela­
tionships between given theories and the methods used in the supporting
research. The comparative advantages and disadvantages of participatory obser­
vation and analysis, “objective” naturalistic observation, interviewing, content
analysis, and experimentation will be examined. Particular attention will be
given to problems in sampling, measurement and scaling, reliability and validity,
and controls against artifacts and alternative explanations. Direct research
experience will be emphasized.
Fall semester. Mr. Gergen.
59 Ethological Psychology. A course in seminar format. Will elaborate the
general principles which characterize ethology, and examine behavior systems
such as feeding, sex, aggression, and communication in various species, including
man The behavior systems will be studied with an emphasis on the contrasts
between ethology and American learning theory. (Entrance by permission of
instructor.)
Fall semester. Mr. Schwartz.
185

PSYCHOLOGY
60. Psychological Aspects of Economics. See Economics 45.
Spring semester. Mr. Peabody, Mr. Pryor and Mr. Travers.
61.

Psychological Anthropology.

See Sociology 63.

64. History and Systems of Psychology. Reading and discussion on a tutorial
basis intended to provide integration of different fields of psychology and to
help majors prepare for comprehensives. Historical treatment will concentrate
on the major systematic points of view. Special consideration will be given to
problems overlapping several areas of psychology.
Spring semester. Mr. Peabody.
66. Senior Paper. Students who wish to do a comprehensive paper in the
spring semester of their senior year—in lieu of comprehensive exams—may do
so with the permission of the department.
Spring semester. Staff.
67. Social Psychology of Social Issues. A course in seminar format. Students
consider the scientific approach to issues of social significance. Areas such as
race relations, international conflict, poverty, urbanism, drugs, and revolution
may all be discussed. (Enrollment limited.)
68. Tutorial. Any student may, with the consent of a member of the depart­
ment, work under a tutorial arrangement for a single semester. The student is
thus allowed to select a topic of particular interest to him, and in consultation
with a faculty member, prepare a reading list and work plan. Tutorial work
may include field experience outside Swarthmore.
Each semester. Staff.
69. Independent Research. Students conduct independent research projects.
They typically study problems with which they are already familiar from their
course work. Students must submit a written report of their work. Registration
for Independent Research requires the sponsorship of a faculty member who
agrees to supervise the work.
Each semester. Staff.
Under special circumstances, courses from other departments may be
counted toward a major in psychology, especially when such courses take a
distinct psychological orientation to the subject matter. Permission required.

note:

H

onors

S em inars

101. Perception. Reading and discussion combined with independent experi­
mental projects. The student is expected to know the basic facts about human
perceptual mechanisms, particularly visual ones, by the time he has completed
this seminar. Specific topics covered are: color vision, grouping and form, depth
and distance, size, visual motion, visual and auditory localization, recognition,
adaptation of perceptual functions. Scheduled laboratories are devoted to
demonstrations.
Fall semester. Mr. Wallach.
102. Learning and Behavior Theory. The major phenomena of learning and
conditioning—taken largely from the animal level—are discussed. An attempt is
made to systematize the experimental literature on each topic. The relationship
of motivational concepts to learning is discussed and the major theories of
learning and some recent mathematical theories are considered. The laboratory
186

PSYCHOLOGY
acquaints students with problems and methods of experimentation in learning.
An opportunity for original research is provided.
Spring semester. Mr. Schwartz.
103. Abnormal Psychology. Two conceptions of abnormal behavior, the psy­
choanalytic and the social psychological, are examined, mainly from a develop­
mental point of view. Problems of state and trait, and of cognitive, affective, and
behavioral change are considered.
Fall semester.
104. Individual in Society. The relationship between man and his society.
Basic processes including the understanding of other persons, theories of cogni­
tive consistency, group influence and conformity, the psychology of language.
Applications to political attitudes, group prejudice. The relation of attitudes and
personality. The relation of psychology to the social sciences.
Spring semester. Mr. Peabody.
105. Personality. A scrutiny of attempts to build an objective basis for “un­
derstanding the person as a whole.” Contrasting theoretical orientations, tech­
niques of observation, and specific problems will be examined. Theoretical
orientations: psychoanalysis, factor analysis, learning theory, phenomenology.
Observation techniques: interviews, questionnaires, fantasy material. Problems:
aggression, need achievement, prediction, psychotherapy, and psychological ma­
turity.
Spring semester. Mr. Gergen.
107. Language and Thought. See Linguistics 107.
Spring semester. Mrs. Gleitman.
109. Physiological Psychology. The genetic, developmental, and physiological
determinants of animal behavior. The seminar will explore in detail experimental
and field studies of behavior in a few selected animal species. Generalizations
derived from the study of animal behavior will be brought to bear on problems
in human behavior and behavior pathology.
Spring semester.
110. Group Dynamics. A combination of Psychology 45 (Fall) and a sub­
sequent semester of empirical research.
Fall and spring semester. Mr. Gergen.
111. Cognitive Development. A detailed survey of theory and research on
cognitive development, with intensive study of selected problems. Topics include:
growth of sensory and motor skills in infancy, language acquisition, and changes
in cognitive functioning during the preschool, elementary school and preadoles­
cent years. All members of the seminar will take part in observation, experimenta­
tion or teaching of young children.
Fall semester. Mr. Travers.
112. Social Development The process of child development, with special
emphasis on topics related to social interaction, including altruism, aggression,
morality, and personality.
120. Thesis. May be presented as a substitute for one seminar provided some
member of the department is available to undertake the direction of the thesis.
All members of the department.
187

PSY CH O LO G Y
M

a s t e r ’s

D

egree

A limited number of students may be accepted for graduate study toward the
Master’s degree in psychology (see pp. 74-75). Students receiving the Bachelor’s
degree from Swarthmore are not encouraged to enter this program.
The program of work for the Master’s degree requires the completion of four
seminars, or their equivalent. One of the seminars must be a research seminar
leading to a Thesis. The work of the seminars is judged by external examiners.
The requirements for the Master’s degree can normally be completed in one year.

R ELIG IO N
JO H N M. MOORE, Professor
P. LINWOOD URBAN, JR., Professor and' Chairman
PATRICK H ENRY, Associate Professor
DONALD SWEARER, Associate Professor
SAM UEL T. LA CHS, Visiting Lecturer
FLETC H ER J. BRYANT, JR., Assistant Dean o f Admissions
The academic discipline of religion applies several methodologies to a broad
subject matter. Understanding of religion is achieved in various ways: by
philosophical, historical, literary, phenomenological, psychological and sociologi­
cal analysis of religious experience, thought, texts, rites and ceremonies, institu­
tions. Department offerings illustrate a number of approaches to the study of
religion.
Any course numbered 3 through 6 may be taken as an introduction to the
field, and successful completion of one of these is normally required for admis­
sion to courses numbered 11 and above. The normal prerequisite for religion as a
Course major, or an Honors major or minor, is completion of two courses.
Among the 8 courses required in the major at least one course must be taken
in each of three broadly-defined areas: a) the religions of Asia and Africa;
b) the history of the western religious traditions; c) the philosophical and/or
theological aspects of religion. Also required is Religion 54, Conference for
Majors.
Honors majors must prepare for examinations in at least two of the areas
defined above, and must do work in the third area either for an examination or in
a course. Examinations may include topics in Old and New Testament, history
of Judaism and Christianity, philosophy of religion and ethics, the comparative
study of religions, and Asian religions. Supplementary work at Bryn Mawr or
Haverford Colleges may, where appropriate, be used to prepare for examinations.
For advanced work in some areas of religion, foreign language facility is
desirable. A student should consult members of the department on the appro­
priateness of various languages, whether ancient or modem, for his own par­
ticular interests.
3, Introduction to the Old Testament. A study of the development of the
religion of ancient Israel through an analysis of its literature and history.
Fall semester. Mr. Henry.
4. Introduction to the New Testament. A study of continuities and trans­
formations in the emergence of Christianity and its development during the
first century A.D. through an analysis of its literature and history.
Spring semester. Mr. Henry.
188

R E L IG IO N
5 Introduction to Asian Religions. An introduction to the study of religion
through an examination of selected phenomena from the religious traditions of
India and China. Attention will focus on Hinduism, Buddhism and Islam in India
and Confucianism and Taoism in China.
Fall semester. Mr. Swearer.
6. Problems of Religious Thought. The purpose of this course is to study
various answers to the chief religious problems of the twentieth century. Prob­
lems include: the nature of religious experience, the existence of God, religion
and morality, science and religion and the problem of evil. Answers include those
given by Martin Buber, Reinhold Niebuhr, Teilhard de Chardin, Paul Tillich
and others. The student is encouraged to find his own answers and to work out
his own religious beliefs.
Each semester. Mr. Urban.
Each semester the introductory courses will meet together for the first two
or three weeks in order to introduce students to some basic methodological
issues and possibilities in the study of religion.
11. Early Christianity. The intellectual, social and organizational develop­
ment of Christianity as it became the dominant religious force in the Roman
Empire and on its fringes. Among the issues to be studied will be theological
adjustments required by the constantly changing place of the church in society.
Fall semester. Mr. Henry.
12. Christianity Since the Reformation.
Spring semester. Not offered 1971-72. Mr. Henry.
13. Theravada Buddhism: A Social History. The course will take up the
following issues: 1) the cultural and historical context in which Buddhism
emerged in India 2500 years ago; 2) classical Theravada doctrines, and their
correlates in contemporary religious institutions in Theravada societies; 3) the
juxtaposition of Buddhist and non-Buddhist religious elements in Theravada
societies; and 4) the reciprocal relationship between Buddhism and social and
political change in contemporary SE Asia. Also listed as Sociology Anthropology
64.
Fall semester. Mr. Swearer or Mr. Piker. To be offered in 1972-73 by Mr.
Piker.
14. Religion in East Asia. A critical study of selected religious phenomena
in China and Japan with particular attention to forms of Mahayana Buddhism
and their interaction with Taoism, Confucianism and Shintoism.
Fall semester. Mr. Swearer.
15. The Contemporary Black Church in Historical Perspective. An analysis of
the present day Black Church and its relationship to the historical struggle for
liberation of the Black community. This course will examine the development
of the Black Church as it parallels the slave era, reconstruction, Black Nationalist
Movement of the 1920s, Black northern migratory patterns, and contemporary
Black social, political and theological movements. Half-course.
Spring semester. Mr. Bryant.
16. Philosophy of Religion. See Philosophy 16.
Fall semester. Mr. Bennett.
18. Basic Christian Doctrines. This course will be divided into three parts.
Part I will be historical centering on the Trinity, Christ, and the Atonement as
189

R E L IG IO N
conceived in Scripture and the early church. Part II will comprise a two-week
reading period during which time students will try to identify the major issues
which have been raised during Part I and begin to read other writings on these
themes. An integral element in Part II will be a conference with the instructor.
After the end of the Reading Period, we will meet to plan Part III. Part III will
comprise a series of meetings for which students will prepare papers for discus­
sion expounding and evaluating the views of Medieval, Reformation, or Con­
temporary writers on the major themes discussed in Part I or papers which
attempt to resolve problems raised in Part I. Such thinkers may include St.
Thomas Aquinas, St. Augustine, K. Barth, R. Bultmann, M. Buber, John Calvin,
Meister Eckhart, K. Rahner, Teilhard de Chardin, and P. Tillich. Issues may in­
clude the quest for the historical Jesus, the interpretation of key concepts in
theology of the early church, and the contemporary relevance of early Christian
theology.
To be offered 1972-73. Mr. Urban.
19. Medieval Philosophy. Philosophical thought from Augustine to the 15th
century. Attention will be paid both to specific problems such as universals,
analogy, and epistemology and to outstanding thinkers such as Anselm, Aquinas,
and Ockham. Although the primary emphasis will be historical, attention will be
given to the contemporary relevance of medieval thought. (Also listed as Philos­
ophy 19.)
Fall semester. To be offered 1972-73. Mr. Urban.
20. Existentialism and Religious Belief. A study of one of the most influential
philosophical movements of the twentieth century and its impact on religious
thought. Among philosophers attention will be given to the writings of Edmund
Husserl, Martin Heidegger, Karl Jaspers, and Jean-Paul Sartre. Among religious
thinkers the writings of Rudolph Bultmann, John Macquarrie, Gabriel Marcel,
and Paul Tillich will be read. Lectures, discussions, and reports. (Also listed as
Philosophy 20.)
Spring semester. Mr. Urban.
21. Jewish Ethics and Theology. Readings in Jewish literature centering on
the concepts of God, man, and society, e.g. Bible, Talmud, Medieval and Modern
Jewish thinkers. Attention will be given to the historical background of each
writing.
Spring semester. Mr. Lachs.
22. Religion and Literature. Aspects of the relationship between poetic sensi­
bility and religious insight and between the world of religious metaphysics and
the imaginative world of the writer. Materials will be taken mainly from the
English traditions of preaching, poetry, and fiction. (Also listed as English
Literature 80.)
Prerequisites: English 1 and one of the Religion courses numbered 3 through 6.
Spring semester. Miss Snyder and Mr. Henry.
23. Early Christian Writings. An advanced course in some special topic in the
history of early Christianity, which may vary from year to year.
Not offered 1971-72. Mr. Henry.
24. Mysticism East and West. Mysticism will be studied within the contexts
of various religious traditions including Christianity, Judaism, Islam, Hinduism,
Buddhism and Taoism. Philosophical and psychological analyses of mysticism
will be considered in addition to a study of its nature and role as a type of reli­
gious phenomenon.
Not offered 1971-72. Mr. Swearer.
190

RELIGION
25. Religious Classics. An advanced course in the study of one or two great
religious thinkers.
Not offered 1971-72. Mr. Urban.
26. Religion as a Cultural Institution: Monasticism. An examination of Bud­
dhist and Christian monasticism, the nature and form of the monastic life and
the contribution of monasticism to these two religious traditions will serve as
material for reflection on methodological issues in the study of religion as a
cultural institution.
Spring semester. Messrs. Swearer and Henry.
29. Sociology of Religion. See Sociology and Anthropology 29.
Not offered 1971-72.
31. Religion and Ethics. The perennial problems of ethics and their rela­
tionship to religious perspectives. Attention will be given to the analysis of
moral and religious discourse. Both classical and contemporary authors will be
examined. (Also listed as Philosophy 31.)
Prerequisite: Philosophy T or one of the courses numbered Religion 3 through
6, or the consent of the instructors.
Fall semester. Messrs. Oberdiek and Urban.
32. Buddhist Texts in Translation. A selected number of Theravada and
Mahayana Buddhist texts will be studied from historical-critical and doctrinalphilosophical points of view. An advanced course for students who have done
previous study in Asian religions.
Not offered 1971-72. Mr. Swearer.
37. American Religious Thought. See History 37.
Fall semester. Mr. Cross.
38. Quakerism. The history of the Society of Friends to the present day.
The characteristic religious and social ideas of the Quakers are considered in
their historical setting.
Spring semester. Mr. Moore.
52. Thesis. Majors in religion are strongly encouraged to write a thesis as
a part of their program.
53. Directed Reading.
54. Conference for Majors. Methodologies in the study of religion. An
examination of selected representatives of the following approaches to the
study of religion: sociology, anthropology, psychology, phenomenology and
philosophy. Open to non-majors with consent of the instructors.
Spring semester. Staff.
H

onors

Sem

inars

103. Early Christianity. A study of the development of Christian thought
and institutions from the end of the first century to the Council of Chalcedon
(A.D. 451). Specific subjects covered will depend on the students’ interests.
Among topics which might be considered are church and empire, missionary
expansion, episcopacy, sacraments and liturgy, councils, doctrinal develop­
ment and dogmatic definition, heresy, beginnings of monasticism. Greek and/or
Latin, as well as French and German, while not required, can be employed
extensively.
Spring semester. To be offered 1972-73. Mr. Henry.
191

RELIGION
104. Origen and Augustine. A study of two major responses to the issues
posed by the confrontation of Christianity and classical culture and by the
need for Christianity to develop a coherent and comprehensive view of things.
Origen (2nd-3rd cent.) and Augustine (4th-5th cent.) will be studied as in­
fluential formulators of the Eastern and Western Christian traditions re­
spectively.
Spring semester. Mr. Henry.
105. The Idea of God in Western Thought. An examination will be made
of writings which have contributed most to Western concepts of God. The
study will include Plato, Aristotle, the Bible, Athanasius, Augustine, Thomas
Aquinas, Luther, Calvin, Kant, Schleiermacher, Rudolf Otto, John Baillie,
and others.
Spring semester. To be offered 1972-73. Mr. Urban.
106. Contemporary Religious Philosophers. The seminar will concentrate
on representative thinkers and schools of thought in the present century. These
will include Karl Barth, Martin Buber, Rudolph Bultmann, Reinhold Niebuhr,
Paul Tillich, and others.
Fall semester. Mr. Urban.
107. Topics in the History of Religions. A study of particular topics in the
history of religions such as myth, mysticism, cultus, ethics.
To be offered 1972-73.
108. Studies in Hinduism and Buddhism. A seminar designed to treat special
topics in Hinduism and Buddhism depending on the interest and needs of
students in the field of the History of Religions. Possible subjects of interest
might include idealistic thought in Hinduism and Buddhism, facets of Bud­
dhism in China and Japan, or the historical and cultural interactions of
Hinduism and Buddhism in South Asia. Topic for 1971-72: Idealistic Thought
in India.
Spring semester. Mr. Swearer.
110. Medieval Philosophy. Philosophical thought from Augustine to the
15th century. Attention will be paid both to specific problems such as universals, analogy, and epistemology and to outstanding thinkers such as Anselm,
Aquinas, Scotus and Ockham. Although primary emphasis will be historical,
attention will be paid to the contemporary relevance of medieval thought.
(Also listed as Philosophy 110.)
Fall semester. To be offered 1972-73. Mr. Urban.
111. Philosophy of Religion.
Fall semester. Mr. Bennett.

See Philosophy 111.

112. Sociology of Religion. See Sociology and Anthropology 107.
Spring semester. Mr. Piker.
120. Thesis. Honors students who choose to do so will customarily write
theses during the senior year. Students are urged to have thesis proposals
approved as early as possible during the junior year.
Members of the Department.

192

SO CIO LO G Y A N D
ANTHROPOLOGY
LEON BRAMSON, Professor and Chairmant
STEVEN PIKER, Associate Professor*
JAMES BROW, Assistant Professor
ROBERT C. M ITCHELL, Assistant Professor*
HANS-EBERHARD MUELLER, Assistant Professor
JEN N IE-K EITH ROSS, Assistant Professor
JON VAN TIL, Assistant Professor
Although Sociology and Anthropology arose initially out of divergent his­
torical traditions, they are engaged in a common task. Studies in the depart­
ment are directed toward the discovery of the general principles which help to
explain the order, meaning, and coherence of human social and cultural life.
To that end, work in the department will emphasize the comparative analysis
of societies and social institutions; the structure and functioning of human
communities; the principles of social organization and disorganization; and the
conditions which tend to foster continuity and change, consensus and conflict.
Emphasis will also be laid on the relevance of Sociology and Anthropology
to social problems in the modern age, particularly to the question of the
nature, conditions and limits of human freedom.
R

eq u irem en ts

and

Recom

m end a tio ns

Course 1 is prerequisite to all other work in the department. Applicants for a
major or minor are required to have taken one additional course. Course majors
will customarily write a thesis in their senior year. Course majors will take a
minimum of eight courses in the department, including the introductory course
and Course 98-99 (thesis). In general, students who take a course may not take
the corresponding seminar.
1. Introduction to Sociology and Anthropology. An exploration of human so­
cieties and cultures: the origin of culture, its acquisition by the individual, and
the diversification of societal types. Topics to be studied comparatively will in­
clude: human evolution, urbanism, ethnic and cultural pluralism, and social
change.
Fall semester. Members of the department.
20. Methods of Social Research. An introduction to the empirical study of
societies. Topics for study include: the philosophical basis of social inquiry, the
design of social research, problems of sampling, measurement, statistical analysis,
data collection and interpretation. Special attention is given to survey research,
participant observation, and the use of the computer in social research. The
major portion of class work consists of lab assignments, including field work.
This course presupposes no particular mathematical background, and is espe­
cially recommended to sophomores or juniors who plan to undertake empirical
research for their theses.
Spring semester. Mr. Mitchell.
tAbsent on leave, spring semester, 1971-72.
♦Absent on leave, fall semester, 1971-72.

193

SOCIOLOGY AND A N T H RO PO LO G Y
21. African Modernization. A survey of modernization theory and the mod­
ernization process in Africa south of the Sahara, including indigenously induced
pre-colonial change, the impact of the West on African traditional societies, the
changes associated with nationalism and independence, and the impact of
urbanization and industrialization. Attention will be given to the uniquely
African aspects of modernization with special reference to modern African cul­
ture. Selected countries will be examined intensively.
Fall semester. To be offered in 1972-73. Mr. Mitchell.
22. Race and Ethnic Relations in the United States. Ethnic and minority rela­
tions in America, their structure and patterns of change. Particular emphasis
will be placed on the American Negro: the development of subcultures, effects of
racial discrimination on the individual, and social movements arising out of the
acculturation process. The experience of other ethnic groups, the melting-pot
thesis, and the persistence of religious subcultures will also be studied.
Not offered in 1971-72. Mr. Van Til.
23. Comparative Social Organization. Examines the ways in which anthro­
pologists and sociologists have tried to comprehend the variety of human soci­
eties. Such concepts as structure, function, process, and evolution are considered
in their social application. Particular attention is paid to non-Western social
systems in which kinship is a pervasive regulating principle in political, economic
and ritual organization, as well as in domestic affairs.
Spring semester. Mr. Brow.
26. Language, Society and Culture. The relationship of language to culture
and society will be investigated through study of the influence of social and cul­
tural context on language use, the distribution of linguistic, social, and cultural
borders in speech communities, and the interrelationship of the participants,
topics, setting, code and communication channels in the speech event. Specific
topics will include multi-lingualism, nonverbal communication, and linguistic
relativity. Students will do several short observation projects in these areas.
Spring semester. To be offered in 1972-73. Mrs. Ross.
29. Sociology of Religion. Also listed as Religion 29. Examination of the re­
lationship between religion and society. Sociological theories of religion, religious
organization and behavior, religion and social change, processes of institutionali­
zation and secularization.
Not offered in 1971-72.
40. Man and Environment. Consideration will be given to the methodology
of ecological analysis and its application to the study of the causes and conse­
quences of the growth of technology and human populations, especially in rela­
tion to the question of environmental deterioration. An attempt is made to
synthesize approaches and information from various disciplines within the social
and natural sciences. (Also listed as Biology 40.)
Prerequisite: Completion of distribution requirement in Groups 1 and 4.
Spring semester. Mr. Hickman and Mr. Mitchell.
50. Modern Social Theory. The social and intellectual background of the rise
of social science, with consideration of selected social theorists and emphasis on
the relation of ideology to theory and research in sociology. Among theorists
who will be considered are St. Simon, Comte, Durkheim, Marx, Weber, Simmel,
Veblen, Mannheim, and Freud.
F a ll se m e s te r. Mr. Bramson.
194

SOCIOLOGY AND A N TH RO PO LO G Y
51. Caribbean Society. A review of the attempt to develop generalizations
about the structure of Caribbean society. Theoretical materials will focus on the
historical role of slavery, the nature of plural societies, race, class, ethnicity
and specific institutions such as the family, the school, the church, and the po­
litical structure.
Not offered in 1971-72. Mr. Bramson.
57-8. Colloquium: Social Borders. This course will try to define the proc­
esses by which basic social characteristics such as age, sex, or ethnicity become
identified and maintained as social borders which define groups, roles, and con­
flicts in both traditional and industrial societies.
Spring semester. Mrs. Ross.
59. Urban Sociology & Politics (cross-listed as Political Science 10). Particu­
lar emphasis will be placed on the politics and sociology of the contemporary
American city, and upon aspects of urban society that relate especially to racial
and economic segregation. The course will examine the way in which urban
social problems become defined and major alternative approaches toward the
resolution of these problems. This course is required for students who wish to
take Problems in Urban Education (Political Science 12) and/or Problems in
Urban Housing (Sociology-Anthropology 59A, cross-listed as Political Science
11.)

Spring semester.

Mr. Cottingham and Mr. Van Til.

59A. Problems in Urban Housing (cross-listed as Political Science 11). This
course provides a policy orientation toward housing, both in its environmental
and social scientific aspects. Coordinated student research projects will addressthe way in which housing problems become defined and paths toward the resolu­
tion of these problems. Special emphasis will be placed on ways in which tech­
nological and political solutions may be jointly developed toward the resolution
of housing problems. Students who take this course are required to take the
course Urban Sociology and Politics concurrently.
Spring semester. Mr. Van Til and Mr. Willis.
61. Social Stratification. Examination of theories and empirical studies of
structured social inequality and processes of class formation in historical and
contemporary societies. Special emphasis will be placed on stratification in con­
temporary American society. The range of topics varies from year to year, but
might include poverty and income distribution, the structure of power, class sub­
cultures and styles of life, deviance and delinquency, ethnic stratification, and
social mobility.
Spring semester. Mr. Mueller.
62. Political Sociology. (Also listed as Political Science 62.) Sociological
analysis of political elites, politics, and political institutions in comparative-his­
torical perspective. Although the major focus will be on modern societies, a part
of the course will be devoted to pre-modern, primarily medieval European, con­
ditions and the rise of the modem nation-state. Particular emphasis will be given
to theories and empirical studies of various types of protest movements in his­
torical and contemporary societies.
Fall semester. Mr. Mueller.
63. Psychological Anthropology. The relationship between the psychological
attributes of individuals and the workings of institutions and societies. The course
examines the following specific issues: the evolution of the psychological and
symbolic capacities which underlie culture; socialization, or the transmission of
195

SOCIOLOGY AND A N TH RO PO LO G Y
culture from generation to generation; theoretical viewpoints on the individual
in society; culture and mental health. Case materials drawn from non-Westem
cultures as well as the West.
Prerequisite: Sociology and Anthropology 1, or introductory level work in Psy­
chology, or permission of instructor.
Spring semester. Mr. Piker.
64. Theravada Buddhism: A Social History. The course will take up the fol­
lowing issues: 1) the cultural and historical context in which Buddhism emerged
in India 2500 years ago; 2) classical Theravada doctrines, and their correlates in
contemporary religious institutions in Theravada societies; 3) the juxtaposition
of Buddhist and non-Buddhist religious elements in Theravada societies; and
4) the reciprocal relationship between Buddhism and social and political change
in contemporary SE Asia. (Also listed as Religion 13.)
Fall semester. To be offered in 1972-73. Mr. Piker.
66. Directed Reading. Individual or group study in fields of special interest
to the students not dealt with in the regular course offerings. Consent of the
chairman and of the instructor is required.
Members of the department.
67-8. Colloquium: Human Resources. A research colloquium emphasizing
the study of the intersection of the educational system and the occupational
structure. Specific problems will include improvement of the educational system,
military manpower policy, the human career, and professionalization. Each
member of the colloquium will do a project.
Not offered in 1971-72. Mr. Bramson.
70. Economic Anthropology. Analysis of economic organization, the forms
and quality of economic action, and relations between economic and other in­
stitutions in primitive and peasant societies. Examines societies as systems of
exchange and as adaptations to their natural and cultural environments.
Spring semester. Mr. Brow.
71-2. Colloquium: The Sociology of Intellectual Life. An examination of the
main approaches to the sociological study of culture and intellectual life. Par­
ticular attention will be given to the role of intellectuals in modem society. The
colloquium will provide an opportunity for research on the sociology of science,
literature, art, and music.
Spring semester. Mr. Mueller.
74. Political Anthropology. This course will utilize the comparative perspec­
tive of anthropology to study the ways in which authority is acquired and ac­
cepted as legitimate, the ways in which decisions are made or avoided, and the
ways in which conflict is defined, mediated and resolved or extended. Subject
matter will include political communities in various cultural contexts and at
various levels of social and technological complexity, such as a Bushman band,
an American Indian tribe, a French village, and a Boston ward.
Spring semester. To be offered in 1972-73. Mrs. Ross.
75. Education and Society. Comparative study of the functions of schools
from the perspectives of sociology and anthropology. Among the topics to be
discussed are the relationship of educational institutions to other sectors of
society, and the question of alternatives to schooling in both modernizing and
“post-industrial” societies.
F a ll se m e s te r. Mr. Bramson.
196

SOCIOLOGY AND A N TH RO PO LO G Y
98-99. Thesis. Theses will be required of all Course majors. Seniors will
normally take two consecutive semesters of thesis tutorial (Course 98-99) during
their senior year. Students are urged to have their thesis proposals approved as
early as possible during the junior year.
Members of the department.
H

onors

Sem

inars

102. Comparative Social Organization. Examines the ways in which anthro­
pologists and sociologists have tried to comprehend the variety of human soci­
eties. Such concepts as structure, function, process, and evolution are considered
in their social application. Particular attention is paid to non-Western social sys­
tems in which kinship is a pervasive regulating principle in political, economic
and ritual organization, as well as in domestic affairs.
Spring semester. Mr. Brow.
103. Race and Culture. A comparative study of the patterns of ethnic and
minority relations in society, with consideration of the factors underlying per­
sistence and change. Race and culture will be related through an examination of
conflicts of values, social hierarchies, and the maintenance of subcultures.
Not offered in 1971-72. Mr. Van Til.
104. Psychological Anthropology. The significance of psychological theories
for the analysis of social and cultural systems. Special emphasis will be given
to personality and social structure, religious belief systems, and comparative
socialization within a variety of cultural settings.
Spring semester. Mr. Piker.
105. Modern Social Theory. The social and intellectual background of the
rise of social science, with consideration of selected social theorists and empha­
sis on the relation of ideology to theory and research in sociology.
Spring semester. Not offered in 1971-72. Mr. Bramson.
107. Sociology of Religion. Also listed as Religion 112. An exploration of
the relationship between religion and society. Special emphasis will be given to
the social and historical determinants of changes in religious institutions, and to
the adaptive qualities of religious institutions in periods of social upheaval. Case
materials will be drawn largely from societies and religions of South and South­
east Asia, principally Hinduism and Buddhism. Work in the seminar will include
a research project.
Spring semester. Mr. Piker.
108. Social Stratification. Examination of theories and empirical studies of
structured social inequality and processes of class formation in historical and
contemporary societies. Special emphasis will be placed on stratification in con­
temporary American society. The range of topics varies from year to year, but
might include poverty and income distribution, the structure of power, class sub­
cultures and styles of life, deviance and delinquency, ethnic stratification, and
social mobility.
Spring semester. Mr. Mueller.
109. Social and Cultural Change. Classical and modern theories of change.
Case studies of long term and short term aspects of change, including the indus­
trial revolution, the modernization process, collective behavior, and aspects of
contemporary and future American society.
F a ll s e m e s te r . To be offered in 1972-73. Mr. Mitchell.
197

SOCIOLOGY AND A N TH RO PO LO G Y
111. Urban Sociology. The historical growth of cities, the social structure of
urban areas, impact of urbanization on social relations, and the emergent ideol­
ogies of city life considered from the main perspectives of urban sociology.
Topics of special interest include the structure and process of metropolitan life,
the consequences of urbanization for rural life and small towns, the prospects
for urban planning, and the contemporary crisis of the cities.
Fall semester. Mr. Van Til.
112. Sociolinguistics. The influence of social and cultural context on lan­
guage use will be investigated, with special emphasis on multilingualism, creoles
and pidgins, language standardization and planning, and the interrelationship of
participants, topics, setting, code and communication channels in the speech
event.
Fall semester. Mrs. Ross.
114. Political Sociology. Sociological analysis of political elites, politics, and
political institutions in comparative-historical perspective. Although the major
focus will be on modem societies, some time will be devoted to premodern, pri­
marily medieval European, conditions and the rise of the modern nation-state.
Particular emphasis will be given to theories and empirical studies of various
types of protest movements in historical and contemporary societies.
Fall semester. To be offered in 1972-73. Mr. Mueller.
120. Thesis. Honors students who choose to do so will customarily write
theses during the senior year. Students are urged to have their thesis proposals
approved as early as possible during the junior year.
Members of the department.

198

THE CO RPO RATION
BOARD

OF M ANAG ERS

A L U M N I O F F I C E R S and C O U N C I L
FACULTY
AD M INISTRATIO N

THE CO R PO R A TIO N
Robert M. Browning, Chairman
Hewitt Hill Farm, R.D. 2, South Royalton, Vt. 05068
Kermit Gordon, Vice Chairman
2202 Wyoming Ave., N. W., Washington, D. C. 20008
William F. Lee, Chairman of the Executive Committee
5 Guernsey Road, Swarthmore, Pa. 19081
Sue Thomas Turner, Secretary
Cook Road, Alfred Station, New York 14803
Joseph B. Shane, Assistant Secretary
Swarthmore College, Swarthmore, Pa. 19081
Richard B. Willis, Treasurer
Provident National Bank, P.O. Box 7648, Philadelphia, Pa. 19101
Edward K. Cratsley, Assistant Treasurer
Swarthmore College, Swarthmore, Pa. 19081

BO A R D OF M A N A G ER S
Ex officio
Robert D. Cross, President of Swarthmore College, Swarthmore, Pa. 19081.
Emeriti
Elisabeth Hallowell Bartlett, 100 West University Parkway, Baltimore, Md.
21210 .

Isabel Jenkins Booth, Jefferson House, The Strand, New Castle, Del. 19720.
Eleanor Stabler Clarke, Wildman Arms, Harvard Bldg., Apt. 822, Swarthmore,
Pa. 19081
Hadassah M. L. Holcombe, The Kenilworth, Alden Park, Philadelphia, Pa.
19144.
Philip T. Sharpies, The Fidelity Bldg., Suite 2532, 123 South Broad Street,
Philadelphia, Pa. 19109.
Claude C. Smith, 1617 Land Title Building, Philadelphia, Pa. 19110.
Barclay White, 119 Coulter Street, Ardmore, Pa. 19003.
Alfred H. Williams, 216 N. Providence Road, Wallingford, Pa. 19086.
Joseph H. Willits, Box 441 A, Bridgetown Pike, R.D. 1, Langhorne, Pa. 19047.
Life Member
Helen Gawthrop Worth, 805 Augusta Road, Westover Hills, Wilmington, Del.
19806.
201

BOARD OF M ANAGERS
Term Expires December, 1971
Robert M. Browning, Hewitt Hill Farm, R.D. 2, South Royalton, Vt. 05068.
Carl K. Dellmuth, The Fidelity Bank, Philadelphia, Pa. 19109.
Stephen G. Lax, SGL Industries, Inc., 300 Harvard Avenue, Westville, N. J.
08093.
Isabel Logan Lyon, 20 West 16th Street, New York, N. Y. 10011.
William Poole, 350 Delaware Trust Bldg., Wilmington, Del. 19801.
Howard S. Turner, Turner Construction Co., 150 E. 42nd Street, New York,
N. Y. 10017.
*G. Lupton Broomell, Jr., Leeds and Northrup Co., North Wales, Pa. 19454.
*Ann Lapham Frazer, 510 Beatty Road, Springfield, Pa. 19064.
Term Expires December, 1972
Boyd T. Barnard, 914 Philadelphia National Bank Building, Philadelphia, Pa.
19107.
Clement M. Biddle, 230 Oak Ridge Avenue, Summit, N. J. 07901.
George B. Clothier, 1418 Packard Building, Philadelphia, Pa. 19102.
Kermit Gordon, 2202 Wyoming Ave., N.W., Washington, D. C. 20008.
Clark Kerr, 8300 Buckingham Drive, El Cerrito, California 94530.
Thomas B. McCabe, Scott Plaza, Philadelphia, Pa. 19113.
*J. Gordon Lippincott, 150 East 22nd Street, New York, N. Y. 10010.
*Winnifred Poland Pierce, 211 McCotter Drive, Ann Arbor, Mich. 48103.
Term Expires December, 1973
Dorothy Lucking Hagerty, 51-8 Revere Rd., Drexel Hill, Pa. 19026.
H. Thomas Hallowell, Jr., The Benson East, Jenkintown, Pa. 19046.
William F. Lee, 5 Guernsey Rd., Swarthmore, Pa. 19081.
Audrey Shields Penn, 4105 Spruce St., Apt. A-3, Philadelphia, Pa. 19102.
J. Lawrence Shane, 21 College Avenue, Swarthmore, Pa. 19081.
Sue Thomas Turner, Cook Road, Alfred Station, N. Y. 14803.
Richard B. Willis, Provident National Bank, P. O. Box 7648, Philadelphia,
Pa. 19101.
*Eugene M. Lang, 912 Fifth Avenue, New York, N. Y. 10021.
*Ellen Ash Peters, 159 Glen Parkway, Hamden, Ct. 06517.
Term Expires December, 1974
Charles F. Barber, 120 Broadway, New York, N. Y. 10005.
Edwin M. Bush, Jr., 120 S. La Salle Street, Chicago, 111. 60603.
Julien Cornell, Central Valley, N. Y. 10917.
Barbara Whipple Heilman, Box 328, Lititz, Pa. 17543.
Dorothy Shoemaker McDiarmid, 390 Maple Avenue East, Vienna, Va. 22180.
Michel C. Oksensberg, 34 Greentree Terrace, Tenafly, N. J. 07670.
*Donald J. Lloyd-Jones, 633 Third Avenue, New York, N. Y. 10017.
*Katherine Conner Doughty, 4630 Walnut Street, Philadelphia, Pa. 19139.
‘ Nominated by the Alumni Association

202

BOARD OF M ANAGERS
COMMITTEES OF THE BOARD
The Chairman of the Board is ex officio a member of every Committee
Executive
Kermit Gordon
Thomas B. McCabe
Sue Thomas Turner
Richard B. Willis

William F. Lee
Boyd T. Barnard
G. Lupton Broomell, Jr.
Carl K. Dellmuth
Ann Lapham Frazer

Finance and Trusts Administration
Richard B. Willis
Thomas B. McCabe
Charles E. Rickards
George B. Clothier
Claude C. Smith
Carl K. Dellmuth
Howard S. Turner
H. Thomas Hallowell, Jr.
Donald J. Lloyd-Jones
Instruction and Libraries
G. Lupton Broomell, Jr.
Michel C. Oksenberg
Eden Ash Peters
Charles F. Barber
Winnifred Poland Pierce
Kermit Gordon
William Poole
Dorothy Lucking Hagerty
Sue Thomas Turner
Barbara Whipple Heilman
Helen Gawthrop Worth
Clark Kerr
Thomas B. McCabe
Boyd T. Barnard
Richard C. Bond
H. Thomas Hallowed, Jr.

Investment
J. Lawrence Shane
Philip T. Sharpies
Richard B. Willis
Property

William F. Lee
Boyd T. Barnard
G. Lupton Broomed, Jr.
Julien Corned
Ann Lapham Frazer
Clement M. Biddle
Edwin M. Bush, Jr.
Katherine Conner Doughty
Barbara Whipple Heilman
Stephen G. Lax
Boyd T. Barnard
Ann Lapham Frazer
Dorothy Lucking Hagerty
Carl K. Dellmuth
Clement M. Biddle
Edwin M. Bush, Jr.
Julien Corned
H. Thomas Hallowed, Jr.
Eugene M. Lang

Eugene M. Lang
J. Gordon Lippincott
Kathryn Sonneborn Read
Howard S. Turner
Student Activities
Isabel Logan Lyon
Dorothy Shoemaker McDiarmid
Audrey Shields Penn
Winnifred Poland Pierce
Sue Thomas Turner
Nominating
Stephen G. Lax
J. Lawrence Shane
Helen Gawthrop Worth
Development
Stephen G. Lax
William F. Lee
J. Gordon Lippincott
Isabel Logan Lyon
William Poole
203

A L U M N I O F F I C E R S a nd C O U N C I L
President, W. Marshall Schmidt ’47, 147 Brookstone Dr., Princeton, N. J. 08540.
Vice-President for Men, Alden S. Bennett ’40, 139 Lake View Drive, Media,
Pa. 19063.
Vice-President for Women, Laura Reppert Unger ’49, Davis Rd., R. D. #2,
Malvern, Pa. 19355.
Secretary, Ruth Wilcox Mahler ’49, 59 Todmorden Drive, Wallingford, Pa.
19086.
Term Expires
June
Zone A
1972 Brian E. Appel ’62, 328 S. Juniper St., Philadelphia, Pa. 19107.
Frank A. Oski ’54, 611 Yale Road, Bala Cynwyd, Pa. 19004.
John E. Pixton, Jr. ’46, 445 Dreshertown Rd., Fort Washington, Pa.
19034.
1973 E. Boyd Asplundh ’50, 654 Dale Road, Bryn Athyn, Pa. 19009
William J. Erdman ’43, 3803 The Oak Road, Philadelphia, Pa. 19129.
1974 G. Grant Bell ’60, 100 Swarthmore Avenue, Ridley Park, Pa. 19078.
C. Oliver Burt, III ’64, 217 Kent Road, Ardmore, Pa. 19003.
1972 Eleanor Yearsley Bennett ’40, 139 Lake View Drive, Media, Pa. 19063.
Virginia Butts Cryer ’48, 309 Copples Lane, Wallingford, Pa; 19086.
Phyllis Hall Raymond ’54, 630 University Place, Swarthmore, Pa. 19081.
1973 Mary Longenecker Frorer ’57, 307 Elm Ave., Swarthmore, Pa. 19081.
Anne Tomlinson Welsh ’63, 425 S. 20th St., Philadelphia, Pa. 19146.
1974 Martha Scott Myer ’62, 14 David Drive, Media, Pa. 19063.
Anne Schick Place ’55, 214 Cornell Avenue, Swarthmore, Pa. 19081.
Zone B
1972 Jerome Simson ’41, 77 Groton St., Forest Hills Gardens, N. Y. 11375.
1973 Philip B. Dunham ’58, 2311 E. Genesee St., Syracuse, N. Y. 13210.
Gavin Wright ’65, 788 Elm Street, New Haven, Conn. 06511.
1974 Lawrence C. Christianson ’61, 14 Wolf Hill Road, Chappaqua, N. Y.
10514.
Jed Saul Rakoff ’64, 337 W. 76th St., Apt. IB, New York, N. Y. 10023.
1972 Kay Eagle Kyle ’54, 225 Mt. Hope Blvd., Hastings-on-Hudson, N. Y.
10706.
1973 Jane Foster Buckwalter ’60, 184 Berkeley Pla., Brooklyn, N. Y. 11217.
Anna Huntington Deming ’43, 38 Killdeer Rd., Hamden, Conn. 06517.
1974 Caroline Hodges Persell ’62, 21 Perry Street, New York, N. Y. 10014.
Carol O. Seabrook ’64, 21 East 10th Street, New York, N. Y. 10003.
Zone C
1972 David D. Potter ’52, 132 Brattle St., Cambridge, Mass. 02138.
Mary Jane Winde Gentry ’53, R.D. # 2, Williston, Vermont 05409.
204

A L U M N I O F F I C E R S A N D C O U N C IL
Zone D
1973 Robert T. Simpson ’59, 5219 Elsmere Ave., Bethesda, Md. 20014.
1974 Charles F. Ruff ’60, 3521 Ordway Street N.W., Washington, D. C.
20016.
1973 Georgene Mallonee Elliott ’62, 4414 Groveland Ave., Baltimore, Md.
21215.
1974 Peggy Bebie Thomson ’43, 23 Grafton Street, Chevy Chase, Md. 20015.
Zone E
1972 Benjamin H. Beattie ’55, R.D. # 1 , Box 227-A, Jeannette, Pa. 15644.
Elizabeth Earll Verlie ’41, 3586 Runnymede Rd., Cleveland, Ohio 44121.
1973

1973
1974
1973
1974

1972
1974
1972
1974

Zone F
Paul N. Guthrie, Jr. ’59, Box 195A, Route 5, Chapel Hill, N. C. 27514.
Patricia Myers Westine ’61, 15511 Oak Grove Drive, San Antonio, Texas
78228.
Zone G
J. Parker Hall ’55, 1161 Pine St., Winnetka, 111. 60093.
Christoph K. Lohmann ’58, 1018 S. Ballantine Rd., Bloomington, Ind.
47401.
Alice Peatman Dettmers ’54, 920 Adelaide Drive, Northbrook, 111. 60062.
Barbara Lamar Zimmerman ’59, 1208 Bydding Rd., Ann Arbor, Mich.
48103.
Zone H
John K. McNulty ’56, 439 Spruce St., Berkeley, Calif. 94708.
David F. Fitchett ’61, 1166 Harrison Street, Denver, Colo. 80206.
Gretchen Chase Howe ’44, 36 Los Dedos, Orinda, Calif. 94563.
Constance Longshore Hauver ’60, 5825 Bell Flower Drive, Littleton,
Colo. 80120.

205

THE FACULTY
Robert D. Cross, B.A., M.A. and Ph.D., Harvard University, President. 324
Cedar Lane.
Edward K. Cratsley, B.A., College of Wooster; M.B.A. and D.C.S., Harvard
University, Vice-President (Administration), Controller, and Professor of
Economics. 741 Harvard Avenue.
Joseph B. Shane, B.A., Swarthmore College; M.A., University of Pennsylvania,
Vice President (Public Relations and Alumni Affairs) and Professor of Educa­
tion. 25 Dogwood Lane.
Charles E. Gilbert, B.A., Haverford College; Ph.D., Northwestern University,
Provost and Professor of Political Science. 406 Walnut Lane.
Gilmore Stott, B.A. and M.A., University of Cincinnati; B.A. and M.A., Uni­
versity of Oxford; M.A. and Ph.D, Princeton University, Associate ProvostRegistrar and Lecturer in Philosophy, 318 Dartmouth Avenue.
J. Edward Skeath, B.A., Swarthmore College; M.A. and Ph.D., University of
Illinois, Dean of Men and Associate Professor of Mathematics. 11 Benjamin
West Avenue.
Deborah Townsend, B.A. and M.A., University of Michigan, Dean of Women.
512 Elm Avenue.
Lewis R. Gaty, II, B.A., Swarthmore College, Director of Institutional Re­
search and Lecturer in Economics. Swarthmore College.
James F. Govan, B.A., The University of the South; M.A., Emory University;
Ph.D., The Johns Hopkins University, Librarian. 730 Yale Avenue.
Martha A. Connor, B.S. and M.A., University of Pennsylvania; B.S. in L.S.,
Drexel Institute, Associate Librarian. 325 Dartmouth Avenue.
Eleanor A. Maass, B.A. and M.S., University of Illinois; Ph.D., University of
Wisconsin, Science Librarian. 415 Cornell Avenue.
Howard H. Williams, B.A., Lake Forest College; M.A. and B.S. in L.S., Colum­
bia University, Reference Librarian. 144 Park Avenue.
Edgar R. Mullins, Jr., B.A. Grinnell College; M.A. and Ph.D., University of
Illinois. Director of Computer Education and Activities. 304 Callender Lane,
Wallingford, Pa.
EMERITI
Mary Albertson, B.A., M.A. and Ph.D., Bryn Mawr College, Isaac H. Clothier
Professor Emeritus of History and International Relations. 505 Ogden Avenue.
Lydia Baer, B.A., Oberlin College; M.A. and Ph.D.; University of Pennsyl­
vania, Associate Professor Emeritus of German. Manatee River Hotel, Braden­
ton, Fla.
Heinrich Brinkmann, B.A., Stanford University; M.A. and Ph.D., Harvard
University, Albert L. and Edna Pownall Buffington Professor Emeritus of
Mathematics. Wallingford Arms, Wallingford, Pa.
206

FACULTY
Susan P. Cobbs, B.A., Randolph-Macon Woman’s College; M.A., New York
University; Ph.D., University of Chicago. Dean Emeritus and Professor Emer­
itus of Classics. Box 147, Greensboro, Ala.
Edward H. Cox, B.S., Earlham College; M.A., Harvard University; Docteur
es Science, L’Université de Geneve, Docteur honoris causa, L’Université de
Montpellier; D.Sc., Earlham College, Edmund Allen Professor Emeritus of
Chemistry. 509 Ogden Avenue.
Henry Jermain Maude Creighton, B.A., M.A., and LL.D., Dalhousie University;
M.Sc., University of Birmingham; D.Sc., Das eidgenössische Polytechnikum,
Zürich; D.Sc., Swarthmore College, Edmund Allen Professor Emeritus of
Chemistry. Compartment # 7 , Site 13, Tantallon R.R. 1, Nova Scotia, Canada.
Robert K. Enders, B.A., and Ph.D., University of Michigan, Isaac H. Clothier,
Jr. Professor Emeritus of Biology. 311 Elm Avenue.
E. J. Faulkner, Professor Emeritus of Physical Education for Men. 235 Dickin­
son Avenue.
Duncan Graham Foster, B.A. and M.A., Harvard University; Ph.D., The Johns
Hopkins University, Professor Emeritus of Chemistry. 15 Crest Lane.
Milan W. Garrett, B.A. and M.A., Stanford University; B.A. and D.Phil.,
University of Oxford, Professor Emeritus of Physics. 101 Orchard Circle, Oak
Ridge, Tenn.
Philip Marshall Hicks, B.A. and M.A., Swarthmore College; Ph.D., University
of Pennsylvania, Alexander Griswold Cummins Professor Emeritus of English
Literature. Avondale, Pa.
Everett L. Hunt, B.A., Huron College; M.A., University of Chicago; D.Litt.,
Huron College, Dean Emeritus and Professor Emeritus of English. 221 N.
Princeton Avenue.
Walter B. Keighton, Jr., B.A. Swarthmore College; Ph.D. Princeton University,
Edmund Allen Professor Emeritus of Chemistry. 311 Cedar Lane.
Fredric Klees, B.A., Bowdoin College, Professor Emeritus of English. 220
South Chester Road.
Olga Lang, Graduate, University of Moscow; Ph.D., Columbia University,
Associate Professor Emeritus of Russian. 611 W. 111th St., New York, N. Y.
Edith Philips, B.A., Goucher College; Docteur de l’Université de Paris, Susan
W. Lippincott Professor Emeritus of French. 517 Elm Avenue.
James D. Sorber, B.A., Lehigh University; M.A., University of Nebraska,
Professor Emeritus of Spanish. 404 Walnut Lane.
Frederick B. Tolles, B.A., M.A. and Ph.D., Harvard University; D.Litt.,
Haverford College, Howard M. and Chartes F. Jenkins' Professor Emeritus of
Quaker History and Research and Director Emeritus of the Friends Historical
Library. 325 Dartmouth Avenue.
Elizabeth Cox Wright, B.A., Wellesley College; M.A. and Ph.D., University of
Pennsylvania, Professor Emeritus of English. Rose Valley Road, Moylan, Pa.

207

FA CU LTY
PROFESSORS
Paul H. Beik, B.A., Union College; M.A. and Ph.D., Columbia University, Cen­
tennial Professor of History. 4 Whittier Place.
tOlexa-Myron Bilaniuk, Ingénieur, Université de Louvain; B.S.E., B.S., M.S.,
M.A. and Ph.D., University of Michigan, Professor of Physics. 100 Plush Mill
Road, Wallingford, Pa.
tLeon Bramson, B.A. and M.A. University of Chicago; Ph.D., Harvard Univer­
sity, Professor of Sociology. 333 Vassar Avenue.
Samuel T. Carpenter, B.C.E., C.E. and M.S., Ohio State University, Isaiah V.
Williamson Professor of Civil and Mechanical Engineering. 612 Ogden Ave.
Hilde D. Cohn, Dr. Phil., University of Heidelberg, Professor of German.
302 North Chester Road.
David Cowden, B.A., Swarthmore College; M.A. and Ph.D., Harvard Univer­
sity, Professor of English. 312 Ogden Avenue.
*W. C. Elmore, B.S., Lehigh University; Ph.D., Yale University, Morris L.
Clothier Professor of Physics. 525 Walnut Lane.
Edward A. Fehnel, B.S., M.S. and Ph.D., Lehigh University, Professor of Chem­
istry. 600 Elm Avenue.
James A. Field, Jr., B.S., M.A. and Ph.D., Harvard University, Isaac H.
Clothier Professor of History. 612 Hillborn Avenue.
Launce J. Flemister, B.A., M.A. and Ph.D., Duke University, Professor of
Zoology. Rogers Lane and Plush Mill Road, Wallingford, Pa.
Kenneth J. Gergen, B.A., Yale University; Ph.D., Duke University, Professor
of Psychology. Millhouse, Rose Valley and Possum Hollow Roads, Walling­
ford, Pa.
Mark A. Heald, B.A., Oberlin College; M.S. and Ph.D., Yale University,
Professor of Physics. 420 Rutgers Avenue.
Brendan Kennelly, B.A. and M.A., Trinity College, Dublin; Ph.D., Leeds
University, Julien and Virginia Cornell Visiting Professor of English Literature.
(Trinity College, Dublin) 405 Walnut Lane.
Luzern G. Livingston, B.S., Lawrence College; Ph.D., University of Wisconsin,
Professor of Botany. 15 Dartmouth Circle.
Paul C. Mangelsdorf, Jr., B.A., Swarthmore College; Ph.D. Harvard Univer­
sity, Professor of Physics. 110 Cornell Avenue.
Franz H. Mautner, Dr. Phil., University of Vienna, Professor of German. 408
Walnut Lane.
John D. McCrumm, B.A. and M.S., University of Colorado, Howard N. and
Ada J. Eavenson Professor of Engineering. 525 Elm Avenue.
Norman A. Meinkoth, B. of Ed., Southern Illinois Teachers College; M.S. and
Ph.D., University of Illinois, Professor of Zoology. 431 West Woodland Ave­
nue, Springfield, Pa.
♦Absent on leave, fall semester, 1971-72.
j Absent on leave, spring semester, 1971-72.

208

FACULTY
John M. Moore, B.A., Park College; B.D., Union Theological Seminary; M.A.,
Harvard University; Ph.D., Columbia University, Acting Director of the
Friends Historical Library and Professor of Philosophy and Religion. 512
Ogden Avenue.
¿Bernard Morrill, B.S. in M.E., Massachusetts Institute of Technology; M.M.E.,
University of Delaware; Ph.D., University of Michigan, Henry C. and J.
Archer Turner Professor of Engineering. 21 Oberlin Avenue.
¿Helen F. North, B.A., M.A. and Ph.D., Cornell University, Centennial Pro­
fessor of Classics. 604 Ogden Avenue.
Martin Ostwald, B.A., University of Toronto; M.A., University of Chicago;
Ph.D., Columbia University, Professor of Classics. 2 Whittier Place.
Harold E. Pagliaro, B.A., M.A. and Ph.D., Columbia University, Professor
of English. 536 Ogden Avenue.
Dean Peabody, B.A., Swarthmore College; Ph.D., Harvard University, Pro­
fessor of Psychology. 5 Whittier Place.
*J. Roland Pennock, B.A., Swarthmore College; M.A. and Ph.D., Harvard Uni­
versity, Richter Professor of Political Science. 3 Whittier Place.
Frank C. Pierson, B.A., Swarthmore College; Ph.D., Columbia University,
Joseph Wharton Professor of Political Economy. 740 Ogden Avenue.
tHedley H. Rhys, B.A., West Virginia University; M.A. and Ph.D., Harvard
University, Professor of Art History. 315 Ogden Avenue.
¿David Rosen, B.A., New York University; M.A. and Ph.D., University of
Pennsylvania, Professor of Mathematics. 336 North Princeton Avenue.
David G. Smith, B.A. and M.A., University of Oklahoma; Ph.D., The Johns
Hopkins University, Professor of Political Science. 513 Elm Avenue.
Willis J. Stetson, B.A., Swarthmore College; M.A., University of Pennsyl­
vania, Professor of Physical Education for Men and Director of Athletics. 144
North Highland Road, Springfield, Pa.
Peter Gram Swing, B.A. and M.A., Harvard University; Ph.D., University of
Chicago. Professor of Music and Director of the Chorus. 614 Hillborn
Avenue.
Francis P. Tafoya, B.A. and M.A., University of Colorado; Ph.D., Yale Uni­
versity, Professor of French. 635 North Chester Road.
Derek Traversi, B.A. and M.A., University of Oxford, Professor of English.
401 Walnut Lane.
P. Linwood Urban, Jr., B.A., Princeton University; S.T.B., S.T.M. and
Th.D., General Theological Seminary, Professor of Religion. 20 South Prince­
ton Avenue.
Peter van de Kamp, Cand. and Docts., University of Utrecht; Ph.D., Univer­
sity of California; D.Phil., University of Groningen, Edward Hicks Magill
Professor of Astronomy and Director of Sproul Observatory. 15 Wellesley
Road.
¿Absent on leave, 1971-72.
♦Absent on leave, fall semester, 1971-72.
¿Absent on leave, spring semester, 1971-72.

209

FACULTY
Robert M. Walker, B.A. and M.F.A., Princeton University; Ph.D., Harvard
University, Professor of Art History. 212 Elm Avenue.
Hans Wallach, Dr. Phil., University of Berlin, Centennial Professor of Psy­
chology. 604 Elm Avenue.
Neal A. Weber, B.A., M.S. and D.Sc., University of North Dakota; M.A. and
Ph.D., Harvard University, Professor of Zoology. 1 Whittier Place.
Harrison M. Wright, B.A., M.A. and Ph.D., Harvard University, Professor of
History. 319 Cedar Lane.
A S S O C IA T E P R O F E S S O R S
Elisa Asensio, M.A., Middlebury College, Associate Professor of Spanish. 500
Oakley Rd., Haverford, Pa.
George C. Avery, B.A., M.A. and Ph.D., University of Pennsylvania, Asso­
ciate Professor of German. 230 Haverford Avenue.
Robert C. Bannister, B.A. and Ph.D., Yale University; B.A. and M.A., Univer­
sity of Oxford, Associate Professor of History. 606 Elm Avenue.
*Carl Bams, B.A., Brown University; M.S. in E.E., Massachusetts Institute of
Technology, Associate Professor of Electrical Engineering. 8 Whittier Place.
Daniel Bennett, B.A., Harvard University; Ph.D., Stanford University, Asso­
ciate Professor of Philosophy. Swarthmore College.
Thomas H. Blackburn, B.A., Amherst College; B.A. and M.A., University of
Oxford; Ph.D., Stanford University, Associate Professor of English. 403 Wal­
nut Lane.
David L. Bowler, B.S. in E.E., Bucknell University; M.S. in E.E., Massachu­
setts Institute of Technology; M.A. and Ph.D., Princeton University, Associate
Professor of Electrical Engineering. 505 Yale Avenue.
Alice Brodhead, B.S. and M.A., University of Pennsylvania, Associate Pro­
fessor of Education and Director of Student Teaching. 316 Ogden Avenue.
Gomer H. Davies, B.S., East Stroudsburg State College; Ed.M., Temple Uni­
versity, Associate Professor of Physical Education for Men. 225 Cornell
Avenue.
Lee Devin, B.A., San Jose College; M.A. and Ph.D., Indiana University,
Associate Professor of English and Director of the Theatre. 511 Harvard Ave.
Lewis H. Elverson, B.S., University of Pennsylvania, Associate Professor of
Physical Education for Men. 6 Whittier Place.
James W. England, B.A., Kansas State Teachers College; M.A. and Ph.D.,
University of Missouri, Associate Professor of Mathematics. 312 Cornell Ave.
tShel Feldman, B.A., Northwestern University; Ph.D., Yale University, Asso­
ciate Professor of Psychology. 302 Ogden Avenue.
Lila R. Gleitman, B.A., Antioch College; M.A. and Ph.D., University of Penn­
sylvania, Associate Professor of Linguistics. 260 Sycamore Avenue, Merion
Station, Pa.
♦Absent on leave, fall semester, 1971-72.
tAbsent on leave, spring semester, 1971-72.

210

FACULTY
James H. Hammons, B.A., Amherst College; M.A. and Ph.D., The Johns
Hopkins University, Associate Professor of Chemistry. 17 Furness Lane,
Wallingford, Pa. 19086.
Stevens Heckscher, B.A., M.A. and Ph.D., Harvard University, Associate Pro­
fessor of Mathematics, Pritchard Lane, Wallingford, Pa.
Wulff D. Heintz, Dr. rer. nat., München University, Associate Professor of
Astronomy. 317 North Chester Road.
Patrick Henry, B.A., Harvard University; B.A. and M.A. University of Ox­
ford; M.A. and Ph.D., Yale University, Associate Professor of Religion. 915
Harvard Avenue.
Eleanor K. Hess, B.S. and M.S., University of Pennsylvania, Associate Pro­
fessor of Physical Education for Women. 302 North Chester Road.
Robinson G. Hollister, Jr., B.A., Amherst College; Ph.D., Stanford Univer­
sity, Associate Professor of Economics (part time). Benjamin West House.
Helen Manning Hunter, B.A., Smith College; Ph.D., Radcliffe College, Asso­
ciate Professor of Economics (part time). Featherbed Lane, Haverford, Pa.
tRobert O. Keohane, B.A., Shimer College; M.A., and Ph.D., Harvard Uni­
versity, Associate Professor of Political Science. 317 North Chester Road.
Timothy K. Kitao, B.A. and M.A., University of California, Berkeley; Ph.D.,
Harvard University, Associate Professor of Art History. 317 N. Chester Road.
Eugene A. Klotz, B.S., Antioch College; Ph.D., Yale University, Associate Pro­
fessor of Mathematics. 735 Yale Avenue.
¡George Krugovoy, B.A., M.A. and Ph.D., Philosophical Institute, Salzburg,
Austria, Associate Professor of Russian. 602 Elm Avenue.
Hugh M. Lacey, B.A. and M.A., University of Melbourne; Ph.D., Indiana
University, Associate Professor of Philosophy. Swarthmore College.
¡Philip Metzidakis, B.A., Dartmouth College; Ph.D., Yale University, Asso­
ciate Professor of Spanish. 513 Elm Avenue.
*Irene Moll, B.S. in Ed., University of Kansas; M.A., Texas University for
Women, Associate Professor of Physical Education for Women. The Damsite,
Wallingford, Pa.
Kathryn L. Morgan, B.A., Virginia State College; M.A., Howard University;
Ph.D., University of Pennsylvania. Associate Professor of History. 2101
Chestnut Street, Philadelphia, Pa.
Han« F. Oberdiek, B.S. and Ph.D., University of Wisconsin, Assistant Pro­
fessor of Philosophy, 211 Elm Avenue.
¡Van Doom Ooms, B.A., Amherst College; B.A., University of Oxford; Ph.D.,
Yale University, Associate Professor of Economics. 215 Cornell Avenue.
Howard Pack, B.B.A., City College of New York; Ph.D., Massachusetts In­
stitute of Technology, Associate Professor of Economics. 1530 Locust St.,
Philadelphia, Pa.
Jean Ashmead Perkins, B.A., Swarthmore College; M.A. and Ph.D., Columbia
University, Associate Professor of French. 913 Strath Haven Avenue.
tAbsent on leave, spring semester, 1971-72.
¡Absent on leave, 1971-72.
♦Absent on leave, fall semester, 1971-72.

211

FACULTY
*Steven I. Piker, B.A., Reed College; Ph.D., University of Washington, Asso­
ciate Professor of Anthropology. 125 Rutgers Avenue.
Ernest J. Prudente, B.S. and M.S., University of Pennsylvania. Associate Pro­
fessor of Physical Education for Men. 914 Surrey Road, Media, Pa.
Frederic L. Pryor, B.A., Oberlin College; M.A. and Ph.D., Yale University,
Associate Professor of Economics. 740 Harvard Avenue.
i Kenneth S. Rawson, B.A., Swarthmore College; M.S., Cornell University;
Ph.D., Harvard University, Associate Professor of Zoology. 228 Garrett
Avenue.
Alburt M. Rosenberg, B.À., Harvard University; M.S., University of Florida;
Ph.D., University of Pennsylvania, Associate Professor of Natural Science.
609 Hillbom Avenue.
tBernard Saffran, B.A., The City College of New York; Ph.D., University of
Minnesota, Associate Professor of Economics. Benjamin West House.
Robert E. Savage, B.A., Oberlin College; M.S. and Ph.D., University of
Wisconsin, Associate Professor of Biology. 411 Vassar Avenue.
Bernard S. Smith, B.A. and M.A., University of Oxford; Ph.D., Harvard Uni­
versity, Associate Professor of History. 540 Walnut Lane.
Susan Brooke Snyder, B.A., Hunter College; M.A. and Ph.D., Columbia Uni­
versity, Associate Professor of English. 519 Walnut Lane.
Donald K. Swearer, B.A., M.A., and Ph.D., Princeton University; B.D. and
S.T.M., Yale Divinity School, Associate Professor of Religion. 109 Columbia
Avenue.
Peter T. Thompson, B.A., The Johns Hopkins University; Ph.D., University of
Pittsburgh, Associate Professor of Chemistry. 925 Strath Haven Avenue.
John W. Williams, B.A., Yale University; M.A. and Ph.D., University of
Michigan, Associate Professor of Art History. 302 Avondale Road, Walling­
ford, Pa.
M. Joseph Willis, B.C.E., University of Washington; M.S., Cornell University;
Ph.D., The Johns Hopkins University, Associate Professor of Civil Engi­
neering. 306 Chestnut Lane.
A S S IS T A N T P R O F E S S O R S
tHarriet Shorr Baguskas, B.A., Swarthmore College; B.F.A., Yale School of
Art and Architecture. Artist in Residence. Price’s Lane, Moylan, Pa.
John R. Boccio, B.S., Polytechnic Institute of Brooklyn; Ph.D., Cornell Uni­
versity, Assistant Professor of Physics. 311 Dartmouth Avenue.
Thompson Bradley, B.A., Yale University; M.A., Columbia University, Assist­
ant Professor of Russian. 240 Ridley Creek Road, Moylan, Pa.
James Brow, B.A. and M.A., Oxford University, Assistant Professor of
Anthropology. 3 Crum Ledge.
$Absent on leave, 1971-72.
♦Absent on leave, fall semester, 1971-72.

212

FACULTY
Cyrus D. Cantrell, III, B.A., Harvard University; M.A. and Ph.D., Princeton
University, Assistant Professor of Physics. 519 Walnut Lane.
Clement Cottingham, B.A., Lincoln University; M.P.A., University of Cali­
fornia, Los Angeles; Ph.D., University of California, Berkeley, Assistant
Professor of Political Science and Director of Black Studies. 8B Whittier
Place.
William C. B. Cullen, B.A., Wake Forest University, Assistant Professor of
Physical Education for Men. 110 Columbia Avenue.
Roland B. di Franco, B.S., Fordham University; M.S., Rutgers University;
Ph.D., Indiana University, Assistant Professor of Mathematics. 317 North
Chester Road.
Teresa B. Freedman, B.A., Swarthmore College; Ph.D., University of Pennsyl­
vania, Assistant Professor of Chemistry. 303 South 40th Street, Philadelphia,
Pa.
James D. Freeman, B.A., and M.A., Harvard University, Assistant Professor
of Music and Director of the Orchestra. 8 Crum Ledge.
Julia Haig Gaisser, B.A., Pembroke College; M.A.; Harvard University; Ph.D.
University of Edinburgh, Assistant Professor of Classics. 309 Yale Avenue.
Sandra J. Gill, B.S., M.S., Ph.D., University of Michigan, Assistant Professor
of Biology. 404 Elm Avenue.
Thomas W. Hawkins, Jr., B.A., Houghton College; M.S., University of Roch­
ester; Ph.D., University of Wisconsin, Assistant Professor of Mathematics. 515
Elm Avenue.
James C. Hickman, B.A., Oberlin College; Ph.D., University of Oregon,
Assistant Professor of Biology. 404 Elm Avenue.
Raymond F. Hopkins, B.A., Ohio Wesleyan University; M.A., Ohio State Uni­
versity; M.A. and Ph.D., Yale University, Assistant Professor of Political
Science. 2 Crum Ledge.
James R. Hutchison, B.S., Wittenberg University; Ph.D., Princeton University,
Assistant Professor of Chemistry. Benjamin West House.
John B. Jenkins, B.S. and M.S., Utah State University; Ph.D., University of
California, Los Angeles, Assistant Professor of Biology. 558 Rutgers Avenue.
tNannerl Keohane, B.A., Wellesley College; B.A. and M.A., University of
Oxford; Ph.D., Yale University, Assistant Professor of Political Science (part
time). 317 North Chester Road.
♦Robert C. Mitchell, B.A., College of Wooster; B.D., Union Theological Semi­
nary; M.A. and Ph.D., Northwestern University, Assistant Professor of
Sociology. 307 Lafayette Avenue.
i Thomas N. Mitchell, B.A. and M.A., National University of Ireland; Ph.D.,
Cornell University, Assistant Professor of Classics. 220 Vassar Avenue.
Alden Adams Mosshammer, B.A., Amherst College; Ph.D., Brown University,
Assistant Professor of Classics. 915 Harvard Avenue.
J Absent on leave, 1971-72.
tAbsent on leave, spring semester, 1971-72.

213

FACULTY
Hans-Eberhard Mueller, B.A., Hunter College; M.A., University of California,
Berkeley, Assistant Professor of Sociology. 317 North Chester Road.
G. Stuart Patterson, Jr., B.S. and M.S., Massachusetts Institute of Technology;
Ph.D., The Johns Hopkins University, Assistant Professor of Engineering. 606
North Chester Road.
Barbara Z. Presseisen, B.A., Brandeis University; M.A.T., Harvard University;
Ed.D., Temple University, Assistant Professor of Education. 1943 Pine Street,
Philadelphia, Pa.
Charles Raff, B.A., University of Rochester; M.A. and Ph.D., Brown Univer­
sity, Assistant Professor of Philosophy. 318 North Chester Road.
Gilbert P. Rose, B.A., Princeton University; Ph.D. University of California,
Berkeley, Assistant Professor of Classics. 4 Crum Ledge.
Jennie-Keith Ross, B.A., Pomona College; M.A. and Ph.D., Northwestern
University, Assistant Professor of Anthropology. Swarthmore College.
Robert Roza, B.A., University of Toronto; M.A. and Ph.D., Princeton Univer­
sity, Assistant Professor of French. 404 Strath Haven Avenue.
Richard Schuldenfrei, B.A. and M.A., University of Pennsylvania, Assistant
Professor of Philosophy. Swarthmore College.
Victor K. Schütz, B.E.E. and M.A. in Mathematics, University of Detroit;
Ph.D., University of Pennsylvania, Assistant Professor of Engineering. 1317
Grenox Road, Wynnewood, Pa.
Barry Schwartz, B.A., New York University; M.A., University of Pennsyl­
vania, Assistant Professor of Psychology. 318 North Chester Road.
John S. Shackford, B.A., Carleton College; M.A. and Ph.D., Indiana University,
Assistant Professor of English, Swarthmore College.
Richard Sharvy, B.A., Reed College; M.A. and Ph.D., Wayne State Univer­
sity, Assistant Professor of Philosophy. 300 Avondale Road, Wallingford, Pa.
Simone V. Smith, Licence es Lettres, University of Grenoble, Assistant Pro­
fessor of French. 125 Forest Lane.
William Stull, B.A., Northwestern University; M.A., Massachusetts Institute
of Technology, Assistant Professor of Economics. 519 Walnut Lane.
Richard Terdiman, B.A., Amherst College; Ph.D., Yale University, Assistant
Professor of French. 317 North Chester Road.
Jeffrey Travers, B.A. and Ph.D., Harvard University, Assistant Professor of
Psychology. 409 Vi Elm Avenue.
Jon Van Til, B.A., Swarthmore College; M.A., University of North Carolina;
Ph.D., University of California, Berkeley, Assistant Professor of Sociology.
Swarthmore College.
Philip Weinstein, A.B., Princeton University; A.M. and Ph.D., Harvard Uni­
versity, Assistant Professor of English Literature. 510 Ogden Avenue.
Jerome H. Wood, Jr., B.A., Howard University; Ph.D., Brown University,
Assistant Professor of History. 919 Lombard Street, Philadelphia, Pa.
214

FACULTY
Margaret A. Yarvin, B.A., Swarthmore College; Ph.D., Brown University,
Assistant Professor of History. 515 Elm Avenue.
Mary Ann Young, B.S., Slippery Rock State College. Assistant Professor of
Physical Education for Women. 117 South Chester Road.
*Tsing Yuan, B.A. and M.A., George Washington University; Ph.D., University
of Pennsylvania, Assistant Professor of History. Swarthmore College.
IN S T R U C T O R S
Frank Dominguez, B.F.A. Pratt Institute; M.F.A. Yale University School of
Art and Architecture, Instructor in Studio Arts. 915 Harvard Avenue.
Robert Gallucci, B.A., State University of New York at Stony Brook; M.A.,
Brandeis University, Instructor in Political. Science.
Norma B. Grasso, Diploma Superior Instituto de Estudios Superiores, Buenos
Aires; M.A., Oberlin College, Instructor in Spanish. 915 Harvard Avenue .
iUwe Henke, M.A., University of Pennsylvania, Instructor in Philosophy. 3500
Race Street, Philadelphia, Pa.
Kenneth Lieberthal, B.A., Dartmouth College, M.A. Columbia University,
Instructor in Political Science.
tPaul Lutzker, B.A., University of Pennsylvania; M.A., The Johns Hopkins
University, Instructor in Political Science.
.
Karel Mikolas, B.S., Prague Institute of Engineering; B.F.A. Charles Uni­
versity (Prague) School of Applied Arts; M.F.A. Charles University School
of Monumental Sculpture, Instructor in Studio Arts. 915 Harvard Avenue.
Thomas L. Sherman, B.A., Yale University; M.A., Stanford University, In­
structor in English. 224 South Chester Road.
David H. Steinbrook, B.A., University of Pennsylvania; M.F.A., Princeton
University, Instructor in Music. 317 North Chester Road.
Douglas M. Weiss, Instructor in Physical Education for Men. Swarthmore
College.
L E C T U R E R S A N D A S S IS T A N T S
Claus Bahne Bahnson, B.A., Sankt Joergens Gymnasium, Copenhagen, Den­
mark; Ph.D., University of Rochester, Lecturer in Psychology. 141 Hughes
Road, Gulph Mills, King of Prussia, Pa.
Michael S. Barad, B.S., C.U.N.Y. (Queens College); M.S. in M.E., University
of Pennsylvania, Lecturer in Engineering 250 Beverly Blvd., Upper Darby, Pa.
Richard J. Bernstein, B.A., University of Chicago; B.S., Columbia University;
M.A. and Ph.D., Yale University, Visiting Lecturer in Philosophy (Haverford
College). 1614 Monk Road, Gladwyne, Pa.
Patricia Boyer, B.S., Trenton State College; M.A., New York University, Lec­
turer in Physical Education for Women. 817 Parkridge Drive, Media, Pa.
♦Absent on leave, fall semester, 1971-72.
on leave, 1971-72.

t Absent

215

FACULTY
Olga Fernandez Connor, Bach, en Let., Instituto de la Vibrora, Havana; M.A.,
University of Pennsylvania, Lecturer in Spanish. 268 Hathaway Lane, Wynnewood, Pa.
Brooke P. Cottman, B.A., Duke University, Assistant in Physical Education
for Men. 315 Yale Avenue.
Nancy C. Dorian, B.A., Connecticut College, M.A. and Ph.D., University of
Michigan, Visiting Lecturer in Linguistics (Bryn Mawr College).
Janice C, Fellman, B.S., Ursinus College, Lecturer in Physical Education for
Women. 2401 Martingale Rd., Media, Pa.
Mary K. Gergen, B.A. and M.A., University of Minnesota, Assistant in Psy­
chology. Millhouse, Rose Valley and Possum Hollow Roads, Wallingford, Pa.
Werner L. Gundersheimer, B.A., Amherst College; Ph.D., University of Wis­
consin, Visiting Lecturer in History (University of Pennsylvania). 507
Roumfort Road, Philadelphia, Pa.
Deborah Harris, B.A., Syracuse University; M.A. and M.Phil., Yale Uni­
versity, Lecturer in English. 4827 Baltimore Avenue, Philadelphia.
John L. Hershey, B.A., Eastern Mennonite College; M.A. and Ph.D., Uni­
versity of Virginia, Lecturer and Research Associate in Astronomy. 314
Dartmouth Avenue.
Gilbert Kalish, B.A., Columbia University, Associate in Performance (Music).
Swarthmore College.
Samuel T. Lachs, B.A., University of Pennsylvania; M.H.L., Jewish Theo­
logical Seminary; Ph.D., Dropsie College, Visiting Lecturer in Religion
(Haverford College). 250 S. 18th Street, Philadelphia, Pa.
Sarah Lee Lippincott, B.A., University of Pennsylvania; M.A., Swarthmore
College, Lecturer and Research Associate in Astronomy. 510 Elm Avenue.
Daniel Mayers, B.S. and M.A., University of Pennsylvania; M.A. and Ph.D.,
New York University, Visiting Lecturer in English Literature (Brooklyn
College). 34 Monroe Place, Brooklyn, N. Y.
James J. McAdoo, Assistant in Physical Education for Men. 513 East Bringhurst, Germantown, Pa.
Anne Ménard, Lecturer in French. 915 Harvard Avenue.
Jane Strong O’Leary, A.B., Vassar College; M.F.A., Princeton University.
Lecturer in Music. 50 William Street, Princeton, N. J.
Elke Plaxton, B.A., Brigham Young University; M.A., University of Colorado,
Lecturer in German. 4209 Baltimore Avenue, Philadelphia, Pa.
Marcia R. Satin, B.A. and M.A., University of Pennsylvania, Lecturer in
Russian. 256 South 21st Street, Philadelphia, Pa.
Helen P. Shatagin, Visiting Lecturer in Russian. 307 Cornell Avenue.
Robert M. Smart, B.A., Curtis Institute of Music; M.A., Westminster Choir
College, College Organist and Associate in Performance (Music). 18 Oberlin
Avenue.
216

FACULTY
Kit-Yin Tieng Snyder, B.S., College of the City of New York; M.A.; University
of Michigan, Associate in Studio Arts. 733 Old Lancaster Road, Bryn Mawr, Pa.
Barbara Yost Stewart, B.A., Swarthmore College, Assistant in Biology. 543
Marietta Avenue.
Robert Teitelbaum, B.A., East Tennessee State University, M.F.A. Pennsyl­
vania State University, Technical Director in the Theatre. 7 Crum Ledge.
Jean L. Tomezsko, B.A., Pennsylvania State University, Assistant in Biology.
4 Prince Eugene Lane, Media, Pa.
Paul Zukofsky, B.M. and M.S., Julliard School of Music, Associate in Per­
formance (Music). Swarthmore College.

217

FACULTY

Standing Committees of the Faculty, 1971-72
Academic Requirements: Gilbert, Chairman.
Closson, Hammons, Skeath, D. Smith, S. Smith, Stott, Swearer, J. Thomp­
son, Townsend, Walker, Willis.
Admissions and Scholarships: Quesenbery, Chairman.
Bryant, Carpenter, Davies, England, Peabody, Pryor, Skeath, Swing, Town­
send, Yarvin.
Computer: Mullins, Chairman.
Bowler, M. Connor, Cook, Gilbert, Heckscher, Hershey, R. Mitchell, Steinbrook.
Cooper: Shane, Chairman.
Closson, Devin, Freeman, Klotz, Mangelsdorf, Mueller, Traversi.
Council on Educational Policy: Gilbert, Chairman.
Bannister, Cantrell, Cross, Oberdiek, Perkins, Savage, Urban.
Curriculum: McCrumm, Chairman.
Bilaniuk (fall semester), Bowler (spring semester), Field, Gilbert, Govan,
Henry, Hickman, Kitao, Snyder, Stott.
Faculty and Staff Benefits: Cratsley, Chairman.
Cook, Fehnel, Maass, Pack, Patterson, Roza, Shero.
Faculty Procedures: Cross, Chairman.
Blackburn, Cottingham, Cratsley, England, Gilbert, Pagliaro, Urban.
Fellowships from Other Institutions: Cowden, Chairman.
Boccio, Cullen, Gaisser, Stott, Wright.
Library: Govan, Chairman.
Bradley, Gilbert, Hunter, Maass, Rose, van de Kamp, Weber.
Master of Arts: Raff, Chairman.
Heintz, Mautner, Ostwald, B. Smith, Wallach.
Physical Education and Athletics: Hess, Chairman.
Hollister, Lippincott, Prudente, Ross, Skeath, Stetson.
Pre-Medical Advisory: Jenkins, Chairman.
Bowie, Heckscher, Lange, Ross, Stott.
Promotion and Tenure: Cross, Chairman.
Beik, Gilbert, Heald, Pagliaro, Pierson.
Research Ethics: Gergen, Chairman.
Beik, Gaty, Mangelsdorf, Oberdiek, Savage, Terdiman, Van Til.
Research Support: Livingston, Chairman.
Bennett, Cratsley, Hopkins, Schrader, Shackford, P. Thompson, H.
Williams.
Schedule of Classes: J. Thompson, Chairman.
Cohn, Elverson, Gaty, Hawkins, Heald, Meinkoth, Mullins.
Swarthmore Fellowships and Prizes: Asensio, Chairman.
Boccio, Skeath, Townsend, Wright, Young.
Teacher Education: Gilbert, Chairman.
Bramson, Brodhead, Hutchison, Schuldenfrei, Sherman, Skeath, Tafoya,
Travers, Wood.
218

FACULTY
Teaching Technology: Schütz, Chairman.
Avery, Brodhead, di Franco, Gaty, Gleitman, Govan, Mullins, Rosenberg,
Weiss, J. Williams.
Use of College Facilities by Outside Organizations: Cook, Chairman.
Flemister, Hess, Shane, Skeath, Stanton, Stetson.

Divisions and Departments
I. DIVISION OF T H E HUM A N ITIES
Susan B. Snyder, Chairman.
Art, John W. Williams, Chairman.
Classics, Martin Ostwald, Acting Chairman.
English Literature, Harold E. Pagliaro, Chairman.
History, Harrison M. Wright, Chairman.
Mathematics, Eugene A. Klotz, Acting Chairman.
Modern Languages, Francis P. Tafoya, Chairman.
Music, Peter Gram Swing, Chairman.
Philosophy, Charles Raff, Acting Chairman.
Psychology, Kenneth J. Gergen, Chairman.
Religion, P. Linwood Urban, Chairman.
II. DIVISION OF T H E SOCIAL SCIENCES
James A. Field, Jr., Chairman.
Economics, Frank C. Pierson, Chairman.
Engineering, Samuel T. Carpenter, Chairman.
History, Harrison M. Wright, Chairman.
Mathematics, Eugene A. Klotz, Acting Chairman.
Philosophy, Charles Raff, Acting Chairman.
Political Science, David G. Smith, Chairman.
Psychology, Kenneth J. Gergen, Chairman.
Sociology and Anthropology, Leon Bramson, Chairman.
III. DIVISION OF T H E N A TU RA L SCIENCES AND
E N G IN EER IN G
Olexa-Myron Bilaniuk, Chairman (fall semester)
David L. Bowler, Chairman (spring semester)
Astronomy, Peter van de Kamp, Chairman.
Biology, Norman A. Meinkoth, Chairman.
Chemistry, Peter T. Thompson, Acting Chairman.
Engineering, Samuel T. Carpenter, Chairman.
Mathematics, Eugene A. Klotz, Acting Chairman.
Philosophy, Charles Raff, Acting Chairman.
Physics, Mark A. Heald, Chairman.
Psychology, Kenneth J. Gergen, Chairman.
219

A D M IN ISTR A T IO N
P R E S I D E N T ’S O F F I C E
Robert D. Cross, B.A., M.A., and Ph.D., Harvard University, President.
Mary Niemczewski, Secretary.
Mark W. Maxwell, B.A., Hamilton College; M.A., Yale University, Assistant
to the President.
V IC E -P R E S ID E N T S ’ O F F IC E
Edward K. Cratsley, B.A., College of Wooster; M.B.A. and D.C.S., Harvard
University, Vice-President—(Administration) and Controller.
Joseph B. Shane, B.A., Swarthmore College; M.A., University of Pennsylvania,
Vice-President—Public Relations and Alumni Affairs.
Richard M. Schrader, B.A. and M.B.A., Cornell University, Associate Develop­
ment Officer.
Pauline M. Carroll, Alison Carswell Naylor, B.A., Swarthmore College, Secre­
taries.
P R O V O S T ’S O F F I C E
Charles E. Gilbert, B.A., Haverford College; Ph.D., Northwestern University,
Provost.
Yvonne Crews, Secretary.
Gilmore Stott, B.A. and M.A., University of Cincinnati; B. A. and M.A. Uni­
versity of Oxford; M.A. and Ph.D., Princeton University. Associate P ro v o stRegistrar.
Lewis R. Gaty, II, B.A., Swarthmore College, Director of Institutional Research.
D E A N S ’ O F F IC E S
J. Edward Skeath, B.A., Swarthmore College; M.A. and Ph.D., University of
Illinois, Dean of Men.
Deborah Townsend, B.A. and M.A., University of Michigan, Dean of Women.
David L. Closson, B.A., Lincoln University, Assistant Dean of Students.
Phyllis H. Raymond, B.A., Indiana University; M.A., Swarthmore College. As­
sistant to the Deans.
220

ADM INISTRATION
Lynne Davis Mifflin, B.A. and M.A., Swarthmore College, Director of Financial
Aid and Adviser to Foreign Students.
Gloria Carey Evans, B.A., Western Washington College of Education; M.S.,
University of Washington; Ph.D., Stanford University, Consultant for Testing
and Guidance.
Head Residents in Dormitories;
Virginia von Frankenberg, B.A., University of Nebraska, Coordinator of
Women’s Dormitories, Parrish Hall.
Karen Flack Bonnell, B.A. Bryn Mawr College; M.S., Temple University,
Woolman House.
Virginia E. Myers, Willets Hall.
Lisa K. Ladd, B.A., University of South Florida; M.E., University of Georgia,
Worth Hall.
Sally Van Til, B.A. and M.A., University of California, Wharton Hall, F
Section.
Candace Widmer, B.A., Gettysburg College; M.A., Temple University, Mary
Lyon 4.
Secretaries to the Deans;
D. Gretchen Bowen, Rosamond W. Garrett, B.A., Wilson College, Julia Lemon,
Vera B. Morrison.
ADMISSIONS O FFICE
William D. Quesenbery, Jr., B.A., Randolph Macon College; M.A., Columbia
University, Dean of Admissions.
Douglas C. Thompson, B.S., Swarthmore College, Associate Dean of Admissions.
Barbara Pearson Lange, Associate Dean of Admissions.
Fletcher J. Bryant, Jr. B.A., Lincoln University; M.Re. Ed., Boston University
SchooLof Theology; B.D., Colgate-Rochester Divinity School, Assisant Dean
of Admissions.
David A. Walter, B.S., Swarthmore College, Assistant Dean of Admissions.
Edith DuBose Streams, B.A., Swarthmore College, Assistant to the Dean of
Admissions.
Emily Bonsall, Administrative Assistant.
Winifred J. Hall, Barbara J. Lawton, Secretaries.
R E G I S T R A R ’S O F F I C E
Gilmore Stott, B.A. and M.A., University of Cincinnati; B.A. and M.A., Uni­
versity of Oxford; M.A. and Ph.D., Princeton University. Associate Provost-^
Registrar.
Jane H. Thompson, B.A., Swarthmore College, Associate Registrar.
Marjorie L. Webb, B.A., University of Delaware; Edith Bartholomew, Mildred
Irwin, Secretaries.
221

ADM INISTRATION
LIBRARY STAFF
College Library
James F. Govan, B.A., University of the South; M.A., Emory University;
Ph.D., Johns Hopkins University, Librarian.
Margery J. Hiltz, Secretary to the Librarian.
Martha A. Connor, B.S., M.A., University of Pennsylvania; B.S. in L.S., Drexel
Institute, Associate Librarian.
Anne Perkins; Pauline Marshall, B.S., Simmons College; Ethel N. Wright,
Assistants, Serials Section.
Doris Beik, B.A. and B.S. in L.S., State University of New York at Albany,
Head, Cataloging Department.
Elizabeth L. Harrar, B.A., University of Delaware; M.A., University of
Pennsylvania; B.S. in L.S., Drexel Institute; Barbara Trogler, B.A.,
Hood College; M.S. in L.S., Drexel Institute, Catalogers.
Mary L. Frorer, B.A. and M.A., Swarthmore College; Patricia Iacona,
Assistant Catalogers.
Josephine Hopkins; Doris Pitman Moist; Doris Redfield; Barbara H.
Schleyer, B.S., Simmons College; Charlotte Weiss, Assistants.
Jane H. Aaron, B.A., Birmingham-Southern College; M.S. in L.S., Drexel
Institute, Head, Order Department.
Mary C. Kerbaugh, B.A., University of Pennsylvania; M.S. in L.S-, Drexel
Institute, Assistant Order Librarian.
Monique Constantino, Assistant.
Howard H. Williams, B.A., Lake Forest College; M.A. and B.S. in L.S.,
Columbia University, Head, Reference Department.
Lois G. Peterson, B.A., Oberlin College; Elizabeth H. Phillips, B.A.,
Swarthmore College, Assistants.
Catherine J. Smith, B.A., Swarthmore College; B.S. in L.S., Drexel Institute,
Head, Circulation Department.
George K. Huber, B.A., University of Pennsylvania; M.S. in L.S., Drexel
Institute, Assistant Head.
Charles Seeburger, B.A. and M.A., Bowling Green University; Virginia
von Frankenberg, B.A., University of Nebraska; Lee Williams, B.S.
in Ed., Delaware State College; Martha Scott; Judith W. Skreiner,
B.A., University of Western Australia, Assistants.
Eleanor A. Maass, B.A., M.S., University of Illinois; Ph.D., University of
Wisconsin, Science Librarian.
Josephine Smith, B.A., Swarthmore College, Assistant. Nancy Wyllie,
B.A., Oberlin College.
Friends Historical Library
John M. Moore, B.A., Park College; B.D. Union Theological Seminary;
M.A., Harvard University; Ph.D., Columbia University, Acting Director.
Jane A. Rittenhouse, B.A., Swarthmore College; M.A., Middlebury College;
M.S. in L.S., Drexel University, Assistant Director.
222

ADM INISTRATION
Claire B. Shetter, Philadelphia Musical Academy; Eleanor B. Mayer, B.A.,
Ohio Wesleyan University; Jane M. Thorson, Cornell College; Nancy Speers,
Swarthmore College, Assistants.
Swarthmore College Peace Collection:
Bernice Berry Nichols, B.A., University of Missouri, Curator.
Sylvia L. Haviiand, B.A., Goddard College, Assistant.
Honorary Curators of the Friends Historical Library
Anna Pettit Broomeli, Frances Williams Browin, Henry J. Cadbury, La
Verne Forbush, James R. Frorer, William Hubben, Caroline Biddle Malin,
Richmond P. Miller, Hadassah M. L. Holcombe, Edith Williams Way.
Advisory Council of the Swarthmore College Peace Collection
Irvin Abrams, Merle Curti, Alfred Hassler, Ernst Posner, Joseph B. Shane,
Frederick B. Tolies, E. Raymond Wilson.
COM PUTER CEN TER
Edgar R. Mullins, B.A., Grinnell College; M.A. and Ph.D., University of Illinois,
Director of Computer Education and Activities.
Ronald Anton, B.S., Drexel University, Director of the Center.
B U S IN E S S O F F I C E
G. Caroline Shero, B.A., Swarthmore College; M.B.A., University of Pennsyl­
vania, Associate Controller, Accounting and Finance.
Harold L. Frederick, Jr., B.S., Juniata College, Accountant.
Freda Thomas, Margaret A. Thompson, Ellen R. Augsberger, Ethel Peck, As­
sistants.
Lewis T. Cook, Jr., B.A., St. Lawrence University; M.S., Pennsylvania State
College, Associate Controller, Business Affairs.
Ruth B. Walker, Secretary; Barbara St. John, Purchasing Clerk.
Normund L. Bandrevics, B.B.A., University of Latvia, Manager of Bookstore.
Daisy S. Jeffery, Mary Hughes, Mary Naughton, Assistants.
Marguerite Clifford, Edith Cohen, Inger Mansfield, Edith Woodland, Stenographic
Staff.
Judy Grace Feiy, Helen Burgoyne, Dorothy H. Olson, Switchboard Operators.
Arlene Delozier, Postmistress.
BUILDINGS AND GROUNDS D E PA R TM EN T
William M. Stanton, Jr., B.A., University of Wisconsin, Director of Physical
Plant.
Joseph E. Spaiford, B.S., University of Missouri, Planning Engineer.
Franklin H. Briggs, B.A., Earlham College; Richardson Fields; David Melrose;
Harold Hofman; Henry Peirsol, William Grohol, Assistants to the Director of
Physical Plant.
223

ADM INISTRATION
June Camall, Dormitory & Housing Coordinator.
Francis Kavanaugh, Margaret R. Shaw, Sarah Hastings, Rosalie F. Mailer,
Secretaries.
Abbie Jones, Lily Mari, Virginia E. Myers, Rachel Williams, Phyllis Woodcock,
Dormitory Assistants.
John C. Wister, B.A., Harvard University; D.Sc., Swarthmore College, Director
Emeritus of the Arthur Hoyt Scott Horticultural Foundation.
Joseph W. Oppe, B.S., Marietta College; M.S., University of Idaho, Director of
the Arthur Hoyt Scott Horticultural Foundation and Swarthmore College
Horticulturist.
David Melrose, Assistant Director.
Gaye Parsio, Secretary.
ALUM NI AND FU N D OFFICES
Kathryn Bassett, Director.
Mary C. Kasper, Alumni Recorder.
Elizabeth Campbell, Elinor B. Eleniewski, Secretaries.
NEWS OFFICE
Maralyn Orbison Gillespie, B.A., Swarthmore College, Director.
Rhea B. Seagull, B.A., Douglass College, Assistant Director.
Mildred Strain, Secretary.
CAREER PLANNING AND PLACEM ENT
Judith Kapustin Katz, B.A., Temple University; M.A., University of Michigan,
Director.
Josephine Booth, Secretary.
H EA LTH SERVICE
Morris A. Bowie, B.A., University of Colorado; M.D., Harvard University, Col­
lege Physician.
Harold C. Roxby, B.S., Pennsylvania State University; M.D., Temple Univer­
sity, College Physician.
Erwin R. Schmidt, Jr., B.S., Yale University; M.D., University of Wisconsin,
Consulting Orthopedic Surgeon.
Consulting Psychiatrists:
J. W. Lyons, B.A., University of Scranton; M.D., University of Pennsylvania.
Donald V. Stevenson, B.A. and M.D., Universidad de Cartagena.
Silas L. Warner, B.A., Princeton University; M.D., Northwestern University.
224

ADM INISTRATION
Nurses:
Elizabeth Cozine, R.N., E. Elizabeth McGeary, R.N., Helen R. Martin, R.N.,
Joan Morton, R.N., Ida Moore Thomas, R.N.
Janet B. Hazzard, R.N., Secretary.
D E PA R T M E N T A L SECRETARIES, ASSISTANTS
AND TECHNICIANS
Art: Wallace C. Ayres, B.A., Swarthmore College, M.Ed., Harvard University,
Linda Rabben.
Astronomy: Mary MacD. Jackson, B.A., Swarthmore College; Nan Jones;
Elizabeth H. Kuhlman, B.A., Mount Holyoke College; Louise H. Mitchell,
B.S., West Chester State College; Michael D. Worth, A.A., Keystone Junior
College.
Biology: Lloyd Merritts; Otto Hebei, James H. Draper, III.
Chemistry: Ursula M. Davis, B.S., MT (ASCP) Colby Junior College; Jacqueline
Bray; Edward C. Kehl; Margaret Lehman, B.A., Swarthmore College.
Classics: Frances W. Slaugh, B.A., Swarthmore College.
Economics: Eleanor Greitzer; Mary E. Renneisen.
Education: Janice DeAncona.
Electronics Technician: John J. Dougherty.
Engineering: Frances Shero, B.A., Swarthmore College; Theodore T. Bartholo­
mew; Josephine Booth; T. F. Hockman.
English Literature and Division of the Humanities: Thelma M. Miller.
History: Eleanor W. Bennett.
Linguistics: Joan Linn.
Mathematics and Division of the Social Sciences: Dorothy D. Blythe.
Modem Languages: Martha Dieffenbach; Natalie Kruczaj.
Music: Mary G. Gatens.
Philosophy: Alta K. Schmidt.
Physical Education for Men: Elizabeth Bassett.
Physical Education for Women: Esther R. Gosser.
Physics: John R. Andrews; Anna V. DeRose.
Political Science: Eleanor Greitzer; Mary E. Renneisen.
Psychology: Virginia S. Greer; Otto Hebei.
Religion: Alta K. Schmidt.
Sociology and Anthropology: Pauline B. Federman; Marie C. Perkins.
225

VII
V IS IT IN G

E X A M IN E R S

DEGREES CONFERRED
AW ARDS AND

D IS T IN C T IO N S

ENROLLM ENT

S T A T IS T IC S

PLA N OF COLLEGE G RO UNDS

VISITING EX A M IN ER S 1971
ART HISTORY: Professor Sam Hunter, Princeton University; Professor Robert
A. Koch, Princeton University; Professor Paul Watson, University of Pennsyl­
vania.
ASTRONOMY: Dr. James Franklin Wanner, U. S. Naval Observatory.
BIOLOGY: Dr. Elof A. Carlson, State University of New York at Stony Brook;
Dr. A. Duncan Chiquoine, Hamilton College; Dr. Craig Edwards, University of
Massachusetts; Professor Marion Himes, Brooklyn College; Professor Bruce
Oakley, University of Michigan; Professor Melvin Santer, Haverford College.
CHEMISTRY: Professor Jay M. Anderson, Bryn Mawr College.
CLASSICS: Professor Anne Burnett, University of Chicago; Professor Daniel
J. Gillis, Haverford College.
ECONOMICS: Professor Ralph Beals, Amherst College; Professor Ronald Find­
lay, Columbia University; Professor Alvin Klevovick, Yale University; Pro­
fessor Richard D. Portes, Princeton University; Mr. William Stull, Massachusetts
Institute of Technology; Professor Robert Summers, University of Pennsylvania.
ENGLISH LITERATURE: Professor Michael Bell, Princeton University; Pro­
fessor Paul Gray, Princeton University; Professor Edward B. Irving, Jr., Uni­
versity of Pennsylvania; Professor John Middendorf, Columbia University;
Professor Lowry Nelson, Yale University; Professor Daniel Seltzer, Princeton
University; Professor Humphrey R. Tonkin, University of Pennsylvania; Pro­
fessor Helen H. Vendler, Boston University.
HISTORY: Professor Elizabeth Brown, Brooklyn College; Professor Robert W.
July, Hunter College; Professor James T. C. Liu, Princeton University; Professor
Alain Silvera, Bryn Mawr College; Professor Ronald Suny, Oberlin College;
Professor Russell Weigley, Temple University.
LINGUISTICS: Dr. Michael Parrish, University of Pennsylvania.
MATHEMATICS: Professor Ethan Bolker, Bryn Mawr College; Professor Jerry
L. Kazdan, University of Pennsylvania; Professor Arthur Mattuck, Massa­
chusetts Institute of Technology.
MODERN LANGUAGES
FRENCH: Professor John K. Simon, State University of New York at
Buffalo; Professor Albert Sonnenfeld, Princeton University.
PHILOSOPHY: Professor Gareth Matthews, University of Massachusetts; Pro­
fessor George Weaver, Bryn Mawr College; Professor Margaret Wilson, Prince­
ton University.
PHYSICS: Professor Roger H. Walmsley, University of Pennsylvania; Professor
Robert E. Warner, Oberlin College.
POLITICAL SCIENCE: Professor Bruce Ackerman, University of Pennsylvania;
Dr. Lucy Behrman, University of Pennsylvania; Dr. Robert Jervis, Harvard
University; Professor John D. Lewis, Oberlin College; Professor Theodore J.
Lowi, University of Chicago; Dr. Herbert J. Spiro, U. S. Department of State.
PSYCHOLOGY: Professor E. Kuno Beller, Temple University; Dr. Thomas
Cottle, Massachusetts Institute of Technology; Professor John Darley, Princeton
228

VISITORS EX A M IN ER S
University; Professor Henry Gleitman, University of Pennsylvania; Dr. Arien
Mack, The New School for Social Research; Professor Ralph Rosnow, Temple
University; Dr. J. Diedrick Snoek, Smith College; Professor Robin Winkler,
State University of New York at Stony Brook.
RELIGION: Professor Kenneth K. S. Ch’en, Princeton University; Professor
Howard C. Kee, Bryn Mawr College; Professor Jean A. Potter, Bryn Mawr
College; Professor Gerhard E. Spiegler, Haverford College.
SOCIOLOGY AND ANTHROPOLOGY: Mr. James Brow, University of Wash­
ington; Professor Lewis Coser, State University of New York at Stony Brook;
Professor Suzanne Keller, Princeton University; Professor A. Thomas Kirsch,
Cornell University; Professor R. Stephen Warner, Yale University.

DEGREES CONFERRED
June 7, 1971
BACHELOR OF ARTS
Marianne Louise Albertson, History
Martha Leigh Aldrich, Art History
Margaret Reece Allen, French
Barbara Albert Atkin, History
Jean-Marie Prestwidge Barch,
English Literature
Steven Jack Bardwell, Physics
Linda Ann Barrett, English Literature
Thomas J. Bates, Economics
Peter David Bell, Psychology
John Milton Benditt*, Philosophy
Charles Edward Berezin,
English Literature
Betty Katherine Bird, History
Faith Adele Blakely, Biology
Deborah G. A. S. Bond,
English Literature
Veta Ann Bonnewell, Biology
Luis Alonzo Booth, Economics
H. William Bowman, Religion
Edward Franklin Boyer, Mathematics
David Marius Bressoud, Mathematics
Robert Smedley Briggs, Economics
Phillida Faulkner Brown,
English Literature
Stephen Jay Burns, Physics
John Hillyard Burton, Economics
Elliot Cardozo Carlen, Mathematics
Monica Anne Carsky, Psychology

Jane Abbott Casselman,
English Literature
Catherine Felicie Caufield,
Sociology-A nthropology
Robert Scott Chase, Economics
Robert Bennett Clark, Zoology
Peter Tristram Coffin, Zoology
Susan Cohen, English Literature
Constance Hamilton Cole,
Political Science
James Colvin, History
Patrick Connell, Jr., English Literature
Kathryn Susan Cook, Philosophy
Peter Grotjan Cook,
Sociology-A nthropology
Peter Claver Costello, History
Linda Mae Cox,
Sociology-A nthropology
Robert Michael Cushman, Zoology
Joanne Cuthbertson, Art History
Kathleen L. Daerr, History
Lucy Carol Davis,
Music and Philosophy
William Abdollah Dellalfar,
Economics
Craig Richardson DeSha,
English Literature
Paul Joseph DiMaggio,
Sociology-Anthropology
Carmelita Ann DiMichael, Psychology
229

DEGREES CONFERRED
Ellen Edwards, Philosophy
Jane Eigenrauch, English Literature
William Beatty Evans,
English Literature
Kathleen Helen Felmey, French
Mitchell Feldmesser*, Biology
Judith Felsten, Art History
Constance Bains Fleming,
English Literature
Marsha Katherine Flisnick, History
Antoinette Maria LaP. Flowers,
History
Gail Langley Foster,
Sociology-A n thropology
Susan Leigh Foster,
Sociology-A nthropology
Jane M. Fraser, Mathematics
Carol Anne Freed, Zoology
Nancy Galbraith*, English Literature
Peter Howard Gann, Biology
Edith Garrison, French
Jean Isabelle Gaylord, Religion
Barbara Brownlee Gibson, Zoology
John Henry Gilbert, III, Biology
Kenneth P. Giles, History
Victoria Rose Gimbel*,
English Literature
Dorothy Goggin, Philosophy
Howard R. Gold, Philosophy
John David Goldman, Economics
David Raymond Goodrich, History
Andrew Grinnell Gordon, Religion
Steven Douglas Gordon,
Political Science
Bernard W. Greene, Economics
Geoffrey Lloyd Greene, Physics
Earle Davis Hales, Zoology
Mark Hankin, Economics and Political
Science-International Relations
Robert Scott Hardwig, Biology
Carol Ann Hartnett, Political Science
Susilee Catherine Hayes, Art History
Ruth Anne Perlmutter Hazen,
Mathematics
Richard Edwin Hegner,
Political Science
Robert Earl Heinaman, Philosophy
Louise C. Hellwig,
Chemistry and German
230

John Henle, Philosophy
David Hicks, Music
Karen Seager Hoe, Psychology
James Charles Holland, II,
English Literature and Philosophy
Martha Hall Hollinger,
English Literature
Carl David Holzman,
English Literature
Christopher Paul Howson,
Sociology-Anthropology
Sylvia Kay Humphrey, History
Barbara Walrath Hunter, Russian
David Champion Huntington,
Psychology
David William Inouye, Zoology
Kenneth Richard Jewell, Economics
Christine Marie Johnson,
English Literature
Mark Henry Jones,
Mathematics and Political Science
Joseph L. Kelly, English Literature
William Reinhardt Kennedy*,
Psychology
David Earl Kerr, Mathematics
Steven James Kerr, Mathematics
Kathryn Ann Knight, Psychology
Kim Irene Koch, English Literature
Douglas Robert Komer,
Political Science
Francesca McCormick Kress,
Sociology-Anthropology
Elaine Dickerson Kuehn, Psychology
Judith Cutright Larrimore, Philosophy
Jonathan Reiner Lax,
Sociology-A nthropology
Frederick M. Leader,
Economics and Mathematics
Jonathan P. Levin, Philosophy
Paula Frances Levin, Psychology
Edward Harrison Levy,
Sociology-Anthropology
Katherine Joan Little, Biology
Stephen Taylor Lowe, Biology
Anne Cathell Lowry,
Sociology-Anthropology
Barbara J. Mahl, French
Maurice Joseph Martin, Biology

DEGREES CONFERRED
John Norman Mayberry, Greek
M. Anne McArthur,
English Literature
Cornelia Ringgold McCurdy,
Art History
Daniel James McKay, Mathematics
Martha Lynn Meier, Political Science
Kenneth A. Meiklejohn, Jr.,
Philosophy
Esther Louise Mellon, Music
Steven Michael Melov, History
Harold Douglas Merrill III,
Economics
Kenneth Alan Meter, Chemistry
Kenneth Miller,
Sociology-A nthropology
Ljiljana M. Milosavljevic,
French
Scott Minor, History
Cheryl Warfield Mitchell,
English Literature
Susan Elizabeth Morrison, History
Teru Linnea Morton,
Sociology-A nth ropology
Ray R. Mullins, Economics
Virginia Louise Mustin, Art History
Susan Andrea Myers, Spanish
Sheila M. Naughton, Biology
Henry David O’Karma, Psychology
Edward Michael O’Neillt, Physics
Kenneth Akito Oye, Political Science
John Barry Palmer, History
Paula Spilner Parmentier, Psychology
Stephen B. Parsons, Philosophy
Erie Corley Pearson, Art History
Lyn Allyson Peery, Art History
Susan Gail Perchonock, Psychology
William Jonathan Pichardo,
Economics
Carol Pixton, History
Mark Robinson Proctor, Philosophy
Neil Stuart Prose, Philosophy
Martin Stevens Putnam, Philosophy
George Elliott Reed, Jr.,
Sociology-A nthropology
Frederick Tesdell Reitze, Biology
Jacqueline Reuss, French

Nicholas Reynolds, History
Donna Ellen Richardson,
English Literature
Judith Ann Richardson,
English Literature
Deborah Hathaway Roberts, Greek
Nancy Laurie Roberts,
English Literature
Holly Lynn Robinsont
Religion and SociologyAnthropology
John Gwilym Robinson, Zoology
Steven Thomas Roens,
Sociology-A nthropology
Rebecca Sarah Rothenberg*,
Sociology-Anthropology
Pamela Rose St. John, Chemistry
Marcia Satterthwaite,
English Literature
Richard Miller Schall, Philosophy
Robert M. Scheiber, Engish Literature
David Jay Scheidlinger, Biology
Eleanor Margaret Schmidt, History
Susan Jane Schug, English Literature
Sheryl Edith Sebastian, Psychology
Thomas Randolph Selden, Music
Geoffrey Selling, Ancient History
Charles Alben Shapiro,
Sociology-Anthropology
H. Alan Shapiro, Greek
Paul Lewis Shechtman, Economics
Sarah Worthington Shepard,
English Literature
Bruce Shigeura, Philosophy
Nancy Ellen Shoemaker, Mathematics
Glenn Norman Siegel, Biology
Joanne Simboli, History
David Lee Slansky, Political Science
H. Royer Smith, III*, Psychology
Jenny Fong-suk So, English Literature
Jeffrey Spielberg, Art History
Constance Vibeke Strand,
Sociology-Anthropology and
Zoology
Julia C. Struble, English Literature
Adrienne Sutton, French
231

DEGREES CONFERRED
Mabry Chambliss Swanson, Latin
Daniel McKay Taylor,
English Literature
Susan Elizabeth Taylor, Psychology
Allan Forrest Thomas, Mathematics
Charles Stephen Thomforde, Biology
Scott McClain Thompson, Psychology
Christine Louise Tolins, Biology
Ralph Worthen Tryon, Economics
Mary Stott Tyler, Biology
Marc Stuart Walter, Psychology
Jonathon David Warner,
Political Science
Daniel M. Wasserman, Philosophy
Nathan Wei, Zoology
William Pierce Welch, Economics
Susan Scott Welsh,
Psychology and Russian
Marc J. Wertheimer, Zoology

Randy Fair Wertheimer, Art History
Lynnea Christine West, Biology
Deborah Whittle, French
F. Frank Wiedemann,
English Literature
Charles Edward Williams, Jr.
Mathematics
Wendy L. Wintermute,
Sociology-Anthropology
Marie Jane Witwicki,
Sociology-Anthropology
Richard Emerson Wolfe, History
M. Elisa Wright, English Literature
Guy Moulton Yates, Mathematics
Susan Aviva Yelsey,
Sociology-Anthropology
Bertrand R. Yourgrau**,
English Literature

BACHELOR O F SCIENCE
Robert Leonard Abrahams,
Engineering
John Charles Baer, Engineering
Richard Walden Beatty, Engineering
Bryan William Butler, Engineering
Sylvia Jean Chin, Engineering

Alexander Phillip Cilento, Engineering
Jairo A. Correa G., Engineering
Benjamin L. Liu, Engineering
J. Denis Newbold, Engineering
Robert John Osborne, Engineering
Charles Alben Shapiro, Engineering

M ASTER O F ARTS
Michael Allen Boni, Psychology
Kyongae Chang, Astronomy

Phyllis Hall Raymond, Political Science

HONORARY DEGREES
DOCTOR OF HUMANE LETTERS
Russell Meiggs

tAs of the Class of 1969.
*As of the Class of 1970.
{With concentration in Black Studies.

232

DOCTOR OF LAWS
Henry S. Reuss

A W A R D S A N D D IS T IN C T IO N S
HONORS AWARDED BY THE VISITING EXAMINERS
HIGHEST HONORS:
William A. Dellalfar, Kenneth A. Oye.
HIGH HONORS:
Steven J. Bardwell, Linda M. Cox, Kenneth P. Giles, David R. Goodrich,
Steven D. Gordon, Edward H. Levy, Maurice J. Martin, Martha L. Meier,
Cheryl W. Mitchell, Carol Pixton, Martin S. Putnam, Nicholas Reynolds,
Deborah H. Roberts, Paul L. Shechtman, Nancy E. Shoemaker, Jenny F. So,
Susan E. Taylor, Susan A. Yelsey.
HONORS:
Linda A. Barrett, Thomas J. Bates, Peter D. Bell, Monica A. Carsky, Constance
H. Cole, Paul J. DiMaggio, William B. Evans, Gail L. Foster, Jane M. Fraser,
R. Scott Hardwig, Richard E. Hegner, Carl D. Holzman, Elaine D. Kuehn,
John N. Mayberry,-Donna E. Richardson, Judith A. Richardson, Nancy L.
Roberts, John G. Robinson, David L. Slansky, Daniel M. Taylor, Ralph W.
Tryon, Jonathon D. Warner, Deborah Whittle, Wendy L. Wintermute.
DISTINCTION IN COURSE AWARDED BY FACULTY
Marianne Louise Albertson, Margaret Reece Allen, Barbara Albert Atkin,
Catherine Felicie Caufield, Robert Bennett Clark, Robert Michael Cushman,
Carmelita Ann DiMichael, Antoinette Maria LaP. Flowers, Carol Ann Hartnett,
Robert Earl Heinaman, Karen Seager Hoe, Barbara Walrath Hunter, David
Champion Huntington, David William Inouye, Jonathan Reiner Lax, Frederick
M. Leader, Paula Frances Levin, Katherine Joan Little, Steven Michael Melov,
Teru Linnea Morton, David Jay Scheidlinger, Sheryl Edith Sebastian, H. Alan
Shapiro, Constance Vibeke Strand, Mary Stott Tyler, Marc J. Wertheimer.
ELECTIONS TO HONORARY SOCIETIES
PHI BETA KAPPA
Margaret Reece Allen, Barbara Albert Atkin, Steven Jack Bardwell, Monica
Anne Carsky, Robert Bennett Clark, William Abdollah Dellalfar, Jane M.
Fraser, Kenneth P. Giles, David Raymond Goodrich, Steven Douglas Gordon,
Richard Edwin Hegner, Robert Earl Heinaman, Barbara Walrath Hunter,
Jonathan Reiner Lax, Paula Frances Levin, Edward Harrison Levy, Katherine
Joan Little, Martha Lynn Meier, Steven Michael Melov, Cheryl Warfield
Mitchell, Kenneth Akito Oye, Carol Pixton, Nicholas Reynolds, Deborah
Hathaway Roberts, David Jay Scheidlinger, H. Alan Shapiro, Paul Lewis
Shechtman, Nancy Ellen Shoemaker, Jenny Fong-suk So, Susan Elizabeth
Taylor, Marc J. Wertheimer, Deborah Whittle, Susan Aviva Yelsey.
SIGMA XI:
Steven J. Bardwell, Kyongae Chang, Sylvia J. Chin, Robert B. Clark, Jane M.
Fraser, Geoffrey L. Greene, David W. Inouye, Benjamin L. Liu, J. Denis Newbold, Nancy E. Shoemaker.
SIGMA TAU:
Sylvia J. Chin, Benjamin L. Liu, J. Denis Newbold, Charles A. Shapiro.
233

AWARDS AND DISTINCTIONS
SWARTHMORE COLLEGE FELLOWSHIP AWARDS
The Hannah A. Leedom Fellowship to K a t h l e e n L. D aerr .
The Joshua Lippincott Fellowship to N icholas R ey n o ld s ..
The Lucretia Mott Fellowship to S h er y l S ebastian , D eborah Z u b o w .
SPECIAL AWARDS
The Ivy Award to Paul Shechtman.
The Oak Leaf Award to Dorothy Goggin.
The McCabe Engineering Award to J. Denis Newbold.
The Sarah Kaighn Cooper Scholarship to Ernest B. Abbott.
The Phi Beta Kappa Prize to John A. Goldsmith
The Brand Blanshard Prize to John R. Satterfield, III.
The Ella Frances Bunting Poetry Reading Contest: first prize, Betty M. McElrea;
second prize, Dennis A. Small; third prize, Deborah Zubow.
The William Plumer Potter Public Speaking Fund Awards:
The Potter Fiction Contest: first prize, James R. Thorpe; second prize, William
H. Eilberg; third prize, Marc S. Walter.
The Lois Morrell Poetry Prizes: first prize, William P. Yarrow; second prize,
Christine A. Wulfhorst.
The John Russell Hayes Poetry Prizes: first prize, Galip A. Ulsoy; second prize,
Randolph Lawlace.
The Academy of American Poets Award to William P. Yarrow.
The May E. Parry Memorial Award to Katherine J. Little.
The Scott Award to William B. Carr, Jr.

234

ENROLLM ENT OF STUDENTS BY CLASSES 1970-71
Seniors
Juniors
Sophomores
Freshmen
Total Undergraduates
Graduate Students
Special Students
Totals

Men Women
128
100
154
114
183
157
171
136
507
636
2
3
10
5
515
648

Total
228
268
340
307
1,143
5
15
1,163

G EOGRAPHICAL DISTRIBUTION 1970-71
Pennsylvania
New York
New Jersey
Maryland
California
Connecticut
Massachusetts
Ohio
Delaware
Virginia
Illinois
Florida
North Carolina
Texas
Indiana
Minnesota
District of Columbia
Michigan
Missouri
Vermont
Washington
Iowa
New Hampshire
Rhode Island
Tennessee
Alabama
Georgia
Wisconsin
Hawaii
Kentucky
Maine
Wyoming
Arkansas
Colorado
Mississippi
New Mexico
Oregon
Louisiana
Puerto Rico
Arizona

245
181
89
62
54
49
49
45
36
30
29
22
15
15
13
12
10
10
9
9
9
8
8
8
8
7
7
7
6
5
5
5
4
4
4
4
4
2
2
1

Idaho
Nebraska
Oklahoma
South Carolina
Virgin Islands
Total U.S.A.

1,097

11
Canada
5
England
Hong Kong
5
Thailand
5
Italy
4
Brazil
3
Japan
3
Mexico
3
2
Bermuda
2
Nigeria
Saudi Arabia
2
West Germany
2
1
Australia
Colombia
1
El Salvador
1
Guatemala
1
India
1
1
Iran
Jamaica
1
1
Kenya
1
Korea
1
Lebanon
1
Libya
1
Switzerland
Taiwan
1
1
Tanzania
Trinidad
1
1
Turkey
1
Uruguay
1
Venezuela
West Indies
1
Total from abroad
66
Grand Total
1,163

235

INDEX
Absence from Examinations, 72
Academic Honesty, 73
Academic Requirements, Committee on,
71, 218
Addams, Jane, Peace Collection (See
Swarthmore College Peace Collection)
Administrative Officers, 220-225
A dmission P rocedure, 21-25
Application Dates, 23
Scholastic Aptitude and Achievement
Tests, 23-24
School Subjects Recommended, 22
Advanced Degrees, 74-75
Advanced Placement, 25
Advanced Standing, 25
Advisers, 46,57
Alumni Association, Officers of, 204
Alumni Council, 204-205
Alumni Office, 47, 224
Ancient History and Civilization, Courses
in, 104-105
Arthur Hoyt Scott Horticultural Foun­
dation, 16
Art History, 83-87
Art, Studio, 50, 83, 86-87
Arts Center, 12
Asian Studies, 64-66
Astronomical Observatory, 12, 87
Astronomy, Courses in, 88-89
Athletic Fields, see Map, 238-239
Attachments to Courses, 61, 62
Attendance at Classes, 70
Automobiles, Regulations concerning, 48
Awards and Prizes, 77-78,233-234
Bachelor of Arts Degree, 74
Bachelor of Science Degree, 74
Barnard Music Fund, 17
Bartol Research Foundation, 12, 68
Benjamin West House, 17,239
Benjamin West Lecture, 17
Biology, Courses in, 89-95
Black Cultural Center, 44
Black Studies, 95-97
Board of Managers, Committees of, 203
Board of Managers, Members of, 201
Botany-see Biology
Buildings, see Map, 238-239
Calendar, College, 5-6
Career Planning, 46
Chemistry, Courses in, 98-101
Churches, 44
Classics, Courses in, 101-106
236

Collection, 44
College Entrance Examinations, 23-24
College Jobs, 39
Committees of the Board of Managers, 203
Committees of the Faculty, 218-219
Comprehensive Examinations, 56, 58, 74
Computer Center, 12
Cooper (William J.) Foundation, 15,16
Cooperation with Neighboring
Institutions, 67
Corporation, Officers of, 201
Course Advisers, 46, 57
Courses of Instruction, 81-198
Creative Arts, 67
Curriculum, 55-69
Cutting (Bronson M.) Collection, 14
Dance, 51, 170
Degrees Offered, 74-75
Degrees Conferred, 229-232
Dining Hall, 41, 44
Directed Reading, 62
Directions for Correspondence, 2
Directions for Reaching the College, 24
Distinction in course, 58
Divisions and Departments, 219
Dormitories, 43
Dramatics, 51
duPont (Pierre S.) Science Building, 12
Economics, Courses in, 106-110
Education, Courses in, 110-112
Educational Program, 55-69
Emeritus Professors, 206-207
Engineering, Courses in, 112-123
Engineering, Degrees in, 74-75, 113
English Literature, Courses in, 123-129
Enrollment Statistics, 9, 235
Entrance Requirements, 21-24
Examination Regulations, 72
Examinations, College Board, 23-24
Exclusion from College, 49, 73
Expenses, 26
Extra-Curricular Activities, 50
Faculty, Members of, 206-219
Faculty Regulations, 48, 70-73
Fees (Tuition, Residence, etc.), 26,75
Fellowships, 79-80
Financial Aid, 28
Fine Arts, see Art
Foreign Students, 235
Foreign Study, 68-69

INDEX
Formats for Instruction, 61, 64
Fraternities, 52
French, Courses in, 149-152
Friends Historical Library, 13, 222
Friends Meeting, 44
Geographical Distribution of Students,
235
German, Courses in, 152-155
Grades, 71-72
Graduate Study, 74-75
Graduation, Requirements for, 74
Greek, Courses in, 102
Health, Care of Students, 45, 46
History, Courses in, 129,135
Honors, Reading for, 58-61
Honors Examiners, 228-229
Housing, 43
Insurance, 44
Insurance, Accident and Sickness, 27,45
Inter-Disciplinary Work, 64
International Relations, Courses in, 135,
177
Judicial Bodies, 49
Language Laboratory, 12
Latin, Courses in, 103-104
Leaves of Absence, 61, 72
Libraries, 13-14, 222,223
Linguistics, 136-138
Loans to Students, 39
Managers, Board of, 201-202
Map of College Grounds, 238-239
Martin Biological Laboratory, 12
Mathematics, Courses in, 138-143
McCabe Library, 7, 13
Mediaeval Studies, 144
Meeting House, 44
Music, Courses in, 50, 158-162
National Scholarships, 29
News Office, 47
Objectives and Purposes, 9
Observatory, Astronomical, 12, 87
Overstreet Fund, 17
Peaslee (Amos) Scholarships, 69
Philosophy, Courses in, 162-167
Physical Education for Men, 168-169
Physical Education for Women, 169-171

Physical Education Requirements, 73,
167-170
Physics, Courses in, 171-176
Plan of College Grounds, 238-239
Poetry Workshop, 127
Political Science, Courses in, 176-183
Potter Collection of Recorded Literature,
14
Pre-Medical Program, 66-67
Prizes, 77-78, 234
P rogram of Study, 55-67
For Freshmen and Sophomores, 56-57
For Juniors and Seniors, 57-61
Honors Work, 58-61
Pre-Medical Program, 66-67
Psychology, Courses in, 183-188
Public Speaking Prizes, 78, 234
Religion, Courses in, 188, 192
Religious Life, 10, 44
Requirements for Admission, 21-24
Requirements for Graduation, 74
Residence, Regulations concerning, 43, 74
Russian, Courses in, 155-156
Scholarships, 28-39
Scholastic Aptitude Test, 23-24
Scott (Arthur Hoyt) Horticultural Foun­
dation, 16
Sharpies Dining Hall, 41, 44
Social Committee, 50
Sociology and Anthropology, 193-198
Spanish, Courses in, 156-158
Spock (Betty Dougherty) Memorial Fund,
15
Sproul Observatory, 12, 87
Student-Run Courses, 62-64
States, Summary of Students by, 235
Student Council, 49
Student Employment, 39
Study Abroad, 68-69
Summer School Work, 73
Swarthmore College Peace Collection, 14
Tarble Social Center, 44
Theater, Course in, 127
Transfer, Application for, 25
Tuition and Other Fees, 26
Vocational Advising, 46
West, Benjamin, Lecture, 17
Worth Health Center, 45

237

Swarthmore College
Campus

Key to the Map

1 ParrishHall
2 ParrishHall Annex
3 DuPont ScienceBuilding
4 HicksHall
5 Bartol Foundation
6 President’s House
7 Whittier House
8 FriendsMeetingHouse
9 Arts Center
PearsonTheatre
WilcoxGallery
10 Trotter Hall
11 BeardsleyHall
12 MartinBiological Laboratory
andAnimal Laboratory
13 SharpiesSwimmingPool
14 Hall Gymnasium
15 ReliefMapof Campus
(Scott Building)
18 ScottOutdoorAuditorium
17 Sproul Observatory
18 Clothier Memorial
19 McCabeLibrary
20 CunninghamHouse
21 BondMemorialandLodges
22 BenjaminWest House
23 WorthHealthCenter
24 TarbleSocial Center

25 SharpiesDiningHall
26 Lamb-Miller FieldHouse
27 Clothier Fields
28 SquashCourts
29 Barn
30 Service Building
31 HeatingPlant
32 CunninghamField
33 Tennis Courts
34 Proposedsite of women's
athletic facilities
35 Proposedsiteofmusicbuilding
36 Proposedsiteofdramabuilding
37 Proposedsiteofstudioarts
andgallerybuilding
38 RobinsonHouse—Black
Cultural Center
39 Scott Horticultural
FoundationOffice
40 LilacCollection
41 PeonyCollection
42 Magnolias
43 Crabapples
44 Pinetum
45 Rhododendronsandazaleas
46 DeanBondRoseGarden
47 Scott FoundationNursery
andtestplots

Dormitories and Residences

ADana Dormitory
B Hallowell Dormitory
C WhartonHall
D Willets Dormitory
E WorthDormitory
F Palmer Hall
GPittenger Hall
HRoberts Hall
) AshtonHouse
K WoolmanHouse
L MaryLyonBuildings
MProfessors' Houses
NEmployees’Houses
Fraternity Lodges

a, b, c, d, ande

r